,transcriber's ,note3 ,bold text is surrounded by equal signs and italic text by underscores4 ,,things ,,worth ,,doing ,,and ,,how ,,to ,,do ,,them ,,the ,,beard ,,books ,,for ,,girls ,by ,,lina and ,,adelia ,b4 ,,beard ,things ,worth ,doing and ,how to ,do ,them4 ,illustrated by the authors4 #b4jj4 ,recreations for ,girls4 ,illustrated by the authors4 #b4jj 7postage extra74 ,what a ,girl ,can ,make and ,do4 ,new ,ideas for ,work and ,play4 ,illustrated by the authors4 #b4jj4 ,the ,american ,girl's ,handy ,book2 or1 ,how to ,amuse ,yourself and ,others4 ,illustrated by the authors4 #b4jj4 ,,the ,,beard ,,books ,,for ,,boys ,by ,,daniel ,c4 ,,beard ,the ,field and ,forest ,handy ,book4 ,new ,ideas for ,out of ,doors4 ,illustrated by the author4 #b4jj4 ,the ,jack of ,all ,trades2 or1 ,new ,ideas for ,american ,boys4 ,illustrated by the author4 #b4jj4 ,the ,outdoor ,handy ,book4 ,new and ,cheaper ,edition of ,the ,american ,boy's ,book of ,sport4 ,illustrated by the author4 #b4jj4 ,the ,american ,boy's ,handy ,book2 or1 ,what to ,do and ,how to ,do ,it4 ,illustrated by the author4 #b4jj4 ,illustration3 ,,things ,,worth ,,doing ,,and ,,how ,,to ,,do ,,them ,,by ,lina ,beard and ,adelia ,b4 ,beard ,new ,york ,charles ,scribner's ,sons #aijf ,,copyright1 #aijf ,,by ,,charles ,,scribner',s ,,sons ,,special ,,notice ,the publishers hereby give warning that the unauthorized printing of any portion of the text of this book1 and the reproduction of any of the illustrations or diagrams1 are expressly forbidden4 ,,to ,,our ,,little ,,niece ,,barbara ,,beard ,,preface ,,we know our girls4 ,we know and sympathize with their restless longing for activity4 ,the normal girl simply must be doing something1 and this ceaseless energy1 at times rather appalling to her elders1 is but natural and right4 ,it is in the young blood coursing so swiftly and joyously through her veins1 and it must find vent in one way or another4 ,but there is no need of doing that which brings neither true pleasure nor the joy of accomplishing something worth while1 for the world is full of delightful things really worth the doing4 ,we have only to open our eyes and ears to find them crowding forward to claim our attention1 and the choice is between better and best4 ,there are merry frolics and active games that stimulate the health and renew the vitality of the body and there are scores of charming things for willing hands to make which are not only worth the making but which bring skill to the fingers and breadth and energy to the mind4 ,in this1 our fourth book for girls1 we are giving some of the things we have found well worth the doing1 and it is our hope that our girl friends will also see their worth and find in them inspiration for further experiments in pastime and frolics4 ,,the ,,authors ,july #c1 #aijf4 ,,contents ,,part ,i ,,parties1 ,,shows ,,and ,,entertainments ,,chapter ,i ,,page ,a ,,fourth ,,of ,,july ,,lawn ,,frolic #c ,ground ,decoration1 #c2 ,firecracker ,invitation1 #d2 ,pantomime ,charades1 #f2 ,to ,make the ,sun-bonnet1 #g2 ,shuffle ,race1 #aj2 ,hurling the ,lance1 #aj2 ,daylight ,fireworks1 #aa2 ,balloon ,ascension1 #aa2 ,the ,myth1 #ab2 ,pandora ,box1 #ab2 ,the ,balloons1 #ac4 ,,chapter ,,ii ,a ,,wonderful ,,circus ,,at ,,home ,,with ,,moving ,,animals #ae ,mademoiselle ,rosebud1 #af2 ,to ,give the ,horse ,power to ,move1 #ah2 ,bob1 the ,wonderful ,elephant1 #bj4 ,,chapter ,,iii ,a ,,novel ,,easter ,,party ,,with ,,new ,,easter ,,games #cc ,egg ,tennis1 #cc2 ,number of ,eggs1 #cc2 ,to ,prepare the ,eggs1 #cd2 ,shower of ,paper1 #cf2 ,the ,rackets1 #ch2 ,the ,game1 #ci2 ,butterfly ,game1 #db2 ,magic ,dye ,kettle1 #dc4 ,,chapter ,,iv ,a ,,doorway ,,punch ,,and ,,judy ,,show #de ,the ,stage1 #de2 ,to ,make ,punch's ,head1 #df2 ,punch's ,dress1 #ej2 ,judy's ,head1 #ea2 ,the ,baby1 #eb2 ,drama of ,punch and ,judy1 #ec4 ,,chapter ,v ,,hallowe',,en ,,merrymaking #ee ,novel ,ways of ,telling ,fortunes1 #ee2 ,invitation ,rings of ,grass1 #ee2 ,black ,cats1 #ef2 ,pair of ,old ,slippers1 #eh2 ,cups and ,bowls1 #ei2 ,the ,wedding ,race1 #fa2 ,the ,vesper ,rite1 #fe2 ,bean ,bag ,test1 #ff2 ,the ,witch ,screen1 #ff2 ,fairy ,airships1 #gj2 ,blarney ,stone ,game1 #ga4 ,,chapter ,,vi ,,dance ,,of ,,titania1 ,,queen ,,of ,,the ,,fairies #ge ,the ,stage1 #ge2 ,titania1 #gi2 ,costume1 #hb2 ,wings1 #hc4 ,,chapter ,,vii ,,thanksgiving ,,party #he ,apple1 ,orange and ,pumpkin ,games1 #he2 ,game ,court1 #ij2 ,the ,game1 #ib2 ,rapid-,transit ,thanksgiving ,story1 #ib2 ,pumpkin ,lantern1 #ic2 ,forfeit1 #ie4 ,,chapter ,,viii ,,impromptu ,,moving ,,pictures ,,for ,,thanksgiving #ig ,puritan ,woman's ,dress1 #ih2 ,puritan ,man's ,costume1 #ih2 ,the ,properties1 #aja2 ,a ,pantomime1 #ajb4 ,,chapter ,,ix ,a ,,valentine ,,entertainment ,,with ,,original ,,valentines #ajc ,the ,post-,office1 #ajd2 ,valentine ,stamps1 #ajg2 ,when the ,bell ,rings1 #ajg2 ,heart ,valentine1 #aji2 ,world ,valentine1 #aji2 ,daisy ,valentine1 #aaj2 ,love's ,palette1 #aaa4 ,,chapter ,x ,,the ,,wild ,,west ,,show ,,on ,a ,,table #aac ,a ,panorama1 #aac2 ,pasting ,pictures1 #abj2 ,the ,performers1 #abj2 ,a ,tent1 #abc4 ,,chapter ,,xi ,,roof ,,picnic ,,with ,,brook ,,to ,,cross ,,and ,,flowers ,,to ,,pick #abg ,sunflowers1 #abg2 ,hollyhocks1 #abi2 ,roses1 #acj2 ,peaches1 ,plums and ,apples1 #acj2 ,on the ,roof1 #aca2 ,country ,picnic1 #acb2 ,crossing the ,brook1 #acc2 ,japanese ,tag1 #acd4 ,,chapter ,,xii ,,the ,,magic ,,peep ,,show #acg ,the ,slides1 #ach2 ,the ,cow ,jumped ,over the ,moon1 #aci2 ,life in ,fairy ,waters1 #ada2 ,easter ,chicks1 #adc2 ,three ,blind ,mice1 #add2 ,dance of the ,dolls1 #ade2 ,the ,bouquet1 #adg2 ,the ,little ,sun-bonnet ,girl1 #adi4 ,,chapter ,,xiii ,,plant ,,your ,,garden ,,if ,,you ,,can #aec ,a ,new ,flower ,game1 #aec2 ,marking ,out ,flower ,beds1 #aeg2 ,flags1 #aeg2 ,the ,rackets1 #aeh2 ,the ,game1 #aei2 ,a ,tally ,card1 #aei2 ,to ,determine ,choice of ,sides1 #afj4 ,,chapter ,,xiv ,,jolly ,,little ,,santa ,,claus ,,with ,,his ,,reindeer ,,and ,,sleigh #afc ,the ,sleigh1 #afd2 ,reindeer1 #afe2 ,santa ,claus1 #afh2 ,christmas ,gifts1 #agj2 ,christmas ,cards1 #agb4 ,,chapter ,,xv ,a ,,living ,,christmas ,,tree #agc ,how to ,prepare1 #agc2 ,the ,peaked ,hat1 #agd2 ,to ,decorate1 #agg4 ,,chapter ,,xvi ,,how ,,to ,,get ,,up ,a ,,girls' ,,fair #agi ,a ,managing ,committee1 #agi2 ,blackbirds1 #aha2 ,packages for the ,blackbirds1 #ahd2 ,express ,office1 #ahf2 ,letters1 #ahg2 ,post-,office1 #ahg2 ,decorations1 #ahg2 ,postmaster1 #aib4 ,,chapter ,,xvii ,,camping ,,out ,,in ,,your ,,back ,,yard #aid ,camping ,outfit1 #aid2 ,tent1 #aig2 ,table1 #aih2 ,safe1 #aii2 ,spring1 #bjj2 ,a ,fine ,pail1 #bja2 ,camp-fire1 #bja2 ,a ,boat1 #bjb2 ,out ,fishing1 #bjd4 ,,chapter ,,xviii ,,outdoor ,,fun ,,with ,,home-,,made ,,tether ,,ball #bjg ,the ,pole1 #bjg2 ,the ,cover for the ,ball1 #bjg2 ,a ,court on the ,grounds1 #baa2 ,a ,pattern for the ,rackets1 #bad2 ,the ,object of the ,game1 #bae4 ,,part ,,ii ,,miniature ,,seven ,,wonders ,,of ,,the ,,world ,,chapter ,,xix ,,the ,,pyramids ,,of ,,egypt #bai ,cheops's ,home1 #bai2 ,the ,pyramid1 #bbj2 ,carving the ,wonderful ,sphinx1 #bbe2 ,making the ,date ,palm1 #bbg2 ,making the ,camels1 #bbh4 ,,chapter ,,xx ,,the ,,colossus ,,of ,,rhodes #bcc ,island of ,rhodes1 #bcc2 ,to ,make the ,colossus1 #bcd2 ,mark the ,features1 #bch2 ,the ,pedestal1 #bdj4 ,,chapter ,,xxi ,,the ,,pharos ,,of ,,alexandria ,,and ,,the ,,mausoleum ,,of ,,halicarnassus #bde ,the ,first ,lighthouse1 #bde2 ,the ,building ,lot1 #bdf2 ,the ,foundation1 #bdh2 ,the ,marble ,steps1 #beb2 ,an ,artificial ,island1 #bed2 ,the ,mausoleum of ,halicarnassus1 #bee4 ,,chapter ,,xxii ,,the ,,statue ,,of ,,zeus ,,at ,,olympia #bei ,throne of ,white ,cardboard1 #bfc2 ,upper ,dais1 #bfd2 ,footstool1 #bfe2 ,inlaying the ,throne with ,ebony1 #bfg2 ,the ,drapery1 #bfg2 ,winged ,victory1 #bfh4 ,,chapter ,,xxiii ,,the ,,temple ,,of ,,diana ,,at ,,ephesus #bfi ,ionic ,column1 #bfi2 ,the ,ground ,plan1 #bgj2 ,the ,outer ,row of ,columns1 #bga2 ,a ,cella1 #bga2 ,the ,goddess ,diana1 #bgb2 ,marble ,steps1 #bgd2 ,the ,side ,steps1 #bgf4 ,,chapter ,,xxiv ,,hanging ,,gardens ,,of ,,babylon #bgi ,the ,king's ,wife1 ,amytis1 #bgi2 ,the ,foundation1 #bhj2 ,to ,make the ,twelve ,openings1 #bha2 ,the ,babylonian ,arches1 #bhc2 ,last ,platform1 #bhe2 ,to ,find the ,centre1 #bhe2 ,planting ,shrubs and ,trees1 #bhg2 ,building the ,steps1 #bhi2 ,stone ,broad-fronted ,bulls1 #bic2 ,two ,statues1 #bid2 ,the ,shrubbery1 #big4 ,,part ,,iii ,,things ,,to ,,make ,,for ,,home1 ,,gift ,,days ,,and ,,fairs ,,chapter ,,xxv ,,new ,,christmas ,,decorations #cjc ,paper1 #cjc2 ,holly1 #cjd2 ,holly ,berries1 #cjg2 ,wreaths1 #caj2 ,for ,mistletoe1 #caj2 ,stems1 #caa2 ,ropes of ,evergreen1 #cab4 ,,chapter ,,xxvi ,,doll ,,house ,,of ,,pasteboard #cae ,windows and ,doors1 #caf1 #cag2 ,doorknobs1 #cag2 ,window ,glass1 #cah2 ,window ,sash1 #cai2 ,the ,frieze1 #cbb2 ,a ,rug for the ,living ,room1 #cbc2 ,book ,shelves1 #cbd2 ,tissue ,paper ,curtains1 #cbd4 ,,chapter ,,xxvii ,,the ,,making ,,of ,a ,,bayberry ,,candle #cbf ,bayberry ,bushes1 #cbf2 ,the ,leaves1 #cbi2 ,the ,berries1 #ccj2 ,ready for the ,candles1 #ccj2 ,bayberry ,wax1 #cca2 ,candle ,moulds1 #cca2 ,candlewicks1 #ccd4 ,,chapter ,,xxviii ,,water ,,toys--,,little ,,wax ,,people ,,that ,,swim ,,and ,,ride ,,on ,,rafts #cch ,patterns for the ,little ,people1 #cch2 ,a ,toy ,life ,rope1 #cdj2 ,the ,bathing ,place1 #cda2 ,for the ,raft1 #cda2 ,a ,little ,lumberman1 #cdd2 ,launching the ,raft1 #cde2 ,making the ,mermaid1 #cde4 ,,chapter ,,xxix ,,how ,,to ,,weave ,,without ,a ,,loom #cdi ,method ,invented by the ,author1 #cdi2 ,a ,weaving ,board1 #cdi2 ,directions for a ,blue and ,white ,cotton ,rag1 #cej2 ,to ,weave1 #ceb2 ,to ,lengthen the ,warp1 #cec2 ,to ,make a ,heavier ,rug1 #ceg4 ,,chapter ,,xxx ,,how ,,to ,,make ,,your ,,own ,,easter ,,cards ,,and ,,gifts #ceh #h4f ,cards ,representing ,easter ,flowers1 #ceh2 ,the ,cross1 #cfj2 ,the ,tulip ,bud1 #cfa2 ,the ,dainty ,bloodroot1 #cfc2 ,easter ,egg ,card1 #cfc2 ,easter ,bells1 #cfd2 ,to ,make the ,turtle1 #cff2 ,the ,pig1 #cfg2 ,the ,spoon1 #cfh2 ,an ,umbrella1 #cfi2 ,the ,doll's ,chair1 #cgj2 ,strawberry1 #cga2 ,doll's ,cradle1 #cgb2 ,bird's ,nest1 #cgc2 ,sail ,boat1 #cgc2 ,napoleon1 #cge2 ,josephine1 #cgi4 ,,chapter ,,xxxi ,,home-,,made ,,candlesticks #che ,the ,clay1 #che2 ,modelling ,tools1 #chg2 ,strong ,table1 #chg2 ,china ,saucer1 #chh2 ,a ,close ,coil1 #chi2 ,the ,handle1 #cic2 ,blending of ,decoration1 #cid2 ,how to ,preserve ,unfinished ,work1 #cie2 ,glazing1 #cie2 ,other ,methods of ,coloring ,pottery1 #cif4 ,,chapter ,,xxxii ,,what ,,to ,,make ,,of ,,bananas1 ,,oranges ,,and ,,apples #cii ,an ,orange-skin ,coracle1 #djj2 ,a ,canoe ,made from a ,banana ,skin1 #dja2 ,apple ,lantern or ,fairy ,lamp1 #djc4 ,,chapter ,,xxxiii ,,little ,,paper ,,columbus ,,and ,,his ,,paper ,,ship #dje ,columbus's ,ship1 #djf2 ,to ,make the ,mizzenmast1 #djh2 ,the ,bowsprit1 #djh2 ,the ,forward ,deck1 #dji2 ,deck-,fence1 #daj2 ,a ,spar1 #daj2 ,the ,mainmast1 #daa2 ,the ,sails1 #daa2 ,a ,paper ,flag1 #dab2 ,main-,topsail1 #dab2 ,crow's ,nest1 #dab2 ,the ,jigger ,sail1 #dac2 ,wigwams1 #daf2 ,ferdinand and ,isabella1 #dag4 ,,chapter ,,xxxiv ,,how ,,to ,,make ,,friends ,,with ,,the ,,stars #dah ,ursa ,major1 #dah2 ,ursa ,minor1 #dbj2 ,a ,fairy ,tale about the ,starry ,bears1 #dba2 ,cassiopeia1 #dba2 ,leo1 the ,lion1 #dbb2 ,northern ,crown1 #dbc2 ,castor and ,pollux1 #dbc2 ,orion1 #dbd2 ,taurus1 #dbe4 ,,chapter ,,xxxv ,,stencil ,,painting ,,and ,,how ,,to ,,make ,,the ,,stencils #dbf ,dyes1 #dbf2 ,a ,portire1 #dbg2 ,to ,make a ,design for ,stencilling1 #dbh2 ,stencilling ,cheese-cloth ,curtains1 #dcc2 ,the ,tassels1 #dce2 ,laundering1 #dch4 ,,part ,i ,,parties1 ,,shows1 ,,and ,,entertainments ,,chapter ,i ,a ,,fourth ,,of ,,july ,,lawn ,,frolic ,,this is not to be a formal lawn party1 but a genuine1 fun-provoking ,fourth of ,july frolic with every one in comfortable dress appropriate for active games4 ,there is to be no dancing1 no tennis1 nothing in the way of ordinary entertainment except1 perhaps1 the refreshments1 and they too should be as nearly in keeping with the day as possible4 ,prepare your guests for something novel by issuing your invitations in the form of giant firecrackers4 ,decorate ,your ,grounds and make them as festive as possible with fluttering flags1 floating streamers1 red1 white1 and blue bunting1 and ,japanese lanterns4 ,also provide a number of small flags1 one for each guest1 to be worn in the hat1 hair1 belt1 and buttonhole4 ,this little touch of uniform will not only make the scene gayer and more exhilarating1 but1 like badges of an order1 will have the effect of dispelling the stiffness of new acquaintances1 and bringing the party closer together as members of one band of merrymakers4 ,for the ,giant ,firecracker ,invitations you will need several sheets of bright red tissue paper1 more of white tissue paper1 and some white unlined writing paper4 ,a ball of soft white cotton string will also be required4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #a4--,lay the paper cylinder on the red tissue paper4 ,cut an oblong of red tissue paper1 a circular piece of white tissue paper1 and a square of writing paper for each invitation4 ,make the red oblong six inches long and three inches wide1 the circle six inches in diameter1 and the writing paper four inches square4 ,of the paper square make a cylindrical roll that will measure about three-quarters of an inch across the end4 ,the easiest way to do this is to roll the paper on a candle1 keeping the end edges even1 and paste the side edge down while still wrapped around the candle4 ,pull the candle out of the paper and you have a perfect cylinder4 ,place the paper cylinder on the red tissue paper oblong so that there will be an even inch of red paper at each end 7,fig4 #a74 ,paste one long edge of the red paper to the cylinder and roll it on the table1 bringing the opposite edge up smoothly1 then paste that edge also in place 7,fig4 #b74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #b4--;,cylinder in red paper cover4 ,now prepare and write the note of invitation to be put in the firecracker envelope4 ,with ,short ,brush ,strokes1 from inside to edge1 paint an irregular band of blue1 half an inch wide1 around the edge of the tissue paper circle1 using water colors for the purpose4 ,write the invitation with red ink around the circle just inside the blue border1 or straight across above and below the centre4 ,although the party is to be informal1 a note written in the first person does not harmonize with the impersonal nature of a firecracker1 therefore it is better to word the invitation something like this3 ,miss ,mary ,brown requests the pleasure of the ,misses ,green's company at an informal lawn frolic on ,wednesday1 the ,fourth of ,july1 from four to six o'clock4 ,active games4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #c4--,the note of invitation looks like this4 ,when the ink is quite dry pinch the paper together at the centre1 making it look something like a paper flower1 twist it a little1 and tie on the point a piece of the white cotton string4 ,the string should be about ten inches long and must be tied at the middle 7,fig4 #c74 ,drop one end of the string through the cylinder and1 taking hold of the end1 draw the invitation into its envelope4 ,crush in the extra red paper at each end until it fills the opening and leaves the string extending from the centre 7,fig4 #d74 ,write the address and the words1 8,pull the long string10 on the outside of the now almost perfect giant firecracker1 and deliver by hand1 for such an invitation would be broken and spoiled in going through the mail4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #d4--;,giant firecracker with invitation inside4 ,the following ,order of ,entertainment is well adapted to the ,fourth of ,july lawn frolic3 ,out-of-door ,pantomime ,charades4 ,shuffle ,race4 ,hurling the ,lance4 ,daylight ,fireworks4 ,the programme opens with the not too vigorous game of ,pantomime ,charades4 ,this will give all the opportunity of taking part and alternately acting and resting4 ,stake out the four corners of your stage with groups of flags1 driving their sticks into the ground to hold them upright4 ,provide seats for the audience in front of the stage and at the back or side arrange a screen as dressing and green room for the actors4 ,illustration3 ,making ,hay ,while the ,sun ,shines4 ,divide the party into two sides of equal numbers and let the first side choose a proverb to be acted out in pantomime and guessed by the opposite side1 which is taking the part of audience4 ,when the proverb is guessed the actors must retire and the other side take the stage4 ,if the subject of the first charade is not guessed the same side must present another proverb1 putting new actors in the place of those who have just taken part4 ,not a word must be spoken in the charade1 but the actors must make their meaning as clear as possible by good acting4 ,our first illustration shows the out-of-door pantomime charade in progress4 ,the proverb is3 8,make hay while the sun shines40 ,this requires but one act as the first part1 8,make hay10 and the last part1 8while the sun shines10 are both represented4 ,making hay is acted out and that the sun is shining is implied by the quaint sunbonnets and wide-brimmed hats worn by the actors4 ,the ,costumes ,are ,impromptu1 and may be prepared in a few minutes4 ,the odd and most charmingly becoming bonnets1 somewhat resembling ,dutch caps1 are made of newspapers1 pinned in shape4 ,the men's wide-brimmed hats are simply ordinary hats with wide brims made of wrapping paper4 ,black derby hats were worn on this occasion1 but straw hats are better4 ,the girls' dresses are turned up in front and pinned at the back4 ,if checked gingham aprons are worn looped up at one side they will add to the color effect of the costume4 ,to ,make the ,sun-bonnet1 take one folded sheet of a newspaper and turn the folded edge back four inches 7,fig4 #e74 ,fold down the corners like ,fig4 #f1 put it on the head1 bring the straight edge together at the back and pin it with a large pin4 ,bend out the laps at the sides and you have made ,fig4 #g2 ,fig4 #h gives the pattern of the boy's hat4 ,cut a large circle from rather stiff1 new wrapping paper2 press it down upon the top of the crown of a man's straw hat2 crease it along the edge of the crown1 then cut a hole in the centre two inches within the creased line4 ,slash from the inner edge to the creased line as shown in ,fig4 #h1 fit the paper brim over the crown of the straw hat and pin in place to the hat band4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #e4--;,fold the newspaper for the bonnet like this4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #f4--;,fold down the two corners4 ,high peaked hats1 wide collars1 and even short capes may be quickly manufactured from paper and the effect of the impromptu costume is marvelously good4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #g4--;,a most becoming newspaper bonnet4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #h4--;,cut the boys' hat brims like this4 ,the ,shuffle ,race1 next in order1 is new and it is funny4 ,its requisites are1 for the girls1 short skirts1 held well above the ankles1 and low shoes or slippers many times too large1 worn over ordinary shoes4 ,unless the foot can be lifted out of the shoe without touching it with the hands the shoe is too small4 ,for the boys you must provide the largest sized slippers obtainable1 having uppers only at the toes4 ,the course should be about one hundred feet over a smoothly shaven lawn4 ,the contestants must stand in line at the starting point and at the word 8go10 start off on the race1 shuffling along as fast as possible4 ,the boys have no advantage over the girls in this game1 for it is no easier for one to cover the distance quickly1 shuffling along in the large shoes1 than for the other1 and both look equally ridiculous in their absurdly frantic efforts to win the race4 ,after resting from the shuffle race allow your guests to try their skill at ,hurling the ,lance4 ,from the limb of a tree have suspended five or six feet from the ground a small wooden hoop1 about eighteen inches in diameter1 covered like a drumhead with white tissue paper4 ,provide each player with a round1 green1 tapering stake1 white tipped and five feet long--the kind used for propping up plants4 ,on the blunt end of each stake1 or lance1 should be tied streamers of red1 white1 and blue1 which will make streaks of color as they are sent hurtling through the air4 ,illustration3 ,hurrying ,along in the ,shuffle ,race4 ,clear the space on the far side of the hoop that no one may be hurt by the falling lances1 then have each player in turn throw his or her lance with the object of piercing the paper and sending the lance entirely through the ring4 ,each player may have three trials in succession1 and unless her lance passes through the hoop at least once she is counted out4 ,there are three rounds and the player wins who1 at the end1 has succeeded most frequently in sending her lance through the hoop4 ,let the farewell be a ,burst of ,daylight ,fireworks4 ,strings of firecrackers stretched from tree to tree1 bunches hidden under barrels1 harmless torpedoes for your guests to explode1 and any other fireworks that do not need darkness for a background may be used4 ,it is a good idea to make ,the ,balloon ,ascension an especial feature of the display4 ,in the early days of our country 8,independence ,day0 was not to be thought of without a balloon ascension1 and the time-honored custom may be observed1 but in a new way4 ,this part of the programme should come as a complete surprise1 and all the preparation for it be kept secret1 that none of your guests may suspect what you have in store for them4 ,the old observances always included a patriotic speech1 and that1 too1 should form a part of the ceremony1 being used as an introduction to the balloon ascension4 ,you may make the speech yourself or get some one to do it for you1 but in either case let it be quite short4 ,balloons should not be mentioned1 but in some way the old ,grecian myth of ,pandora and her wonderful box must be brought in4 ,the ,myth can be used quite appropriately and effectively for1 as you will remember1 it was to punish ,prometheus1 and mankind in general1 for stealing fire that ,zeus commanded ,hephstus to form from earth this most beautiful ,pandora1 in order that by the charms with which the other gods endowed her1 she might bring trouble and vexation upon them4 ,it does not appear to have been altogether her charms1 however1 that worked the mischief1 for we are told it was curiosity that induced her to open the box1 or cask1 which was filled with winged blessings for men1 thus allowing all of the blessings except hope to escape4 ,as the remarks are being brought to a close have your ,pandora ,box carried out and placed in front of the speaker4 ,in this case the box is to be a good-sized sugar-barrel1 wrapped in flags1 or red1 white1 and blue bunting1 and having a lid that is easily lifted4 ,with the final words let the speaker step forward and suddenly raise the lid of the barrel4 ,this will set free not the things that were in the original ,pandora box1 but a number of gas-filled1 rubber1 toy balloons1 that will burst out like a volley of fireworks1 for a moment filling the air with color and movement1 then sailing upward and away to finally disappear from view in the blue sky overhead4 ,in preparing your ,pandora box choose a barrel that is perfectly smooth inside1 without long splinters or nails to pierce the fragile balloons4 ,then see that the cover has a handle or knob by which it can be lifted4 ,a spool fastened on with a screw will serve very well and is easily grasped by the hand4 ,the ,balloons are the kind one sees for sale on the streets tied in great bunches by their long strings4 ,red is the most common color1 but sometimes they vary4 ,frequently there are white ones with red or yellow lettering and bands1 and again1 just before the ,fourth1 red1 white1 and blue ones may be found4 ,have all the colors possible1 and crowd in as many as the barrel will hold1 cutting the strings off close to the balloons that they may not become entangled1 and taking great care that they do not escape1 like the blessings1 before their time4 ,illustration3 ,,circus ,,the ,,modern ,,triumph ,,continuous ,,performances--,,novel ,,features ,,mademoiselle ,,rosebud ,,in ,,her ,,thrilling ,,and ,,daring ,,horseback ,,feats ,,unparalleled ,,tricks ,,of ,,bob1 ,,the ,,trained ,,elephant ,,come ,,and ,,see ,,fun ,,for ,,all ,,don',t ,,miss ,,the ,,show ,,chapter ,,ii ,a ,,wonderful ,,circus ,,at ,,home ,,with ,,moving ,,animals ,,make your poster as nearly as possible like the one on the opposite page4 ,paint the lettering in gay colors on a big sheet of paper and a day before the show tack it up in a conspicuous place where all the family will see it1 for1 of course1 your show must have an audience1 and if you follow out all directions very carefully it will be well worth seeing4 ,have your circus on top of a large table1 or on the floor1 or out of doors on the bare ground4 ,almost any place will do where there is a good-sized level surface4 ,make the circus ring about forty inches in diameter1 outline it with chalk and cover the marked line with either sawdust or dry corn meal built into a narrow ridge similar to that of earth around the large rings2 then your circle will look just like the ring of a real circus4 ,be sure to have some kind of music at your show1 if only music on a comb4 ,place a piece of paper over the comb and play a lively march4 ,let all the music be sprightly and gay4 ,following the method given for making the horse and elephant1 you can make various other moving animals4 ,fig4 #i shows ,mademoiselle ,rosebud standing firm and upright without the slightest tremor as her ,kentucky charger leaps high in the air over an outstretched banner4 ,fig4 #aj gives the pattern of the horse and rider1 which you can trace on stiff cardboard1 not too heavy4 ,if enlarged to twice the size given they will be more imposing1 but this is not necessary1 as the size of pattern is very good4 ,when outlined cut out the design1 let the horse remain white1 and with pen and ink draw the lines which give him form1 shaping the head and neck1 and separating the legs1 as in ,fig4 #i4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #i4--,making the high jump4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aj4--,pattern of horse and rider4 ,paint ,mademoiselle's face1 arms1 and neck flesh color2 her waist1 skirt1 stockings1 and slippers light blue2 make a full double tissue-paper skirt of the same color by gathering a strip of light-blue tissue paper through the lengthwise centre1 folding the edges together and tying this double skirt around the little lady's waist4 ,cut a narrow strip of the same blue paper and fasten one end around each wrist that it may float freely in the air as she gallops around the ring4 ,to ,give the ,horse ,ability to ,move1 pierce four holes through the body with a large needle1 as in ,fig4 #aj4 ,be sure to have the holes in the right places that the horse may balance perfectly2 then when the threads are in position there will be no difficulty in making the horse stand and walk alone1 as a well-trained steed should4 ,use four pieces of strong black thread1 all of the same length1 about forty inches1 for leading the horse4 ,tie all four ends of the thread together1 and make a large knot in each strand seventeen inches from the joined ends4 ,run each thread through a separate hole in the body of the horse4 ,slide the horse against the knots tied in the thread and then tie a second knot in each thread close up to the other side of the horse4 ,be very particular about these knots2 they should rest against the body of the horse1 that the animal may be firmly inserted between eight knots1 four knots tight up against each side of his body4 ,sew a tag of black tape on the thread where the ends are tied together and pin the tag down to the floor in the centre of the circus ring4 ,tie the ,ends ,e and ,f 7,fig4 #aa7 together and fasten them to a piece of pasteboard2 do likewise with the ends of the threads ,g and ,h1 then hold the two threads which are near the front of the horse1 ,e and ,f 7,fig4 #aa71 in one hand and the other two threads1 ,g and ,h1 in the other hand while you walk slowly around the outside of the ring1 allowing little ,rosebud to ride demurely around in a circle1 as such performers always do when they first enter a real circus ring4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aa4--,threads showing how to make the horse dance4 ,after the audience has been duly impressed by the novel sight of a paper horse and rider moving1 apparently without aid1 around the ring1 the black threads being practically invisible1 let the horse stand alone while you bring out two or three brightly colored tissue-paper banners1 with each end of each scarf pasted on the top of a spool4 ,place the banners at various distances around the ring2 then again take up the threads and ,make the ,horse ,run and ,jump ,over ,each ,banner4 ,this done1 remove the banners and let the horse with his pretty rider dance around the ring1 sometimes on his hind feet1 as in ,fig4 #ab1 and again on his fore feet 7,fig4 #aa71 while little ,rosebud easily retains her footing1 looking more than ever like a real circus rider4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ab4--;,horse and rider dancing around the ring4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ac4--,pattern of ,bob the elephant4 ,fig4 #ac gives the different parts of ,bob the ,wonderful ,elephant4 ,make them all of stiff cardboard and larger if possible than the diagram2 then with pen and ink draw the ears1 eyes1 and tusks 7,fig4 #ad72 waterproof drawing ink is best for this purpose1 but common ink will do4 ,when the ink is dry give all parts1 except the tusks1 a light wash of ,india ink1 to turn the animal a natural dull gray color4 ,with black thread fasten the leg ,a on the far side of the elephant1 running the thread through the hole ,a in the elephant and tying the thread into a large knot on the leg1 then making another knot on the near side of the body2 the leg and body are fastened to each other in this way between two knots of thread4 ,have the pieces close together1 but loose enough to allow the leg to move easily4 ,attach the next leg1 ,b1 on the near side of the body at the hole ,b4 ,the leg ,c goes on the far side of the body at the hole ,c1 and the leg ,d on the near side at the hole ,d4 ,the legs ,a and ,c are on the far side1 and ,b and ,d on the near side of the animal 7,fig4 #ad74 ,sew one end each of two strands of black thread to a small piece of black tape4 ,make a large knot in each thread1 eighteen inches from the tape1 run the free end of each thread through one of the two holes high on the elephant's body 7,fig4 #ac71 and slide the elephant on the threads close to the knots4 ,make other knots on this side of the body1 in the same way you managed the ,kentucky charger1 then pin the tape to the centre of the ring and ,start ,your ,elephant on a ,walk around the ring4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ad4--8;,i'll walk40 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ae4--8,won't go another step40 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #af4--8,see me sit up40 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ag4--8;,i can dance40 ,if the horse and rider interfere1 take them away and let the unparalleled animal have the field to himself4 ,when ,bob goes around the ring he always gets tired and draws back1 declining to move another step4 ,make him do this by gently pulling the back thread backward4 ,bob is very comical when assuming this pose 7,fig4 #ae74 ,raise the front thread and the little fellow will sit up 7,fig4 #af74 ,slowly and gently raise both threads a trifle and ,bob will begin to dance 7,fig4 #ag74 ,raising the back thread a little1 not enough to take his foot from the ground1 and at the same time lowering the front thread1 will cause ,bob to crouch and crawl along 7,fig4 #ah74 ,fig4 #ai shows ,bob when he is in a hurry4 ,make this by lowering the front thread of ,fig4 #ah4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ah4--8;,i am coming40 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ai4--8;,hurry6 ,get out of the way40 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bj4--8;,here goes40 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ba4--8;,how is that80 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bb4--8;,difficult1 but ,i can do it40 ,now ,stand a ,spool in the ,ring raise the clumsy little fellow up on his feet and walk him over to the spool1 where he will naturally rest one foot on top while he takes a long breath before climbing up 7,fig4 #bj74 ,move the threads carefully and the elephant will climb on the spool 7,fig4 #ba74 ,lift the back thread1 and ,bob will slowly and cumbersomely raise up until he balances himself on one fore foot on top of the spool 7,fig4 #bb74 ,by cautiously moving the threads you can make the elephant lower himself and step down and off 7,fig4 #bc74 ,when the animal is entirely off the spool1 raise up and back the front thread and he will sit down upon the top of the spool to rest 7,fig4 #bd74 ,without any trouble ,bob can stand erect on the spool1 as in ,fig4 #be4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bc4--8;,i'm coming down40 ,all the poses given were taken direct from those actually assumed by ,bob while he performed to the accompaniment of music1 when rehearsing to a small but appreciative audience1 preparatory to appearing before the public in print4 ,the ,kentucky charger also went through all his acts to the same music4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bd4--8,must rest40 ,remember to mark and color the wrong side of each figure as it should appear1 so that the animals and rider may look well from all sides of the ring4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #be4--8;,just balance like me40 ,the horse can go rapidly1 but the elephant1 to be lifelike1 must move slowly4 ,when the circus is over roll the threads on their respective pieces of cardboard and bits of tape to avoid tangling them1 and have a box ready in which the animals may lie flat until again needed4 ,this little circus will make a fine parlor entertainment1 or would do admirably as a side show at your next fair1 when a small extra admission could be charged and wee glasses of lemonade and tiny popcorn balls passed around to the audience in true circus style4 ,,chapter ,,iii ,a ,,novel ,,easter ,,party ,,with ,,new ,,easter ,,games ,,there are no end of delightful things to do at an ,easter party1 and every game may be in keeping with the season4 ,the game of ,egg ,tennis is particularly pretty4 ,as you play this new ,easter game1 showers of color will fill the air1 sometimes descending in sparkling bits of orange1 again reds1 then greens or blues1 yellows or purples1 with all their beautiful tints4 ,quivering and shimmering1 down the colored rain will fall1 lightly covering your hair1 clothing1 and surrounding objects1 while you stand1 racket in hand1 watching the result of your stroke4 ,your companions1 seeing your success1 will be eager to try their skill1 also1 with one of the pretty magic eggs4 ,these colored showers do not even look wet1 and they will not injure the most delicate of fabrics1 for they are composed of countless bits of bright tissue paper4 ,the ,number of ,eggs needed for the game depends upon the number of players4 ,there should be three eggs provided for every two players4 ,in case the first player succeeds in breaking two eggs in succession1 the third egg will not be used during the game1 but may do duty at another time in another game4 ,should the first player fail in breaking the second egg1 then all three eggs will be required4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bf4--;,carefully bore a hole in each end of the shell4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bg4--;,fold the paper like this4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bh4--;,cut the paper in fringe like this4 ,how to ,prepare the ,eggs ,select eggs as nearly of a size as possible2 take one egg at a time and with a very coarse needle carefully bore a hole in each end by pressing the point of the needle against the shell and then turning the needle around and around until a little hole appears4 ,be very careful when boring not to press the needle with too great a force1 as there is danger in so doing of cracking the shell and rendering it useless4 ,when both holes are made1 increase the hole on the large end of the egg until it is about as large around as the head of a common hat-pin 7,fig4 #bf71 then place the small end to your lips and blow out the contents4 ,illustration3 ,playing the ,new ,easter ,game of ,egg ,tennis ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bi4--;,cut off the ends of the fringe4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cj4--;,gilt paper disk4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ca4--;,fold the disk through the centre4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cb4--;,fold the disk a second time4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cc4--;,fold once more4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cd4--;,cut out the point4 ,after the ,shells ,are ,emptied leave one white and color all the others1 making each shell of a different color4 ,when this is done1 allow the inside of the shells to become thoroughly dry2 then fill them with pieces of tissue paper cut in small squares a quarter of an inch or less in size4 ,these can be quickly made by folding the tissue paper like ,fig4 #bg and cutting it into strips of fringe 7,fig4 #bh72 then cutting off the ends of the fringe little by little 7,fig4 #bi74 ,fill the red egg-shell with bits of red paper1 the yellow shell with yellow paper1 and so on1 making ,the ,shower of ,paper in each egg-shell correspond to the color of the shell4 ,fill the white shell with squares of white tissue paper1 and when the shell breaks in mid-air1 the shower will resemble the dainty petals of cherry blossoms as they fall when shaken from the trees by a light breeze4 ,the effect is very pretty1 calling to mind the ,feast of ,cherry ,blossoms in ,japan1 when the girls and boys accompany their elders to see the cherry trees in full bloom4 ,cut ,gilt ,paper ,disks two inches in diameter 7,fig4 #cj72 fold each disk through the centre 7,fig4 #ca71 then fold again crosswise through the middle of the first fold 7,fig4 #cb74 ,fold once more 7,fig4 #cc71 and1 following the dotted lines on ,fig4 #cc1 cut the points as shown in ,fig4 #cd and you will have the eight-pointed star 7,fig4 #ce74 ,while the point is still folded with a sharp pair of scissors clip off the point 7,a1 ,fig4 #cd74 ,this makes the hole in the centre of the star 7,b1 ,fig4 #ce74 ,through the hole in each star thread the two ends of a strong string4 ,cover the under side of the star with paste1 separate the two ends of the string and hold them down on each side of the egg 7,fig4 #cf71 then draw the star down on to the shell over the strings1 and press tightly in place until the paste holds 7,fig4 #cg74 ,clip off the ends of the string that extend below the star4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ce4--,the star unfolded4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cf4--;,hold the two ends of the string down on each side of the egg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cg4--;,draw the star down and press tightly in place4 ,when the paste is quite dry and the paper firmly attached to the shell1 ,hang ,one of the ,eggs directly in the middle of a wide doorway so that the egg will be about as high as the shoulders of the players4 ,if there is a curtain pole in the doorway tie the string to the pole2 if not1 drive a tack on top of the door frame and suspend the egg from that4 ,where the doorway is quite wide1 like the old-fashioned doors between two parlors1 two eggs may be hung and four players take part at one time4 ,in that case you will need four rackets2 ordinarily two rackets are sufficient4 ,make the ,rackets of flat rattan1 taking two pieces1 twenty-seven inches long for each racket4 ,soak the rattan to make it pliable1 then bind the two pieces together with string as in ,fig4 #ch4 ,bend the now double rattan to form a loop1 bring the four ends together and wrap them into a straight piece for the handle 7,fig4 #ci74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ch4--;,bind the two pieces of rattan together4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ci4--;,bring the four ends together to form a loop4 ,lay the frame you have just made down on a large piece of strong writing-paper and mark a line on the paper one inch from and entirely surrounding the outer edge of the frame down to the handle4 ,draw another line close to the outer edge of the frame1 then cut out the design along the outside line4 ,slash the edge up to1 but not across1 the remaining pencil line 7,fig4 #ci74 ,cover one side of the slashed border with paste or glue1 and1 again placing the frame on the paper1 turn the flaps1 one at a time1 over the edge of the frame and attach them firmly to the frame and to the inside of the paper 7,fig4 #dj74 ,when the paste is perfectly dry1 make another paper cover in the same manner and paste its slashed edge over the frame on top of the first1 putting one cover directly over the other and so making it double2 this will make the racket quite strong and firm4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dj4--,turn the flaps of the border over the edge of the frame4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #da4--;,finish with a bow of ribbon4 ,wind a strip of paper one-half an inch wide around the handle1 pasting it as you wind1 and turn the end of the paper up over the end of the handle 7,fig4 #dj74 ,finish with a bow of ribbon1 tying it on where the handle joins the racket4 ,fig4 #da shows the completed racket right side up4 ,the ,game of ,egg ,tennis is played in couples1 and the object is to break the egg-shell and send the paper rain flying in the air4 ,the sport is adapted to all ages1 from the little child scarcely large enough to wield the racket to grown girls and boys1 and even older people will become excited as they try to strike the fragile toy4 ,the players must stand facing each other at equal distances from and on opposite sides of the suspended egg4 ,the distance is decided by swinging the egg and then placing the players within easy reach of it before it swings above their heads4 ,this is done by the umpire1 who takes charge of the game and decides any disputes4 ,promptly at the signal1 8,ready10 given distinctly by the umpire1 the player who has been appointed starter gently swings the egg outward toward her opponent1 and the egg is then 8in play40 ,the other player immediately tries to strike the egg with her racket1 using sufficient force to break the shell or send it flying swiftly toward the first player1 who in turn promptly hits or misses the egg4 ,whether struck or not1 the egg will return to the other player1 who will surely be able to strike it the second time it comes to her1 if not the first4 ,and so the egg is kept swinging rapidly back and forth between the two players until the shell is broken4 ,with the breaking of the shell comes the beautiful shower of tissue paper which is sent flying through the room by the stroke1 and the player who releases it wins a point in the game4 ,when the ,first ,egg is ,broken a second one must be put in its place1 and the unsuccessful contestant has another opportunity to make good her record1 playing with the same opponent4 ,if the breaking of the second egg proves a tie--that is1 if it is broken by the player who was at first unsuccessful--a third egg must be suspended and the same couple continue to play until that1 too1 is broken4 ,then the unsuccessful player drops out of the game1 and the winner of two points to his opponent's one steps aside to await his final play after the other couples have had their turn4 ,should one player win two points in succession the third is not played1 for two points lost sends a player out of the game4 ,when all the couples have played1 the successful competitors alone remain in the game4 ,these form new couples and play as before1 each in his order4 ,this time there is but one egg for each couple1 and the player who fails to break the shell must withdraw1 giving his place to the next player1 while the successful one holds his place until another breaks the egg4 ,in this way but one player comes out victorious4 ,when space allows two eggs to be hung in the doorway and two couples take part at the same time1 there must be two umpires1 one for each couple1 for in the excitement of the fray1 one person cannot watch all the play4 ,,rules ,,of ,,the ,,game #a4 ,the umpire may not take part in the game while acting as umpire4 ,she shall keep tally and decide all questions which arise regarding the game4 #b4 ,the egg shall not be struck except with the flat face of the racket4 #c4 ,when an egg is broken by striking against the surrounding woodwork1 or in any other manner other than with the face of the racket1 it counts one against the player who made the stroke and scores one for his opponent4 #d4 ,two points scored during one play declares the successful competitor the victor4 #e4 ,a play consists of any number of trials until the two eggs are broken4 #f4 ,two eggs shall constitute a play when there is no tie2 in case of a tie there shall be three eggs4 ,butterflies as well as eggs are appropriate for ,easter and the ,butterfly ,game will come in well as second on your programme4 ,all the girls are butterflies in this game and all the boys are collectors4 ,the collectors are stationed in different parts of the room and stand some distance1 at least six feet1 apart4 ,they may not move their feet to step in any direction1 but1 standing in one spot1 may reach out on all sides with their hands as they try to catch the butterflies flitting past them4 ,each ,butterfly must lift the skirt of her dress with both hands and move it back and forth as she flies among1 around and between the collectors4 ,this moving of skirts as mimic wings makes the game appear very pretty to the onlookers1 and the collectors find it difficult to grasp the fluttering draperies4 ,it is the ,part of ,every ,collector to catch as many butterflies as possible and as each butterfly is caught she must stand close behind the collector to whom she belongs4 ,the second captive stands behind the first with her hands on the shoulders of number one4 ,the third takes her place behind number two with her hands on the shoulders of number two and so on to ,the ,last ,captive ,the game becomes exciting when but one free butterfly is left1 darting about1 skilfully evading the outstretched hands of the collectors1 each intent upon capturing this last and greatly valued prize4 ,for in the count the last butterfly captured is equal to two of the others4 ,the game ends when all are caught and the winner is he who possesses the greatest number of butterflies1 counting the last one caught as two4 ,the ,magic ,dye ,kettle will be a unique1 amusing and mystifying feature in the entertainment of your guests4 ,for this some preparation is necessary4 ,first you must have the tinsmith remove the bottom of a new1 inexpensive1 tin kettle1 one that has a lid to fit and will hold several quarts4 ,then in the bottom of a square wooden box1 about as large as a small table1 have a hole cut a trifle smaller than the bottom of the kettle4 ,knock out one side of the box1 stand it bottom side up so that the round hole will be on top1 place it in the position it is to occupy1 and throw over it some kind of a cover which will reach to the floor and hide the box completely on all sides4 ,in this cover you must cut a hole to fit the hole in the box1 and place the hole in the cover directly over the hole in the box4 ,place the lid on the kettle and stand the kettle over the hole and it will appear to be merely sitting on the table1 as there will be nothing to indicate the opening beneath4 ,under the ,box1 ready for use1 place a shallow tin pan larger around than the bottom of the kettle1 and cover the bottom of the pan with sawdust2 also place under the box a basket filled with hard boiled eggs of various colors1 three eggs of each color4 ,in another part of the room have ready another basket containing the same number of hard boiled eggs but all uncolored4 ,while the ,butterfly game is in progress let some one who is in the ,secret of the ,magic ,kettle1 hide under the improvised table and at a given signal lift the shallow pan and hold it tightly under the hole in the box4 ,explain to your guests that you have for the occasion a magic kettle1 which1 while they wait1 will color eggs for them without water and without heat4 ,pass around the basket of uncolored eggs and invite each one to take an egg4 ,tell three members of the party to decide upon a color they wish their eggs dyed 7all three must be the same color7 then1 as you raise the lid1 to shout the color in unison1 and carefully place their eggs in the kettle4 ,as soon as the eggs are in quickly replace the lid and wave your hands back and forth over the kettle4 ,apparently you will be working a charm1 but in reality you will be keeping the too curious from taking a peep into the kettle to see what process is going on4 ,when the uncolored ,eggs are in the ,kettle and the lid is on1 your assistant underneath must gently and without the least noise lower the pan she is holding1 and in which the eggs have been deposited1 remove the uncolored eggs and substitute three others of the color she has heard wished for4 ,then lifting the pan she must again hold it close under the kettle until ,the ,colored ,eggs are ,taken ,out and three more put in to be dyed4 ,give your assistant several minutes to make the exchange of eggs1 then lift the lid and allow the eggs1 so quickly and so marvellously colored1 to be lifted out by their owners4 ,when all the eggs have been dyed lead your guests from the room without allowing any investigation of the workings of the magic kettle and while they are out have box1 kettle and eggs taken away so that the charm of mystery may not be broken4 ,,chapter ,,iv ,a ,,doorway ,,punch ,,and ,,judy ,,show ,,everybody laughs when he sees ,mr4 ,punch1 with his funny long nose1 and his wife ,judy in her frilled cap4 ,the show is all fun1 every bit of it2 even the little baby seems to understand and appears actually pleased when ,punch and ,judy toss him back and forth1 as they might a rubber ball4 ,when the infant happens to fall1 he is never hurt2 the accident is but a good joke and part of the sport4 ,one great charm about the show is1 that you can make ,punch and his family do exactly as you please and say exactly what you want them to say1 for so long as you are showman they yield implicit obedience to your will4 ,the only material necessary for ,the ,stage will be a piece of plain solid-colored cloth1 which must reach across an open doorway1 be tacked upon each side and extend down to the floor1 where it should be again fastened that there may be no danger of its blowing aside4 ,put this curtain up high enough in the doorway to reach a trifle above your head1 for you must be completely hidden from the audience4 ,the full-page illustration shows the back of the stage and gives the manner in which ,punch and his family are made to move about in the opening between the top of the doorway and the curtain4 ,it is this opening which constitutes the stage4 ,the illustration also shows a band of cloth stretched across the extreme top of the doorway1 and short side curtains added to the outside of the stage to improve its appearance4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #db4--;,draw ,punch's head like this4 ,to ,make ,punch's ,head1 cut a piece of unruled white writing-paper eight inches long and five inches wide1 to allow a generous margin1 and on it draw ,fig4 #db1 making the head #f inches across one way and #d inches the other4 ,paste a strip of thin cloth over the neck which includes the entire space between the four corners marked ,a-,a-,a-,a1 and over this cloth paste two more cloth strips in the spaces marked ,b-,b and ,b-,b4 ,the cloth strengthens the neck and prevents it from tearing while the head is in motion4 ,carefully mark the features1 copying them also on the right-hand side of the face 7,d74 ,cut out the head1 including flaps1 and the ears along their outer edge4 ,cut the line of the chin into each side of the neck as far as the second strips of cloth 7,b-,b and ,b-,b74 ,roll the neck until it fits loosely on your first finger1 then paste it together like a ring4 ,paste the tips of each side of the nose together1 also those of the chin4 ,illustration3 ,behind the ,scenes in the ,doorway ,punch and ,judy ,show4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dc4--,the top of his head is open4 ,bend the flaps at the dotted line on the edge of the face and paste the other side of the face part way over the flaps1 covering the spaces ,c-,c-,c-,c4 ,if the head seems too narrow1 bend the paper out to make it appear wider4 ,roll an extra piece of writing-paper and fit it inside the head4 ,be sure that the roll lies evenly and is close up against the inside of the head2 then bend out the ears1 paste the paper lining in place and paint the entire head pink except the eyes and teeth4 ,when the first color is dry1 paint the markings on the ears red2 the hair and eyebrows1 markings for teeth and the eyes black2 the lips1 nose1 chin and cheeks a brilliant red4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dd4--,make the hand in the shape of a mitten4 ,the top of ,punch's head is open 7,fig4 #dc71 but we will cover it with a high1 pointed cap1 and the uncovered space where the chin comes forward beyond the neck will not be noticed when ,punch is dressed1 for the double ruffle around his neck hides all deficiencies4 ,make each arm of a roll of writing-paper pasted together along the edge4 ,the roll must be about four and three-quarter inches long4 ,flatten and paste together one end of each arm1 and on these flat ends draw the outline of a mitten1 which will serve as a hand2 when the paste is dry1 cut out the mitten 7,fig4 #dd74 ,paint the hands and arms pink4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #de4--;,cut ,punch's dress after this pattern4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #df4--,your funny old ,punch4 ,the arms should fit loosely over the ends of your thumb and forefinger4 ,fig4 #de gives the pattern of ,punch's ,dress ,make it much larger1 according to the dimensions given on patterns1 and let it be of soft material in very bright1 gay colors4 ,the front and back are exactly alike1 and the two pieces are sewed together at the sides1 the seams extending to within two inches of the bottom of the skirt1 leaving the sides split up that distance4 ,slide the paper arms up in the sleeves and fasten them in place at the top with a drop or two of glue4 ,make a wide1 white double ruffle1 slip it on ,punch's neck and push it up against the head4 ,then gather the top of the dress so that it will fit ,punch's neck1 and fasten it on under the ruffle with strong glue1 allowing the bottom of the paper neck to extend down below the gathered top of the dress4 ,make a high cap of brilliant red cloth to fit ,punch's head2 trim it with a turned up band of vivid green edged with white and glue the cap to the head4 ,with a stitch or two or an elastic band fasten an inked paper lighter in his right hand to serve as a stick4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dg4--;,judy will look like this4 ,now slip the first finger of your left hand up in ,punch's neck1 run your thumb and second finger of the same hand in the paper arms1 and make ,punch turn and twist his head while he gesticulates with both arms4 ,you will laugh before you know it1 and be delighted with your funny old ,punch 7,fig4 #df74 ,make ,judy's ,head by the pattern used for the head of ,punch1 but omit the ears and cut off the ends of both nose and chin4 ,they should not be so long for ,judy4 ,strengthen the neck with cloth and fasten the head together as you did that of ,punch4 ,make blond hair of two pieces of yellow tissue paper pasted in narrow irregular folds on the inside of the top opening of the head2 then bring over and down on the outside as if combed loosely over ,judy's ears4 ,paste the lower ends of the paper hair above the neck on the back of the head4 ,paint ,judy's eyes blue4 ,in all other respects than the details mentioned1 make ,judy's head the same as you did that of ,punch4 ,make her arms and hands the same1 the double ruffle for the neck the same1 the dress the same cut but of contrasting color4 ,cut ,judy's cap from thin white material1 make it circular and gather it entirely around1 about one inch from the edge4 ,attach strings of the same material1 and tie them under ,judy's chin 7,fig4 #dg74 ,the ,baby must be quite light in weight4 ,make it of a piece of pink tissue paper about eight inches square4 ,draw the paper through your hands several times to crush it into small folds1 then1 while it is crushed together1 double at the middle and wind a thread around near the folded end to form a neck1 leaving half an inch above for the head4 ,gather a piece of white tissue paper around the baby's neck to make its dress1 and cut a straight strip of white tissue paper for the baby's cap4 ,lay it flat on top of the head and bring the two ends down straight on each side of the face4 ,gather the cap at the back1 add strings and fasten it on the baby's head4 ,features may be marked on the face with paint1 but be very careful not to use much water with the colors1 for water will melt the tissue paper face4 ,when ,all is ,ready slip ,judy on one hand1 ,punch on the other hand1 and make them talk and act to the best of your ability4 ,assume deep tones of voice when you talk for ,punch1 and high1 shrill tones for ,judy2 make the play short1 full of life and action1 and as funny as possible4 ,of course1 you will have to practise with ,punch1 ,judy and the baby in front of a mirror before giving your show in order to see how they will look as you make them act1 and to learn just how to manage them4 ,drama of ,punch and ,judy ,,punch 7below73 ,wait a minute1 sha'n't be long putting on my new boots 7pops up singing74 ,trala-la-la-la-la-la-la4 ,hello1 there6 ,watch me dance 7dances1 singing a lively tune to music2 music stops and he leans down1 calls below74 ,,judy6 ,,judy6 ,,judy1 come here4 ,,judy 7pops up73 ,well1 ,mr4 ,,punch2 what do you want8 ,i'm dreadfully busy just now4 ,,punch3 ,oh6 nothing1 only want to know if you'd like a box of ,french candy1 the delicious kind that melts in your mouth2 but never mind1 ,i can get it for you next ,christmas 7,punch turns his back and walks off74 ,,judy 7running after ,punch73 ,punchy-munchy1 ,i wish ,i had it now2 do1 ,punchy1 give it to me4 ,,punch 7turning73 ,you must give me a kiss first 7they hug each other and have a merry time dancing and singing to lively music74 ,,judy3 ,oh6 ,oh6 ,i forgot the baby4 ,i'll go and get him 7disappears74 ,,punch 7calling after her73 ,well1 hurry up1 and don't forget our dog ,toby 7calls74 ,toby6 ,old dog ,toby--come and jump over my stick 7bangs his stick about1 striking everything1 accidentally strikes his nose74 ,oh6 ,oh6 ,oh6 my poor nose1 my best ,sunday nose1 my beautiful long nose 7calls74 ,,judy6 ,j-,u-,d-,y1 where's the baby8 7,enter ,,judy with baby74 ,,judy3 ,here1 ,,punch2 catch him 7tosses baby to ,,punch1 who catches him2 dances about1 then tosses the baby back to ,,judy1 who fails to catch him74 ,,judy3 ,,punch6 ,,punch6 ,where's the baby8 ,,punch3 ,gone down-stairs4 ,i'll fetch him up 7disappears74 ,,judy3 ,just think6 the little dear went down-stairs all alone6 7,,punch reappears47 ,,punch3 ,here's the little darling2 pity his nose is not longer4 ,do you think it will grow1 ,,judy8 7baby cries2 ,,punch tosses him up in the air singing74 ,he didn't dance1 dance1 dance2 he didn't dance all day nor yesterday4 7,,judy tries to catch the baby47 ,,punch3 ,take him6 ,now we will both sing while ,i keep time with my stick4 ,begin1 ,i say2 quick1 hurry1 quick6 7,,judy runs away with the baby while ,,punch is talking and not watching her2 turning1 ,,punch finds himself alone74 ,,punch 7calls73 ,baby6 ,baby6 ,come and see your daddy's beautiful nose 7baby is tossed up from below74 ,see6 ,see6 my boy can fly through the air 7knocks with his stick1 then calls74 ,,judy6 ,why don't you come8 7,,judy appears with baby1 walks back and forth74 ,,judy3 ,i must get this child to sleep4 ,,punch3 ,nonsense1 ,i'll amuse him 7grabs child and disappears with him2 baby heard crying1 8,mama6 ,i want my ,mama6074 ,,judy3 ,just listen to that 7waves her arms frantically around and disappears47 ,,punch 7reappearing with a flag in each hand73 ,we haven't given you our flag dance4 ,,judy6 girl1 come along4 ,,judy 7jumps up with a flag in each hand73 ,hush1 ,,punch1 you'll wake the baby4 ,,punch3 ,now let's dance4 7,the music plays and the two dance and sing some popular air1 then together bow to the audience1 saying37 ,good-by little girls and boys1 good-by1 everybody4 ,we've had such a good time4 ,good-by1 good-by4 ,the flags may be of home or store manufacture1 but they must be fastened on paper sticks1 made like ,punch's paper-lighter stick4 ,they can all be ,american flags1 or three other nations may be represented1 or each flag can be of solid color1 differing from all the others1 as red1 green1 yellow and blue4 ,if a companion will help with the show by taking complete charge of ,judy while you attend to ,punch1 the management will be much easier1 for then you will have only one doll to make talk and act4 ,,chapter ,v ,,hallowe',,en ,,merrymaking ,novel ,ways of ,telling ,fortunes ,,this year the annual festival of the fairies is to be celebrated with wilder pranks and madder mysteries than for many a long season1 and if we enter heartily into the spirit of the fun and make preparations for them1 the little folks will surely reveal many secrets the future holds in store for us4 ,ask the fairies1 gnomes and elves to your ,hallowe'en frolic2 they will be delighted to come1 though of course1 you cannot invite them in the usual fashion4 ,instead of writing notes1 you must braid three ,invitation ,rings of ,grass-- fresh grass is best1 but the dried will do--and hang the rings on bushes 7,fig4 #dh71 or lay them on the outside window-sill1 making a wish on each grass ring as it is put into place4 ,to insure the fulfilment of the wish1 you must not see the rings again until after ,hallowe'en4 ,the fairy troupe will find the green circles as they come floating along through the air on gay-colored bubbles from the magic spring waters of ,fairyland4 ,during the last days of ,october fairies are always looking for such invitations4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dh4--;,hang the rings on bushes4 ,here are some of the ceremonies and games newly revealed to me by the old witch who lives in the black clouds that sail southward on the northwest wind4 ,black ,cats1 the friends and companions of witches1 are wonderful creatures to conjure with1 but all cats can work a charm1 and it is cats1 or preferably kittens1 you must have for the first rite4 ,there must be a pussy in hiding for each girl and boy present at the ,hallowe'en frolic4 ,with different colored bright ribbons tie a tinkling bell around the neck of every cat1 leaving one end of the ribbon one yard long4 ,seat your ,hallow-e'en guests in a semicircle around the room4 ,ask them to sit quietly for a few moments1 and suddenly put out the lights4 ,with the room in total darkness let absolute stillness ensue for a second2 then say very slowly and distinctly3 ,illustration3 ,kittens ,telling ,who ,will be the ,first to ,marry4 8,hold out your right hand and there will come to each one of you a disguised gnome or fairy4 ,be very gentle and kind to the little creature 7here pause for a moment72 for if by any chance ill befall the disguised sprite the fairies will be angry and will do nothing for you until next ,hallowe'en40 ,again pause2 then say3 8,so ,i caution you once more--be kind and gentle40 ,have some one keep the kittens near by1 in readiness1 so that you may lead all into the darkened room without a moment's delay4 ,hold the ends of the ribbons in one hand while with the other you take one ribbon at a time1 and as you pass along the line place it in the outstretched hand of each successive guest1 saying as you do so1 8,hold fast this magic clue40 ,the instant the last ribbon has been given to a guest1 turn on the lights and while the girls and boys are looking with surprise at the little creature they hold captive and laughingly exchanging comments1 you must pin a piece of white tape on the floor across one end of the room about four feet from the wall4 ,request the guests to kneel1 with their funny little gnomes1 in a row on the enclosed space next to the wall1 and face the tape4 ,announce that there will now take place the race of fate4 ,each player must hold his or her pussy with its fore paws directly on the tape1 and at a given signal all the girls and boys must exclaim in unison1 8,run60 at the same time releasing the kittens that they may scamper away in any direction they choose4 ,the guests should remain stationed back of the tape line and watch them as they scatter wildly over the room trailing their bright streamers4 ,no one may touch or in any way molest a kitten after the signal has been given to let them go4 ,the girl or boy whose pussy first reaches the centre of the room1 which has previously been marked with a second strip of tape1 will be the first to marry4 ,do not wait for the other kittens to make the goal1 but gather up the little creatures and lead them away to be seen no more1 or the spell will be broken4 ,old shoes possess strange and occult powers as we all know1 else why should we throw them after the coach of a newly wedded couple8 ,so we must have a ,pair of ,old ,slippers ,after the last cat has disappeared1 bring out the slippers2 any kind except toy ones will do4 ,place the slippers on a sheet of white paper laid on the top of a table where all present may see4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #di4--,place one slipper on top of the other4 ,explain to the girls and boys that they must take one turn each in trying their fortunes by putting one slipper crosswise on top of the other1 both right side up 7,fig4 #di71 and while holding them so1 repeat the following verse3 ,these slippers ,i toss into the air4 ,will my love be dark8 ,will my love be fair8 ,what future is mine8 ,i pray you show ,by the turning of sole or the pointing of toe6 ,lift the paper and give the slippers a slight upward toss to fall on the floor as they may1 and the manner in which they reach the floor indicates the fortune3 ,when both slippers land upside down and do not touch1 the player will be a great traveller and have no settled home4 ,when both slippers land right side up and do not touch1 the player will go on the stage4 ,when the right slipper is upside down1 the future mate will be cross and selfish4 ,when the left slipper is upside down1 the future mate will be unselfish and kind4 ,when the slippers are crossed there will be an early marriage4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ej4--;,decided difference of opinion between husband and wife4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ea4--,very congenial4 ,when the toes of the slippers point in opposite directions1 there will be decided difference of opinion between husband and wife 7,fig4 #ej74 ,when the toes of the slippers point in the same direction1 husband and wife will be very congenial 7,fig4 #ea74 ,when the soles cross1 lying one on top of the other1 the player will own a gold mine4 ,cups and ,bowls have supernatural power on this night and exercise a peculiar influence over marbles placed under them2 consequently you must get three china cups and three marbles1 a crystal 7clear glass marble71 a commie 7ordinary brown marble71 and a china 7a white marble crossed by different colored lines74 ,set three cups in a row 7,fig4 #eb71 under one place a 8crystal10 under another a 8commie10 and under the last a 8china40 ,blindfold each player in turn and let the girl or boy raise one of the cups4 ,if the marble under the lifted cup is the crystal1 the husband or wife will be young and life will be easy and full of sunshine4 ,if it is the china1 the husband or wife will be middle aged and life will be hard but famous4 ,if the commie1 the husband or wife will be old1 and life will be filled with adventure4 ,the marbles must be changed into different cups after blindfolding each player4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eb4--,set three cups in a row4 ,as no ,hallowe'en ceremonies are complete without ,the ,apple1 there must be a dish of apples and a box of wooden toothpicks4 ,with the apples and toothpicks you can ascertain for your guests the nationality of their future mates4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ec4--,you will marry an ,american4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ed4--,your future partner will be ,english4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ee4--,your future mate will come from ,france4 ,give every one an apple and a wooden toothpick4 ,each player may push the toothpick in any part of the apple2 the spot occupied by the toothpick tells the fortune1 but the apple must be kept in one position1 and on no account turned after the toothpick is once in4 ,when all have inserted the toothpicks each boy and girl in turn must hold up his or her apple that all may see while you read the fortune4 ,when the toothpick stands straight and erect in the top of the apple1 the life partner will be an ,american 7,fig4 #ec72 if in the left side of the apple1 the mate will be ,english 7,fig4 #ed72 in the right side1 ,french 7,fig4 #ee71 in the back1 ,german2 in the front1 ,italian2 sideways at the top of the apple1 the mate will be a ,west ,indian2 sideways in the right side1 the mate will be a ,japanese2 in the left side1 a ,russian2 in the front1 ,spanish4 ,when the toothpick breaks the player will not marry4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ef4--,you must prepare a card like this for the ,wedding ,race4 ,now comes the fun of forecasting to learn where the wedding will take place1 so prepare for ,the ,wedding ,race ,for this you must have a card like ,fig4 #ef2 fill in the spaces under 8,the way you go0 with the following words according to the numbers3 7#a7 ,walk slowly17#b7 ,walk backward1 7#c7 ,walk on toes1 7#d7 ,walk on heels1 7#e7 ,run1 7#f7 ,walk fast1 7#g7 ,skip1 7#h7 ,walk without raising feet1 7#i7 ,run on toes1 7#aj7 ,walk on toes of one foot and the heel of the other1 7#aa7 ,run on heels1 7#ab7 ,walk sideways4 ,in the spaces under 8,wedding0 insert3 7#a7 ,church1 7#b7 ,on shipboard1 7#c7 ,boarding house1 7#d7 ,hotel1 7#e7 ,home1 7#f7 ,friend's home1 7#g7 ,top of mountain1 7#h7 ,minister's house1 7#i7 ,tent1 7#aj7 ,out of ,doors1 7#aa7 ,courthouse1 7#ab7 ,cave4 ,inform the guests that each in turn must go the length of the room4 ,he or she may walk slowly1 walk fast1 walk sideways1 walk backward1 walk on toes1 walk on heels1 walk on the toes of one foot and the heel of the other1 etc41 etc4 ,if many guests are present1 start two at a time crossing the room1 one from each end4 ,write the initial of every player on the line of the card corresponding to the manner in which he or she crosses the room2 for example1 if the first player's name is ,barbara ,carter1 and she runs across the room1 put down her initials ,b4 ,c4 on the line ,no4 #e on which is written the word 8,run40 ,if the second player's name is ,jamie ,bartlett and he also runs write his initials ,j4 ,b4 on the same line of the card1 but1 should ,jamie decide to go backward across the room his initials would then belong on line ,no4 #b4 ,when all the girls and boys have crossed the room1 and quiet again reigns1 read to them the various places where the different players will be married1 for instance1 if referring to your card you find the initials of ,jessie ,douglass on line ,no4 #ab1 you should read1 8,because ,jessie ,douglass walked sideways across the room1 she will be married in a cave4 ,won't that be romantic80 ,always add some pleasant remark after reading each record2 such remarks make things run easier and add to the fun4 ,probably you will be able to think of many delightful little speeches1 but in case you find any difficulty1 the following list may be of some assistance4 ,remark for line ,no4 #a3 ,there could not be a better place4 ,no4 #b1 ,how charming4 ,no4 #c1 ,better there than not at all4 ,no4 #d1 ,i wonder if that will be a runaway match4 ,no4 #e1 ,the dearest spot on earth4 ,no4 #f1 ,a friend in need is a friend indeed4 ,no4 #g1 ,i hope we will all be invited4 ,no4 #h1 ,an elopement1 you may be certain4 ,no4 #i1 ,delightful4 ,so gypsy-like4 ,no4 #aj1 ,i am sure there will be room for us all at this wedding4 ,no4 #aa1 ,many a happy marriage has taken place in a court-house4 ,no4 #ab1 ,won't that be romantic8 ,illustration3 ,the ,vesper ,rite4 ,the communicative old witch of the northwest wind imparted so many methods of ,hallowe'en fortune telling you can take your choice4 ,here are the rest just as she told them4 ,the ,vesper ,rite1 if observed with due solemnity1 will disclose the principal characteristics of any one submitting to the test4 ,take six large potatoes and cut them in half4 ,shape each half into a candlestick by scooping out a round hole in the small end1 making it large enough to hold a candle4 ,place a half candle in each of the potato candlesticks and pin around each candle a strip of paper on which is written one word indicating a trait of character1 such as 8modesty10 8bashfulness10 8vanity10 etc4 ,then form a magic ring of the candles in the centre of a dimly lighted room4 ,the ring should be about three feet in diameter4 ,blindfold one of the players and have the entire party join hands and run three times around the lighted candles4 ,then1 leaving the blindfolded player standing two feet from and facing the ring1 let the others fall back while a chair is placed before her1 a fan is handed to her and she is told to make three trials at fanning out the candles over the back of the chair4 ,after the third trial she must remove the bandage from her eyes and examine the papers on the candles that are left burning1 reading aloud the words which reveal her character4 ,to avoid any danger of skirts catching fire1 care must be taken that no one approaches the candles too closely after they are lighted4 ,another game is called the ,bean ,bag ,test ,into a bag that will hold four or five quarts1 pour three quarts of dried beans and in their midst hide a ring1 a thimble and a brass button4 ,have ready a bright new tin cup and let each player in turn dip into the bag and take out a cupful of beans which must be emptied into a plate4 ,if either a girl or boy finds the ring in the beans it is a sign of an early marriage4 ,if a girl gets the thimble she will be an old maid1 and when the thimble falls to the lot of a boy he will marry an old maid4 ,the brass button in a girl's cup of beans denotes that she will marry a widower1 but in a boy's cup it is a bachelor's button and shows that he will be a bachelor all his life and will sew on his buttons himself4 ,each player can have but one trial1 and if only beans fall to her share1 it signifies that her fate is still undecided4 ,here is another test called ,the ,witch ,screen ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eg4--,through the lengthwise centre of the cloth cut two slits for each player4 ,across the end or corner of the room fasten a breadth of inexpensive cloth for the witch screen2 old muslin or any material most convenient will answer the purpose if not too thin4 ,through the lengthwise centre of the cloth cut two slits for each player4 ,fig4 #eg has eight slits and is intended for four players4 ,seat the company in a row near to and facing the witch screen1 adjust it so that the slits will come on a level with the hands of the players1 then1 standing behind the screen and looking over the top1 say1 8,i have some wonderful treasures which the witches have loaned us for this evening1 but1 as the objects are very valuable and must be returned1 ,i ask that you use the utmost caution in handling them1 and take great care not to drop or break any of the things while passing them from one to another down the line4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eh4--,the lava from ,mt4 ,pelee4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ei4--,slip your hands through openings in the witch screen4 8,the first charm is ,a ,piece of ,lava brought from ,mt4 ,pelee in a witch's pocket 7,fig4 #eh74 ,if you will all kindly slip both of your hands through openings directly opposite you in the witch screen 7,fig4 #ei71 you may have the pleasure of passing the lava from one to another4 ,receiving and giving the lava according to rule means a successful year1 but woe to the one who drops it1 for to him will come disappointment40 ,after you have made your little speech1 sit down and1 hidden by the screen1 take from a tray at your side a hot potato 7,fig4 #eh71 which has been in the oven only long enough to become thoroughly heated2 place it in the hand at the head of the line with the words1 8,i give you the charmed lava2 pass it on40 ,though the girls and boys may not see what they have1 they can assuredly feel it1 and there comes in the fun1 for each in turn will be sorely tempted to drop the hot potato and yet not dare to do so1 and no hint being given1 the next neighbor will in turn be equally startled4 ,when the lava reaches the last player1 some one back of the screen at that end must receive the precious object and store it away on a tray4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fj4--,the wonderful ,japanese crystal4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fa4--,the baby porcupine4 ,as soon as the hot lava is disposed of1 arise and tell the company that the next charm is a piece of ,wonderful ,japanese ,crystal 7,fig4 #fj74 ,it will enable them to see and understand everything more quickly and clearly2 it will also gain new friends and delightful surprises4 ,to drop the crystal brings dulness of comprehension1 no friends and no surprises4 ,use a piece of ice for this4 ,the third charm is a rare natural history specimen1 called ,the ,baby ,porcupine 7,fig4 #fa74 ,the little creature signifies difficulties successfully overcome1 but if dropped the fortune will be reversed4 ,the porcupine is in reality a chestnut bur4 ,a ,harmless ,serpent forms the fourth charm2 it renders all girls and boys proof against fear of wild animals1 and imparts the faculty of taming and making pets of many inhabitants of the forest1 but the charm will be lost with one failing to pass it on its way4 ,the serpent is a snake made of soft dough4 ,one of the best fairy gifts is ,a ,treasure from the ,great ,blue ,sea ,it means a joyous ocean voyage to new and beautiful lands1 but if dropped1 the player will encounter storms and perils4 ,hand the first player a slippery raw oyster4 ,when all the charms have been tested1 announce that before returning the treasures to the witches you will place them on exhibition2 then turn back the witch screen and let the girls and boys gather around the tray of queer charms1 where they can laugh and exchange comments to their hearts' content4 ,the effect of the witch screen may be enhanced by using a breadth of brilliant-red muslin and pasting on it black moons1 stars1 cats1 etc4 ,erect at each end of the screen a comic pumpkin lantern head1 with white paper fastened on the inside over the features to light them up1 instead of a real light placed inside4 ,slide each pumpkin head on the end of a pole1 and rest the pumpkin firmly on four long1 strong nails driven in around near the top of the pole4 ,the lower end of each pole may be steadied and supported by being inserted in a hole bored through the centre of a heavy piece of plank1 where it must form a very tight fit2 or you can sink the pole into a deep pail of stones and earth4 ,if it is possible to have the only light in the room placed back of the screen1 the effect produced will add to the mystery and enchantment4 ,make all decorations as funny as you like1 but avoid anything grotesquely unpleasant4 ,let every item be agreeable1 from the least to the most important arrangement for the evening's fun4 ,a very pretty way of telling fortunes is with ,fairy ,airships made of feathers4 ,take as many fluffy feathers as there are girls and boys in the party and paste on each feather a prophecy written on a bit of paper1 such as3 ,yes1 ,no1 ,sometime1 ,possibly1 ,never1 ,at twenty-five1 ,probably1 ,depends on myself1 ,if ,i can1 ,i'll try1 ,when the time comes1 ,of course1 ,three times1 ,before you know it1 ,not if ,i can help it1 ,certainly1 ,doubtful1 ,surely4 ,put all the fairy airships into a pasteboard box-lid1 which you have previously punched full of holes1 and1 standing on a stool or chair1 hold the box-lid high in the air while you slowly and impressively say to the company3 8,these fairy airships will decide your fate regarding marriage4 ,will you marry80 ,at the word 8marry0 launch the ships of fate by fanning vigorously under the box-lid with a large palm-leaf fan1 which will send the ships flying in every direction2 as they sail through the air each player must endeavor to catch one before it falls4 ,when order has been restored and all have their airships1 each girl and boy in turn must read aloud the prophecy brought by the fairy vessel4 ,all the party will enjoy the ,blarney ,stone ,game ,place a large1 clean stone on a doily-covered fancy plate which rests on a table in the centre of the room1 and tell your guests that a certain spell cast on the famous ,blarney ,stone in ,ireland caused the virtues of that wonderful stone to be transmitted to the stone in the very room where they stand1 and that if a girl or boy1 when blindfolded1 can walk up to the table and kiss the ,hallowe'en ,blarney ,stone1 she or he will ever after be jolly and happy and prove a most agreeable companion4 ,then tie a handkerchief across the eyes of each of the players in turn and let them walk up to and try to kiss the stone before the witches come to take away the magic spell1 which they will do long before the clock strikes twelve at midnight4 ,during the evening be sure to try fortunes by the ,fortune ,jingle ,on different sheets of paper write one of the following verses3 8,one is good fortune1 ,two a light heart1 ,three is a carriage1 ,four is a cart1 ,five is a new dress1 ,six1 a new hat1 ,seven is a pet dog1 ,eight1 a pet cat1 ,nine is a letter1 ,ten is a pleasure1 ,eleven is a great joy1 ,twelve is a treasure40 ,place each verse in a separate envelope and hang all on a string stretched and tied to the backs of two chairs4 ,distribute squares of paper each marked with a number beginning at number one4 ,the player receiving number one has first choice of envelopes from the line4 ,two brings second choice1 and so on4 ,when all missives have been taken and the signal given for opening the envelopes1 the player receiving verse one reads aloud1 8,one is good fortune02 immediately after the person with number two reads1 and the other verses follow in numerical succession1 every envelope bringing its gift to the recipient4 ,illustration3 ,titania ,stands on ,her ,toes1 ,she ,floats1 ,she ,drops to the ,floor in a ,deep ,curtsy4 ,,chapter ,,vi ,,dance ,,of ,,titania1 ,,queen ,,of ,,the ,,fairies ,,titania is a graceful little fairy1 dancing as though she had learned the art from the bending of the grass in a summer breeze1 the swaying of the trees or the flitting of butterflies from flower to flower4 ,light1 airy1 with gossamer wings and filmy dress1 looking as though she needed nothing more substantial than silvery moonbeams to dance upon1 the little queen leaves her home in the deep1 wild woods and comes to do your bidding4 ,have ,titania's ,stage ,ready that she may not be kept waiting1 for queens and fairies will brook no delay 7,fig4 #fb74 ,find a wooden box #ah inches long by #ac inches wide or larger 7,fig4 #fc74 ,with a heavy hammer or a hatchet pry up and knock off the top and one of the long sides 7,fig4 #fd74 ,the open side forms the front of the roofless stage4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fb4--,titania's stage4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fc4--,the wooden box for ,titania's stage4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fd4--,knock off the top and one of the long sides4 ,the coloring of the stage should be a light sage green4 ,if possible1 procure this color in cartridge wallpaper wider than the stage4 ,with a string measure the distance across the back wall of stage from top to bottom 7,a to ,b ,fig4 #fd71 continue the measurement in the same straight line across the floor of the stage from back ,b to front ,c4 ,after allowing five extra inches for turning the paper over the top edge of the back wall ,a and front edge of floor ,c1 cut the length according to measurement4 ,to make the strip of green paper the required width measure the exact distance across the inside back wall from side wall ,d to side wall ,e1 then fold the paper evenly along each lengthwise edge1 making it the width needed2 unfold and adjust the paper against the back wall over its top edge and over the floor of the stage4 ,cut short slits on each side of the paper where the floor and wall meet1 that the extra width may lie flat up against the side walls4 ,bend the top edge of the paper over the top of the back wall1 again slashing a little on each side to make it fit top edge of wall4 ,in the same way bend the paper over the front edge of the floor2 see that the paper lies perfectly smooth1 then fasten it in place with small tacks1 using three tacks on the outside at the back1 one at each corner and one in the middle2 two tacks where floor and wall meet1 and three underneath front of floor4 ,measure the side walls1 cut paper to fit and fasten the paper on the walls with as few tacks as possible4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fe4--;,back wing for stage4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ff4--;,forward wing for stage4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fg4--;,fasten the wings to the side wall of the stage like this4 ,when the inside papering is finished1 cover the outside of the stage with pretty cretonne4 ,make four inside wings1 two for each side of the stage1 to represent the foliage of trees4 ,cut two like ,fig4 #fe1 from paper of a darker green than the walls of the stage and reverse one of them that they may face each other4 ,then make two wings1 like ,fig4 #ff1 from paper of a lighter green than the walls1 and reverse one of these also4 ,the walls of the stage with the two sets of wings will make three different tones of green forming the background4 ,cut the wings long enough to extend up as high or higher than the side walls of the stage4 ,bend each strip lengthwise at dotted line and paste the bent margin of one wing from ,fig4 #fe on each side wall1 running the wing up from the floor to the top of the wall about four inches from the back wall4 ,in the same manner fasten the wings 7,fig4 #ff7 on each side wall three inches in front of the first or back wing 7,fig4 #fg74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fh4--,the arch4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fi4--,tack the ends of the arch at the top of the two side walls4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gj4--,pasteboard extension for front of stage4 ,cut the arch 7,fig4 #fh7 of stiff pasteboard4 ,the cover of a pasteboard box will do4 ,make the arch long enough to span the space across the front of the stage and let the lower edge of the curve in the centre of the arch be five and a half inches higher than its two ends 7see dotted line1 ,fig4 #fh74 ,cover both sides of the arch with green paper1 gluing it on only along the edges4 ,tack the ends of the arch to the top of the two side walls 7,fig4 #fi74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ga4--,tack one piece of pasteboard on the front edge of each side wall of the stage4 ,cut two pieces of pasteboard like ,fig4 #gj1 making each six inches wide and almost as high from floor of stage as is the top of the centre of the arch4 ,paper these also with green1 both front and back4 ,tack one piece of the pasteboard on the front edge of each side wall of the stage1 allowing it to extend out from and beyond the side wall 7,fig4 #ga74 ,bore a hole with a gimlet through the centre of the back wall of the stage five inches up from the inside floor1 and your stage will be finished4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gb4--,titania4 ,make ,titania 7,fig4 #gb7 of light-weight cardboard4 ,when finished she should be ten inches in height from her toes to the top of her head4 ,fig4 #gc is the diagram of the body and arms1 measuring three and five-eighths inches from top of head to lower edge of body4 ,cut the two upper portions of the legs 7length two and one-half inches1 greatest width one inch7 from ,fig4 #gd1 and the two lower portions 7length three and three-eighths inches7 from ,fig4 #ge4 ,join the two parts of each leg together1 according to the dots1 with a strong thread and needle1 and fasten with a knot on front and back1 so that the two pieces will be strung upon the same thread and sandwiched between two knots of the thread4 ,attach the legs to the body in the same manner4 ,the small circles ,a1 ,a on the doll's body 7,fig4 #gc7 give the exact spots where the thread should pass through1 and the curved line above each letter shows where the upper edge of the top part of the leg should reach4 ,dot ,b marks the point on the upper part of the leg 7,fig4 #gd7 where the thread goes through1 joining the leg to the body4 ,have all the joints of the doll securely fastened and only loose enough to move easily4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gd4--,two upper portions of legs4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gc4--;,cut the body and arms of ,titania like this4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ge4--,lower part of legs4 ,find a pretty head in some old paper or advertisement1 cut it out and gum it on the pasteboard head4 ,remember1 though1 that the printed head must not be of very heavy paper1 as the upper part of the doll should be lighter in weight than the lower1 otherwise the figure will not balance4 ,if you cannot find a head in colors1 you must paint the printed black-and-white one2 give the face1 neck and arms a flat wash of light-pink water-color paint2 color the lips and cheeks red1 the eyes blue and the hair brown4 ,make the long stockings a darker pink than the light flesh tones1 and paste slippers of gilt paper on the feet4 ,puncture a hole with a coarse needle through the centre of the belt-line 7,c1 ,fig4 #gf74 ,for ,titania's ,costume make a skirt of plain white tissue paper4 ,cut it sixteen inches wide and three and a half inches long1 after creasing the skirt by gathering up the fulness with your fingers and drawing the skirt lengthwise from top to bottom through your partially closed hand4 ,gather the top of the skirt with thread and needle1 and fasten it on the doll1 then slit up each side from the lower edge to allow of the free motion of the doll's limbs4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gf4--,string the doll together in this way4 ,make the dress of pink chiffon4 ,cut the dress skirt three and three-fourth inches long and one yard wide1 press it in knife-blade plaits1 running up and down1 then gather and tie it on the doll over the white tissue-paper skirt4 ,do not attempt to hem any portion of the clothing1 as the object is to keep it all light and airy4 ,fashion the waist of a smooth strip of pink chiffon tied with narrow pink ribbons at the shoulders and brought down to the belt-line into a point back and front1 and sewed in place4 ,form a silver girdle of the tinsel ruching used on ,christmas trees2 place the tinsel around the ,queen's waist1 allowing the two free ends to hang down over the front of the dress4 ,glue a little of the same tinsel around the front of her dark hair1 where it will shine like a crown of diamonds4 ,make ,titania daintily hold up and out each side of her dress4 ,do this by stretching out the sides of the dress skirt and gumming the material to each wrist4 ,cut a scarf of pink chiffon four inches wide and sixteen inches long1 fasten one end in each hand of the fairy ,queen and let the scarf fall in a graceful loop4 ,queen ,titania's ,wings must be of the pink chiffon cut shawl shape1 two sides straight and one bias 7,fig4 #gg74 ,plait the bias edge 7,fig4 #gh7 and gum the wings in place on the ,queen's shoulders at the back4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gg4--;,cut the wings shawl shape4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gh4--,plait the bias edge4 ,take a needle threaded with black thread1 two or three yards long2 run the needle through the centre of the belt-line of the dressed fairy at the point ,c 7,fig4 #gf72 then thread it through the gimlet hole at the back of the stage and tie a button on the end of the thread which extends outside of the back wall4 ,pull the thread on the inside of the stage until the button lies tight up against the outside of the back wall4 ,allow sufficient length of thread to bring the ,queen within about three inches of the front edge of the stage1 then make a knot in the thread immediately back of and another in front of the ,queen to prevent her from slipping either forward or backward4 ,tie the long1 loose end of the thread on a small empty spool1 that it may be wound up and kept from tangling when not in use4 ,place the ,stage on a ,chair facing the light and1 carrying the thread in your hand1 take your station two yards or more away from and in front of the stage2 then practise moving ,titania by means of the thread until you can make her glide1 pose and dance in many graceful attitudes4 ,she will lean to the right and to the left1 will stand on her toes1 then curtsey1 making her dress touch the floor2 she will move gently and slowly1 again faster and faster until her feet seem to fairly twinkle over the stage floor2 she will pass back and forth almost as if floating from side to side of the stage1 or stand in the centre and dance4 ,titania is ever fascinating1 beautiful and graceful in all her movements4 ,ask some one to play on the piano while you make the fairy ,queen dance and she will keep time to the music4 ,when you have learned to make ,titania dance her prettiest invite your friends in to see the little fairy4 ,,chapter ,,vii ,,thanksgiving ,,party ,apple1 ,orange and ,pumpkin ,games ,,we must have six little yellow pumpkins for our new ,thanksgiving game1 but we may hunt high and low1 far and near1 for real ones the required size1 and not find them1 because natural pumpkins are much too large4 ,so we shall have to make oranges and apples into ,little ,pumpkins ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gi4--,stand an apple on a square of paper4 ,select apples about two inches in diameter1 all as near of a size as possible and preferably somewhat flattened at top and bottom4 ,cut a square of orange-colored tissue paper and stand an apple1 stem uppermost1 on its centre 7,fig4 #gi74 ,bring one side of the tissue paper up to the top of the apple and take a wee plait in the paper1 at the same time smoothing it up from the bottom of the apple 7,fig4 #hj74 ,make several more plaits and bring the nearest corner of the paper up to the apple top4 ,continue plaiting the tissue paper around the apple 7,fig4 #ha7 while constantly smoothing it up from the bottom and over the apple until the apple is completely covered and all the edges and corners of the orange-colored paper are folded and brought together at the top of the apple 7,fig4 #hb74 ,hold the covered apple in your left hand and with your right hand twist the ends of the tissue paper around the stem 7,fig4 #hc74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hj4--,take a plait in the paper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ha4--;,bring the nearest corner of the paper to the top of apple4 ,illustration3 ,playing the ,pumpkin ,game4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hb4--;,constantly smooth it up from the bottom until the apple is covered4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hc4--,twist the ends of the paper around the stem4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hd4--,wind the long end of the thread tightly around the apple4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #he4--,pinch a square of green tissue paper over the stem4 ,examine the apple and make sure there are no raised ridges in the paper and that the entire covering lies flat and smooth4 ,tie one end of a piece of brown thread around the base of the stem4 ,wind the long end of the thread once tightly around the apple1 giving it a twist around the stem to secure it in place 7,fig4 #hd74 ,the thread must pass across the exact centre of the blossom end of the apple4 ,as you wind the thread turn the fruit and watch the thread that it may not swerve either to this side or that4 ,a second time wind the thread around the apple1 making the first encircling thread band double4 ,cross this double band with another double band1 marking the apple into quarters1 secure the thread about the stem1 and again wind it around the apple1 dividing two opposite quarters each into two pieces4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hf4--,tie a thread around the base of the stem4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hg4--;,a little yellow pumpkin4 ,divide all the quarters in the same way1 then pinch a small square of bright green tissue paper over the covered stem 7,fig4 #he71 smooth it down close and tight and tie a thread around the base 7,fig4 #hf74 ,bend the extreme end of the stem until it curls1 and the result will be a cunning little yellow pumpkin 7,fig4 #hg74 ,fig4 #hh shows how the cross threads should meet at the centre of the blossom end of the fruit4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hh4--,shows how the cross threads should meet4 ,an ordinary pastry-board about twenty-six inches long and nineteen inches wide must do duty for ,the ,game ,court 7,fig4 #hi74 ,find the centre of the board by running two straight lines diagonally across from corner to corner1 the spot where the two lines meet and cross marks the centre of the board 7,fig4 #ij74 ,make a small circle two inches in diameter around centre spot1 surround this circle with a larger circle seven inches in diameter4 ,erase the diagonal lines within the circles and run straight lines radiating outward midway between the diagonal lines from the edge of the larger circle across the face of the pastry-board4 ,with four more lines cut off the four corners of the court1 number the divisions as in ,fig4 #ia1 and the game court will be finished4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hi4--;,a pastry-board for the ,game ,court4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ij4--,run two straight lines from corner to corner4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ia4--,the ,game ,court is finished4 ,stand the little pumpkins1 at equal distances apart1 on the larger circle of the court1 and on the small circle stand a natural1 large1 round apple without tissue paper cover4 ,the ,game may be played by any number4 ,the object of the game is to spin the apple so that it will hit one or more of the surrounding pumpkins and roll or shove them on to the highest marked divisions of the game-court4 ,each player is allowed only one trial at a time1 turns being taken successively by the different players4 ,the spinning of the apple must always be started on the small central circle where the apple is stationed4 ,when the apple rolls off the board the player may have another trial2 if the apple rolls off on the second trial she simply loses her turn1 there being no other penalty4 ,when a pumpkin lands on one of the dividing lines it counts ten against the player4 ,often an apple will strike several pumpkins1 sending them off on different divisions4 ,every pumpkin then counts the number in the division on which it stops2 sometimes more than one pumpkin will land in the same division1 and each pumpkin so landing counts the number in that division4 ,when the apple sends but one pumpkin1 the player scores merely the number of that one division on which it lands4 ,after each play the pumpkins must be replaced in the circle ready for the next player4 ,five rounds constitute a game and the highest record scored wins4 ,when played by sides there must be an equal number of players on each side4 ,the side making the highest score wins the game4 ,for the next game let all the players sit on the floor in a ring and by the light of only wee pumpkin lanterns tell a ,rapid-,transit ,thanksgiving ,story ,the leader must begin the tale1 which may or may not be original4 ,he must speak for only a few minutes1 then stop1 when his right-hand neighbor1 without hesitation1 must take up the story and carry it on for a few moments4 ,in this way the story goes the round1 each right-hand player in turn telling his part4 ,every player has the privilege of making his portion of the tale original1 even though the preceding part may not be so4 ,it is also the privilege of every one to change the story to a dream1 or a fairy tale4 ,quotations may be introduced1 verses recited1 or snatches of song sung2 in fact1 the oftener the story is twisted and turned the greater the interest2 but there must always be some connection between the part being told and that which has gone before4 ,the entire romance must be finished before the light in the wee pumpkins burns out4 ,if a player should fail to continue the story when his turn comes1 he must pay a forfeit1 and when the story is finished1 redeeming the forfeits adds to the fun4 ,if many guests are present1 divide them into small groups for the rapid-transit story4 ,make a miniature ,pumpkin ,lantern for each girl and boy present4 ,take a symmetrical apple which stands firm and steady on the blossom end4 ,select the best side for the face1 and with the small blade of a penknife cut on it a crescent with ends turned upward for the mouth4 ,cut a triangle for the nose1 two small squares for eyes1 and two short crescents1 points turned upward1 for eyebrows 7,fig4 #ib74 ,turn the apple over and cut an opening in the back as shown at ,fig4 #ic4 ,be extremely cautious not to break or tear the edges of the apple skin while cutting the features and back opening4 ,with the small blade of the penknife inserted at the back opening cut away the inside of the apple little by little1 taking great care not to drive the knife far enough into the apple to puncture the skin4 ,when you reach the core1 screw the large blade of the knife around until the core is sufficiently broken to allow of being cut away without danger of injuring the apple skin by accidental stabs4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ib4--;,cut features in the miniature pumpkin4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ic4--;,cut an opening at the back4 ,after most of the inside has been removed turn the apple around and look at the features2 if you cannot yet see daylight through them1 insert the small blade from the outside of the apple1 through each feature in turn1 and by degrees cut away the meat1 without enlarging the openings of the different features4 ,should this prove ineffectual1 again turn to the back of the apple and work from the inside1 removing more of the contents and making the layer of apple thinner next to the skin4 ,then once more try through the features from the outside4 ,this time the result should be distinctly clear openings for all the features4 ,you cannot help smiling when you look at the apple now1 for you see such a comical little face4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #id4--;,cut a section from a candle4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ie4--,make the bottom larger than the top4 ,cut a short section from an ordinary wax candle 7,fig4 #id71 shave down the sides1 making the bottom heavier and larger than the top 7,fig4 #ie74 ,run a pin through the centre of the candle from bottom to top2 then pull it out4 ,fit the candle inside on the centre of the bottom of the apple1 hold it in place while you run the pin up from the outside of the apple1 through the skin and into the pinhole in the centre of the little candle4 ,the pin should hold the candle firmly in place2 if it does not do so1 pull the pin out and see what is the matter2 possibly the candle needs hollowing out a trifle at the base in order to fit the slight rise in the apple on which the candle stands4 ,put on your thinking cap1 examine and make the candle stand absolutely straight and firm4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #if4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ig4 ,orange ,lanterns4 ,manufacture all the other individual pumpkin lanterns in the same way1 and when story-telling time arrives set a lantern in front of every girl and boy in the circle and light the candle in each little pumpkin4 ,the effect will be charming and inspiring for the story-tellers4 ,oranges with all the pulp extracted also makes very pumpkin-like lanterns when cut in a similar way to the apple lanterns 7,figs4 #if and #ig74 ,anything may be given as ,a ,forfeit and the forfeits are redeemed in the good old way4 ,the leader is blindfolded and seated4 ,a girl or boy stands back of the leader1 and1 taking one of the forfeits1 holds it over her head1 while repeating these words1 8,heavy1 heavy hangs over your head40 ,the leader replies with the question3 8,fine or superfine80 ,if the forfeit belongs to a girl1 the answer is 8superfine10 if to a boy1 8fine40 ,the same player adds1 8,what shall the owner do to redeem it80 ,the leader names a penalty1 such as1 kneel to the prettiest1 bow to the wittiest1 or1 look angry1 then smile your sweetest4 ,the leader may inflict one of these1 or any other1 making the penalty as funny as she desires1 but it must never cause a player to feel in the least uncomfortable1 for every girl and boy should be given just as good a time as possible1 that all may return to their homes from the ,thanksgiving games happy and pleased with their evening's fun4 ,,chapter ,,viii ,,impromptu ,,moving ,,pictures ,,for ,,thanksgiving ,,this entertainment is one that girls can get up themselves1 though of course boys may take part4 ,it is very funny if well carried out and will give every one a hearty laugh1 which we all know is a good thing after the ,thanksgiving dinner4 ,first make the poster1 to be hung in a conspicuous place in hall or parlor4 ,print it in large black letters on a good-sized sheet of wrapping paper3 ,there ,will be ,to-night ,an ,exhibition of ,the ,world-,renowned ,moving ,pictures ,taken by ,madam ,moselle at ,great ,risk of ,life and ,property4 ,no ,expense or ,effort ,being ,spared to ,obtain the ,real ,characters and ,settings of a ,puritan ,thanksgiving ,and ,other ,scenes from the ,life of ,our ,forefathers4 ,make the picture screen by stretching a large white sheet on the back wall of the room where the performance is to be held1 as you would for a magic lantern exhibition4 ,then get your costumes ready4 ,these may be made up very quickly from materials at hand4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ih4--,this is the way to cut the ,puritan's collar4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ii4--;,cut the wide cuff like this4 ,illustration3 ,puritan ,costumes for the ,moving ,pictures4 ,the ,puritan ,woman's ,dress as well as that of the man must be entirely of black and white1 and to carry out the effect of black and white pictures their faces and hands should be made perfectly white with chalk1 their eyebrows blackened and black wigs made of fringed tissue paper4 ,only a little of the woman's hair will show but the man's should be long and hang down to his shoulders4 ,a tight black waist and skirt nearly to her ankles2 a long white apron1 white kerchief and cuffs 7cut from old muslin7 and a tightly fitting little black cap with a turned over edge of white form the costume of the woman4 ,with these should be worn low black shoes and white stockings4 ,for the ,puritan ,man's ,costume have short1 full1 black trousers1 long black or white coat with wide white collar and cuffs1 a high-crowned1 broad-brimmed black hat and low shoes with black stockings4 ,a black leather trunk strap buckled across one shoulder may be added1 also a long black cloak and staff4 ,cut the man's collar and cuffs like ,figs4 #ih and #ii1 and the woman's cuffs like ,fig4 #ii4 ,fig4 #ajj shows how the ,puritan hat is made of stiff brown paper over an ordinary straw hat4 ,fig4 #aja is the brim1 ,fig4 #ajb the crown1 which must be pinned together along its straight edges4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajj4--,put the ,puritan's hat together in this way4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aja4--,this is the hat brim4 ,the ,properties for the ,thanksgiving dinner scene are a long1 narrow table spread for dinners1 and chairs enough for the actors1 six or eight taking part4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajb4--,this is the crown of the ,puritan's hat4 ,before showing her pictures ,madam ,moselle should stand in front of the screen and say a few words extolling the pictures she is about to present4 ,the girl who represents ,madam ,moselle should deliver an amusing little speech1 giving a foreigner's idea of our first ,thanksgiving1 and it can be made absurdly funny with its many ludicrous mistakes4 ,at the close of her address the lights must be put out and the scene quickly arranged close to the screen1 all the actors except two being seated at the table4 ,thus remain two empty chairs4 ,as quickly as possible the light should be turned on and at the same time the actors must begin ,a ,pantomime of eating1 drinking and talking4 ,they should express anxiety for the safety of the tardy guests1 some of them leaving the table to appear to look out of a door or window4 ,all the while 7this is the great point7 the actors must shake and quiver in imitation of the queer trembling and quivering always seen in the moving pictures2 and their movements must be very rapid4 ,soon the missing couple should appear1 coming in hurriedly and by gestures telling of an encounter with the ,indians4 ,their clothes should be pierced with arrows1 and the ,puritan's hat must be bristling with them4 ,all this will be very laughable if the acting is good1 and absurd little by-plays introduced2 but the whole thing will be spoiled unless the constant quivering and shaking is kept up by all of the actors4 ,the picture can be 8flashed off0 the screen by simply turning out the light1 and others may be shown giving various incidents in ,puritan life or the early history of our country4 ,,chapter ,,ix ,a ,,valentine ,,entertainment ,,with ,,original ,,valentines ,,the fun of the ,valentine party begins with the invitations1 which are in the shape of a heart4 ,the message on the outside 7,fig4 #ajc7 leads to the opening of the invitation 7,fig4 #ajd71 and on the inside are found the time and place where the frolic is to take place and the names of those who are to give the party4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajc4--,the invitation closed4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajd4--;,invitation opened4 ,to make the design1 fold through the centre a square piece of paper measuring five and one-half inches along each edge4 ,fold this oblong crosswise through its centre1 and you will make a small square of four layers of paper4 ,on one side of this square mark the outline of a heart1 allowing the corner of the small four-folded square1 which is also the centre of the large square of paper before it is folded1 to form the point of the heart 7,fig4 #aje74 ,cut out the top of the heart through all four layers of paper1 also the curves of the sides of the heart2 cut these only part way down as shown by ,a and ,a 7,fig4 #aje74 ,the dotted lines in ,fig4 #ajd represent creases4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aje4--;,cut out the top of the heart through all four layers4 ,answers to the invitations might read3 8,my dear ,miss ,darling and ,miss ,love1 too1 ,i've opened your heart and will come to you ,on the day you've appointed1 the pleasure is mine1 ,and ,i hope you'll accept me as your ,valentine40 ,make as many valentines as there are guests1 that all may be sure of receiving at least one4 ,address each of the girls' valentines 8,to ,my ,sweetheart10 and each of the boys' valentines1 8,to ,my ,valentine40 ,let either a girl or a boy be selected to run ,the ,post-,office which you can make of a clothes-horse draped with sheets4 ,place a table inside across the opening1 and on the table1 resting on a pile of large books1 stand an empty wooden box minus top and bottom4 ,set it up on one end to serve as the post-office window4 ,the table and space on each side of the window should be screened with sheets4 ,across the outside top of the window fasten a pasteboard sign marked in large letters3 ,,st4 ,,valentine',s ,,post-,,office and decorate the white sheets covering the clothes-horse with red paper hearts of various sizes fastened on singly1 doubly and in festoons4 ,on the table at the right-hand side of the window place the girls' valentines and on the left-hand side of the window the boys' valentines4 ,illustration3 ,sending ,her ,valentine4 ,ask all the girls to form in line and march around the room to the post-office1 while some one plays a suitable lively air on the piano4 ,each girl in turn must stop at the post-office window1 where a box of ,st4 ,valentine's stamps is set before her with one of the boys' valentines4 ,she must close her eyes and take one stamp from the box1 then open her eyes1 read the stamp and on it sign her name at the right-hand corner1 then fasten the stamp on the valentine with paste given her by the postmaster1 and move onward to give place to the next girl in line4 ,when all the boys' valentines have been stamped1 the girls take their seats and the boys form in line and stamp the girls' valentines in the same manner4 ,the ,valentine ,stamps should be previously prepared4 ,they are made uniform in size of small squares of white writing paper1 on which is written any kind of a wish which may add to the fun1 such as3 ,i wish you would smile at me4 ,i wish you would sing me a song4 ,i wish you would tell me a funny story4 ,i wish you would sit by my side now4 ,i wish you would walk around the room with me4 ,i wish you would recite poetry to me4 ,when entering the room each guest is given a card4 ,on one card is written1 8,when the ,bell ,rings once go to the post-office02 on another1 8,when the bell rings twice go to the post-office10 and so on1 each card designating a specified number of rings4 ,the postmaster sounds the bell at intervals1 giving a different number of taps at each ring1 until every girl and boy is supplied with a valentine2 then each boy seeks the girl who has signed the stamp on his valentine and she asks that the wish be fulfilled4 ,the request is1 of course1 laughingly and courteously granted4 ,the valentines being sealed with ,st4 ,valentine's stamps1 the mystery of the sentiment enclosed cannot be revealed until the wish on the stamp is granted1 and neither the girls nor the boys are aware of the contents of the valentines they stamp4 ,later in the evening the girls find the boys who have signed their stamps1 and then1 entering into the spirit of the fun1 they grant the boys' wishes as written on their stamps4 ,the guests may bring extra valentines made especially for and directed to either hostess or guests4 ,these are not sent through ,st4 ,valentine's post-office4 ,the hostess keeps one door of the parlor closed for the benefit of those desiring to send special valentines4 ,a sign posted upon it reads3 ,,cupid',s ,,door and quantities of paper flowers with gilded pasteboard hearts1 bows and arrows adorn it1 giving it a very festive appearance4 ,each guest is at liberty at any time during the evening to slip from the company1 make her way through the hall to ,cupid's door1 slide her valentine under the door1 give a quick knock and scamper off before she is caught4 ,only the hostess has the privilege of opening ,cupid's door1 and to her belongs the pleasure of delivering these valentines to the various guests for whom they are intended4 ,there are many styles of valentines which you can make4 ,fig4 #ajf is effective and requires only a few moments to manufacture4 ,for ,the ,heart ,valentine use a plain white card about four and one-half inches long and three and one-half inches wide for the foundation4 ,make four hearts graduated in size1 the largest of red paper1 the next gold1 then green1 and the smallest of blue paper4 ,cut a small slit in each heart a short distance from the top centre 7,fig4 #ajf74 ,string the hearts on a narrow ribbon and tie one end of the ribbon through two slits cut in the lower left-hand corner of the card1 and run the other end of the ribbon through two slits in the upper right-hand corner1 then tie4 ,write across the top of the card1 8,make your choice40 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajf4--,which heart will you take8 ,beneath it write this verse3 8,the ,red ,hearts take without return1 ,the ,green with envy always burn1 ,the ,blue are cold and hard and small1 ,the ,gold ask nothing but give all40 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajg4--,shade a little to suggest roundness4 ,the ,world ,valentine is another design4 ,for this use a circular piece of white paper about four inches in diameter4 ,shade it around the edge a little to give an idea of roundness 7,fig4 #ajg71 then with ink draw on the disk the outlines of ,north and ,south ,america to represent the world 7,fig4 #ajh74 ,paint the continent a light yellow4 ,put the lettering on in bright colors1 placing an awl drawn in outline 7,fig4 #aji7 and a figure #b in the position shown in ,fig4 #aaj4 ,paint the awl red4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajh4--,north and ,south ,america4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aji4--,the awl4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aaj4--,you are all the world to your valentine4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aaa4--,the daisy valentine4 ,this message is a rebus and reads3 8,you are all the world to your ,valentine40 ,next ,comes the ,daisy ,valentine 7,fig4 #aaa74 ,on a piece of paper six inches long and three and a half inches wide draw a circle near the top1 making it not quite three inches in diameter4 ,paint the circle bright green as a background for the white daisy4 ,make the daisy of three or four layers of white tissue paper folded like ,fig4 #aab and cut along the scalloped outline shown in ,fig4 #aab4 ,unfold the petals and they will be like ,fig4 #aac2 but as the number should be odd1 you must cut off one of the petals4 ,sew the centre of the daisy to the centre of the green circle1 then paste a small yellow paper disk 7,fig4 #aad7 over the stitches4 ,paint a small red heart at each upper corner of the valentine and paint a narrow blue ribbon tied to each heart and looped between1 as in ,fig4 #aaa4 ,if the valentine is intended for a girl write under the green circle in red letters3 8,pluck the daisy petals off1 saying first3 #8,he loves me4' ,with the next3 #8,he loves me not4' ,then again3 #8,he loves me4' ,with the fourth3 #8,he loves me not4' ,going on3 #8,he loves me1' ,till the last when torn away ,tells you this3 #8,he loves you4'0 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aab4--,paper folded ready for making daisy4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aac4--,petals of daisy4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aad4--,yellow center for daisy4 ,when the valentine is for a boy substitute the pronoun ,she in place of ,he4 ,love's ,palette1 the last valentine 7,fig4 #aae71 is to be made of light cardboard cut in the shape of a palette4 ,the palette should be about six inches high and four and one-half inches wide at the broadest part4 ,beginning near the top1 cut short slits in pairs in the palette1 placing the pairs one inch and a half apart 7,fig4 #aaf74 ,get a quarter of a yard each of narrow blue1 red1 white1 yellow1 pink and green ribbon1 and slipping the ends through the slits in the palette tie them in bows as shown in ,fig4 #aae4 ,in the centre write in red ink1 8,love's ,palette10 and on the back the following lines3 8,this ribbon blue means ,i am true4 ,the knot of red says1 #8,will you wed8' ,the bow of white1 #8,you're pure as light4' ,the yellow1 too1 means thoughts of you4 ,the tie of pink is love's own link4 ,the loops of green say1 #8,youth so keen ,must conquer all and win his queen4'0 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aae4--,love's palette4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aaf4--,slits cut in palette4 ,,chapter ,x ,,the ,,wild ,,west ,,show ,,on ,a ,,table ,,city people1 country people1 young people1 old people1 busy people1 idle people1 all come flocking to the ,wild ,west ,show when it posts its gay pictures and spreads its fascinating white tents for the benefit of the public4 ,but did it ever occur to you that the show could come to you--that is1 you might organize a show of your own and arrange things to suit yourself8 ,if you want the ,wild ,west ,show first and a circus after you can have them4 ,should you prefer both shows at the same time they are yours1 for you can make the entire affair--horses1 riders1 ,indians1 wild animals and tent4 ,you may do even more--you can cause all the performers actually to move1 and that by the mere turn of your wrist1 because your show will be in reality the moving pictures of ,a ,panorama ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aag4--;,an old broom for rollers4 ,get a common old house-broom 7,fig4 #aag7 and saw the broom part off evenly from the handle at the dotted line ,a2 then saw two pieces of equal length from the handle at dotted lines ,b and ,c1 making each piece fourteen inches long4 ,these we will call the rollers4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aah4--;,box for show with holes in top and bottom4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aai4--;,broom stick rollers fitted in box4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abj4--;,blocks of wood across each end of bottom of box4 ,find or make a wooden box about twelve inches high1 eighteen inches wide and eight inches deep2 carefully pry off one of the eighteen-inch sides and cut two round holes through the top of the box1 one at each end1 two inches from the front and one and one-fourth inch from the end2 then turn the box over and cut corresponding holes through the bottom2 reverse the box again1 bringing the right side up 7,fig4 #aah74 ,the holes on the bottom must be exactly under those on the top and all four holes must be only large enough to allow the roller to slip in1 and while in1 to turn easily 7see ,fig4 #aai74 ,remove the rollers and nail a strip of wood two inches thick across each end of the bottom of the box 7,fig4 #abj74 ,then hammer two strong staple-tacks on each roller two and one-half inches from the top1 or smaller end1 and on opposite sides of the stick2 guide the tacks so they will incline very slightly upward while being hammered in 7,fig4 #aba74 ,illustration3 ,the ,wild ,west ,show ,performance4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aba4--,tacks in roller4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abb4--,spool on strip of wood for crank4 ,fit an empty spool on one end of a piece of wood1 one inch wide1 three inches long and not less than one-fourth of an inch thick4 ,slide a large-headed screw in the hole of the spool until the screw rests on the block of wood2 then screw it down tight1 fastening the spool securely on the wood 7,fig4 #abb72 screw a second spool on another piece of wood of the same size as the first 7,fig4 #abc1 ,d and ,e74 ,fit the free end of the block of wood over the top of the roller and mark off the space on the block occupied by the end of the roller2 with a gimlet bore a hole through the centre of this space1 and also in the centre of the top of the roller2 place the block of wood over the top of the roller1 bringing one hole on top of the other1 and fasten the roller and block together with a screw4 ,in like manner screw the other block to the top of the second roller2 these blocks and spools form the crank-handles for turning the rollers 7,fig4 #abd74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abc4--,top of box and the crank ready to be fastened on box4 ,unscrew the blocks from the rollers and carefully remove the staple-tacks1 in order that ,a ,strip of ,cloth may be tacked to the rollers and the rollers replaced in the box4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abd4--;,box ready for tent front4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abe4--,lapped ends of strips of cloth sewed4 ,purchase two yards of low-priced white cambric dress skirt lining2 fold the cambric lengthwise into three equal divisions2 then cut the folds apart1 making three lengths each two yards long and about eight and one-fourth inches wide2 sew the pieces together along the end edges1 lapping one over the other that the seam may be as thin and flat as possible 7,fig4 #abe74 ,this will give you a strip almost six yards long for the panorama4 ,do not hem either the top or bottom4 ,allow a blank space of white cloth1 sixteen and one-half inches long1 at the beginning of the panorama2 then commence ,pasting ,pictures on the strip4 ,colored newspaper pictures are best1 because the paper is thin and easily pasted on the cambric4 ,almost all leading newspapers publish in their issues from time to time colored pictures of wild animals1 rough riders1 ,indians and circus performers4 ,when you have a collection of the pictures you want1 cut each one out neatly4 ,when all are ready1 sort them over1 selecting the one you wish to come first on the panorama2 then the second picture and so on4 ,have them all in order so you need waste no time hunting for a print while pasting the pictures on the cambric4 ,make a good paste of flour and water1 allowing it to boil well before using4 ,a drop or two of oil of cloves mixed with the paste after it has cooked will keep it fresh a long time4 ,select an attractive1 comical picture for the first design on the panorama2 but save the best and most startling picture for the very last4 ,you should arrange ,the ,performers in your panorama in much the same way as a story is written or a play put on the stage4 ,always begin with something which will cause the audience to want to see more2 then paste on various pictures1 but toward the last lead up to the best and most exciting design2 the last picture stands for the climax in a story or a play4 ,when placing the pictures on the strip of cambric1 remember not to have them close together2 keep them apart1 allowing a little blank space between each successive object1 so your audience will have an opportunity of enjoying every one of the performers and wild animals as it first appears peeping from behind the roll at one side of the tent1 showing only its head1 then coming in full view and passing slowly before them until it finally disappears around the roll at the other side 7,fig4 #abc74 ,when the ,pictures ,are ,all ,pasted on the strip1 turn over and crease down half an inch of cambric along the edge of the first end of the panorama2 tack this end on one of the rollers4 ,if the thickness of the top of your box is one-half an inch1 tack the end of your panorama fully four and one-half inches below the top or smaller end of the stick4 ,should the thickness of the lid be one inch1 the cambric strip must be tacked on still lower--about five inches from the top4 ,you cannot be too particular about having the edge of the cambric perfectly even and straight on the roller1 so the strip will lie at a true right angle to the roller when laid out flat 7,fig4 #abf74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abf4--;,cloth fastened on roller4 ,having tacked the cambric on1 gradually roll it around the stick1 keeping the strip running over1 not under the stick1 so the roller will stand behind the cambric2 have the cloth perfectly even as it winds around and around4 ,when the end of the cloth is reached1 turn in one-half an inch of the end edge and tack the cambric to the second roller as you tacked the beginning on the first roller 7,fig4 #abg74 ,use the same precaution and wind in the same manner but in an opposite direction when rolling the cambric on the second stick4 ,with a strong hammer strike the top or lid of the box along the edges from underneath until it loosens and can be removed2 take it off and slide the rollers with the attached panorama into the holes on the bottom of the box 7,fig4 #abc74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abg4--,method of rolling cloth on the broom-stick rollers4 ,replace the lid of the box1 passing the top ends of the rollers through the holes1 and nail the lid down to the sides of the box2 then refit the staple-tacks in their respective places and see that they are in tight2 restore the crank-handles on top of the rollers and rescrew them in position 7,fig4 #abd74 ,now the panorama is ready to go into ,a ,tent ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abh4--,pasteboard tent front for box4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abi4--,manner of covering tent front with white cloth4 ,cut a stiff piece of pasteboard box like the tent design 7,fig4 #abh7 with an opening to fit the strip of muslin1 spanning the space between the two rollers2 the edges of the opening must cover both top and bottom edges of the cambric4 ,cover the pasteboard with white muslin cut into four pieces--one piece for the top1 one for the bottom and one for each side4 ,cut the bottom piece into a strip to fit1 slashed on all edges 7,fig4 #abi1 ,a74 ,paste this on the tent 7,fig4 #abh7 first1 turning the slashed portion over and fastening it on the back of the pasteboard2 then fasten a curtain on each side 7,fig4 #acj7 and paste the top piece of the tent on last2 scallop this along the bottom edge and paste it only along the two slanting slashed top lines2 turn the slashes over on the wrong side of the pasteboard and paste4 ,when dry1 fit the tent over the front of the box and tack it firmly in place4 ,make three little flags of gay paper1 paste on sticks and glue the sticks to the top peak and sides of the tent 7,fig4 #acj72 paste strips of paper over and across the flag handle to the pasteboard to hold the flag more securely on the tent 7,fig4 #aca74 ,your show will then appear to be moving inside of a white circus tent4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #acj4--,the ,wild ,west ,show with side curtains attached4 ,set the box upon a table with the entire panorama wound on the second roller1 leaving only the blank portion of the cloth visible1 and while the audience is seated in front1 begin slowly turning the crank-handle of the first roller2 at the same time telling in clear1 well enunciated words all about your ,wild ,west ,show4 ,do not try to have your remarks sound as though learned from a book2 that would be stiff and unnatural4 ,talk in an every-day way1 exactly as though you were speaking only to your most intimate friend1 and wanted to tell her all about the strange sights and queer people1 and the funny bears who are not afraid of any man woman or child4 ,if you have been to a real ,wild ,west ,show1 that will give you ideas1 or if you have traveled way out ,west and seen the actual ,wild ,west life it will be an inspiration for your show4 ,even to have read about the life with its daring riders1 wild horses1 buffaloes1 hazardous stage coach drives1 ,indians and their war dances will be an immense help in aiding you to enter into the spirit of the show4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aca4--,method of fastening flagpoles on tent4 ,illustration3 ,a ,picnic on the ,roof4 ,,chapter ,,xi ,,roof ,,picnic ,,with ,,brook ,,to ,,cross ,,and ,,flowers ,,to ,,pick ,,invite your friends to an afternoon picnic1 and in the morning prepare the grounds for the frolic4 ,have a lot of growing flowers and growing fruit to give the place an attractive and festive appearance4 ,the fruit must be real1 not make-believe2 it must be ripe and ready to pick2 but the flowers may be of tissue paper1 cheerfully bright and large in size4 ,the aim should be more for general effect than detail in making these outdoor decorations4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #acb4--;,cut the sunflower petals this way4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #acc4--;,fold each petal through centre4 ,sunflowers can be fashioned rapidly by cutting orange-colored tissue paper into strips twenty-five inches long and six inches wide1 pointing the strips into petals three inches deep and two and a half inches wide at the base 7,fig4 #acb71 ten petals to each strip2 then creasing each petal lengthwise through its centre to give stiffness 7,fig4 #acc71 and gathering each strip separately along its straight edge with needle and thread 7,fig4 #acd72 in this way forming the two strips into two pointed circles 7,fig4 #ace74 ,these circles1 together with a brown centre1 make one sunflower4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #acd4--;,gather the strip of petals4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ace4--,one gathered circle of sunflower petals4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #acf4--,sunflower centre4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #acg4--,paper sunflower growing on broom-stick4 ,cut a strip of brown tissue paper nine inches long and two inches wide for the centre1 gather the paper tightly along one lengthwise edge and tie it close up under and against the head of a slender nail 7,fig4 #acf74 ,around the nail under the brown centre1 slide on first one1 then the other1 circle of gathered yellow petals1 taking care to have the petal points of the lower circle lie between and not over those of the top circle4 ,finish by driving the nail which runs through the sunflower1 into one side of a stick or broom-handle1 with the lower end sharpened 7,fig4 #acg74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ach4--,paper hollyhock tied on stick4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aci4--,paper crimped for pinks4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adj4--,paper disk for making poppy4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ada4--,paper poppy4 ,hollyhocks of every color can be made of circles of tissue paper five and a half inches in diameter1 held at the centre1 two circles one inside of the other1 and the centre pushed and squeezed together1 causing the edges to fold and turn until they resemble the real flower 7,fig4 #ach74 ,smaller circles1 crimped by drawing the paper through the partially closed hand 7,fig4 #aci71 can be made into pinks1 and you may have brilliant1 nodding poppies in the same way1 only these are of smooth1 uncrimped circles 7,fig4 #adj71 placed one inside the other1 with a small circle of dark-green paper for the centre1 and all three layers pinched together at the extreme centre 7,fig4 #ada74 ,large peonies are similar in construction to some of the flowers you have made1 so try to work these out yourself4 ,a simple way to make ,roses is to cut tissue paper into strips two and a half inches deep2 cut the square-cornered slashes two inches wide1 then with knife or scissors blade curl the sharp corners of each separate division1 making the slashes into rose petals4 ,curl the corners of the petals along half of the strip inward1 and those along the other half1 outward4 ,fold two or three plaits in the straight bottom edge of each petal2 then begin with the half where the petals curl inward and wind the strip around the end of a slender stick4 ,the first petals form the central group and are curled inward2 the remainder1 curled outward1 form the outward circle of petals 7,fig4 #adb74 ,make a generous supply of blossoms and tie them on bushes4 ,let each bush bear but one kind1 that the flowers may appear natural and as if actually growing4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adb--,paper rose4 ,get a ,variety of ,fruit1 ,peaches1 ,plums1 ,apples or any other sort you may prefer4 ,tie the fruit to those bushes which have no blossoms1 allowing each fruit bush to bear only one kind of fruit4 ,in case there are no bushes1 or if the bushes are too few in number1 use branches or sticks with natural foliage1 or leaves made of green tissue paper2 make the latter of paper in several layers1 that a number may be cut at a time like the pattern 7,fig4 #adc74 ,crimp through the centre by folding lengthwise over a hat-pin and pushing the folded centre together 7,fig4 #add74 ,the method is quick and gives satisfactory leaves 7,fig4 #ade74 ,cut leaves in different sizes as you will need some larger than others4 ,the sticks used as bushes should be of varying heights sharpened at the lower end and driven into the ground4 ,pretend the sticks are fruit trees and flower bushes and plant them where they will appear to best advantage4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adc--,pattern for green leaf4 ,if your yard happens to be ,on the ,roof of the house1 as often occurs in large cities1 there will probably be no earth in which to plant things2 then you must fill flower pots and deep boxes with earth1 sand1 or gravel1 and plant your make-believe trees and shrubs in them2 such a garden will be entirely different from all others4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #add4--;,crimping green leaf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ade4--;,green paper leaf4 ,build a wooden fence over which the girls and boys climb to enter the picnic grounds2 even though the improvised fence may not closely resemble the real article1 it will help to render the feeling of being in the open country more realistic4 ,make the fence by sinking the legs of two strong kitchen chairs partially but firmly into the earth4 ,place the two chairs facing each other and a short distance apart2 then run a large1 strong pole or narrow board for a rail1 across the chair seats1 allowing the rail to extend out beyond the back of the chairs4 ,lash the rail securely to the chairs with the heaviest twine or slender rope1 and place very heavy weights on the seat to keep the chair steady1 and avoid all possibility of the rail slipping or chairs tipping4 ,if possible get either a swing1 a teeter or a jogging board2 all these will afford a lively time for your guests1 as will also a wheelbarrow in which the girls and boys may take turns in riding and pushing or wheeling each other4 ,if you want to make the affair seem just like a regular ,country ,picnic let each guest bring his or her own little basket of lunch4 ,as your guests arrive1 usher them into the house and do not let them even see the yard if it can be avoided2 keep the grounds for a pleasant surprise a little later4 ,form the girls and boys into a single file and lead them marching around the room while they join in singing some lively air4 ,after winding in and out among the chairs and tables1 open the door1 let them look out into the pretty garden1 and1 while still singing1 ,climb ,over the ,fence and march among the flowers and fruit trees2 end the procession by circling around the spot chosen for your dinner table1 where all must deposit their lunch baskets4 ,of course you will not have an actual table1 as the tablecloth must be spread on the ground and the girls and boys sit around it4 ,mark the four corners of the space reserved as a table with sticks about forty-six inches high1 decorated with bright flowers 7,fig4 #adf71 and the sharpened ends planted in the earth1 or in flower pots4 ,spread the ,tablecloth1 bringing each corner to meet a garland pole2 then let the guests take from their baskets the different articles4 ,reserve some space at the centre of the table for fruit1 and let each boy and girl in turn walk about the grounds and select one piece of fruit1 pick it1 bring it to the table1 and lay the chosen piece on the centre of the tablecloth4 ,no person may pick more than one piece of fruit during one turn4 ,each player is privileged to place his fruit in any way he desires1 remembering always that each piece goes to form the centre-piece1 which should always be made as decorative as possible4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adf4--,the decorated pole4 ,crossing the ,brook is a lively game and great fun4 ,get a number of flat stones that will lie steady1 and are large enough to step upon2 arrange them about eighteen or twenty inches apart1 in an irregular line1 over a stretch of ground twenty or more feet across4 ,let the players in turn tip-toe on the stones just as though they were crossing a brook of running water1 each girl and boy being obliged to pay a forfeit for every misstep into the make-believe water4 ,if stones are not to be had1 use blocks of wood1 or1 if need be1 pieces of paper in place of stones4 ,as each player crosses the brook1 the rest of the party must call to her to be careful1 not to fall1 that she is going too fast1 that she is going too slow1 or make similar comments4 ,they can cheer her1 and in many harmless ways try to confuse the player with their calls1 but it is against the rules to touch or even go nearer to her than two yards4 ,after all the girls and boys have taken their turn at crossing the brook1 try ,japanese ,tag ,each player must keep her hand on the spot where she was last tagged1 making the game present a most laughable appearance1 with all the young people dancing about in strange attitudes1 holding a hand on the top of the head1 on the knee1 chest1 back1 or foot1 as it happens4 ,the players are not allowed to remove the hand until tagged in another spot4 ,when tagged in the middle of the back or any spot difficult to reach1 the player may hold a stick in his hand with one end resting on the spot where he was tagged4 ,in starting ,the ,game any person who first shouts1 8,pick her up and stone holder10 may hold both hands in front of her1 each doubled up tight and one clasping a small stone1 immediately some one calls out 8,first knock10 another player cries 8,second knock10 another 8,third knock10 and so on1 according as they are able to get the call in after the preceding cry4 ,the player calling 8,first ,knock0 taps one hand of the girl or boy holding the stone2 if the hand touched contains the stone1 the player knocking is 8it10 and the game begins1 but if the hand is empty1 the player is free and the stone-holder puts her hand back of her while she does or does not change the stone to the other hand2 again stretching her clinched hands forward1 she allows the player calling 8,second knock0 to try her luck by tapping one of the outstretched hands4 ,the trials are continued until a player taps the hand holding the stone and becomes 8it10 then ,the ,others ,scatter and 8it0 endeavors to tag some one1 who in turn becomes 8it10 and so the game goes on4 ,after the players have grown tired of this game1 there are many others which will suggest themselves to the young people1 and it will be found a good plan to alternate the livelier kind with those of a more quiet nature4 ,when the picnic is over give each guest one of the pretty paper flowers to carry home1 and your roof or back-yard picnic will have been an event long to be remembered4 ,illustration3 ,the ,magic ,peep ,show4 ,,chapter ,,xii ,,the ,,magic ,,peep ,,show ,,find or make a simple pasteboard box1 twelve inches long1 ten inches wide and nine inches high1 or you can have it a little smaller if you like1 for your ,magic ,peep ,show4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adg4--;,back end of box opening4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adh4--,slit cut in side of box4 ,cut a large square opening in the end of the box1 leaving a margin one-half inch wide at the top and sides 7,fig4 #adg74 ,make a small round hole in the centre of the front of the box1 only large enough for one eye to look through1 and cut a slit a quarter of an inch wide on each side of the box half an inch from the open end and half an inch from the top2 extend the slit to the bottom of the box 7,fig4 #adh74 ,fig4 #adi shows the box with the front1 sides1 and back cut4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adi4--,peep-hole cut in front of box4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aej4--,peep show ready for slides4 ,if the bent-down edges of the box-lid are wide1 cut them off within half an inch of the top2 then put the lid on the box and it will be ready for the slides 7,fig4 #aej74 ,the ,slides must be stiff and perfectly opaque1 so they will appear black when held up to the light4 ,make them of pieces of pasteboard boxes cut to fit in the side slits and long enough to extend a trifle beyond on each side of the box 7,fig4 #aea74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aea4--,slide in box4 ,draw the different designs given here on separate slides1 and with a sharp penknife cut them out1 leaving holes in the slides exactly the shape of the designs4 ,the holes should appear with clean-cut edges4 ,of course1 the complete designs on the slides must be drawn much larger than in these printed diagrams1 but you can enlarge the drawings by the system of squares4 ,explained in ,chapter ,,xiv4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aeb4--;,cow jumps over the moon4--,front side of slide4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aec4--,wrong side of slide4 ,after the designs are cut out1 paste colored tissue paper over the openings1 and when you look through the little hole you will see wonderfully bright and gay scenes all in transparent colors4 ,an ambitious red cow will be found jumping over a yellow moon1 and instead of being accompanied by the usual dish running away with a spoon1 you will find an energetic wood sprite dressed all in ,lincoln-green4 ,the sprite has tied a rope of wild grape-vine to the cow1 and1 clinging to the rope1 is sailing through the air and over the moon with his queer steed4 ,fig4 #aeb shows 8,the ,cow ,jumped ,over the ,moon0 ,cut out the group and paste a piece of dark-red tissue paper over the entire cow with the exception of the horns4 ,across these paste white tissue paper4 ,cover the moon with one piece of yellow tissue paper and the sprite with green1 all except his face2 have that pink4 ,cut out a thin line for the rope and paste a bit of brown tissue paper over it4 ,fig4 #aec shows the wrong side of the slide and explains how the work is done2 dotted lines designate the openings1 which are covered with tissue paper1 in the manner described4 ,the tissue-paper coverings may be cut in any shape1 but each piece must cover well the opening of the figure or portion of figure intended to be the color of the paper4 ,have the white paper across the horns lap less than one-eighth inch over the red paper of the cow 7,fig4 #aed71 and manage the pink paper of the sprite's face in the same way where it meets the green of his cap and clothing4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aed4--,white paper over horns4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aee4--,the jumping cow4 ,in making the other slides1 follow this method throughout whenever two pieces of tissue paper come in contact on the figure1 and when pasting paper over designs on the remaining slides always use one large piece of paper in preference to several small pieces for covering different parts of the design1 which are the same in color4 ,figs4 #aee1 #aef and #aeg give the cow1 sprite and moon for you to copy or trace4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aef4--,the green sprite4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aeg4--,the moon4 ,life in ,fairy ,waters ,fig4 #aeh shows how dark the slides appear when seen in the peep show and gives an idea of the decided contrast of the light design against the dark background1 only the black and white print cannot give the charm of the clear1 bright1 transparent coloring of the mermaid feeding her many-hued pets as she rides her sea-horse in the fairy waters4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aeh4--,life in fairy waters4 ,the different parts of the composition are ,figs4 #aei1 #afj1 #afa and #afb1 and the food merely little oval-shaped holes covered with white tissue paper4 ,make the mermaid's hair and ribbon brown2 her face1 arms and body to the waist line1 pink2 the remaining portion of the mermaid's figure orange-color4 ,the fish1 scarlet1 purple and white4 ,paste wee round pieces of black paper on the fish for the eyes4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aei4--,mermaid on sea-horse4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afj4--;,fairy fish4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afa4--;,fairy fish4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afb4--;,fairy fish4 ,as soon as you finish the slide1 fit it in the peep show box1 turn your face to the light1 then peep through the hole and find how pretty the bright group looks with all the eager fish gathering around the little mermaid as she calls them to breakfast4 ,next comes ,fig4 #afc1 the ,easter ,chicks ,make ,fig4 #afd light yellow2 ,fig4 #afe1 blue2 ,fig4 #aff1 orange chick1 white shell2 ,fig4 #afg ,a1 green1 ,b1 purple2 ,fig4 #afh1 white chick1 scarlet shell2 the broken shells 7,fig4 #afi7 red1 blue and white4 ,the poor little chicks are glad to escape from the shells even though the shells have been gayly painted4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afc4--;,easter chicks4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afd4--,light yellow chick4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afe4--;,blue shell4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aff4--,orange colored chick--,white shell4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afg4--;,green egg4--,purple egg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afh4--,scarlet shell4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afi4--,pieces of red1 blue and white shell4 ,in the ,three ,blind ,mice 7,fig4 #agj71 which are pursued by the knife belonging to the farmer's wife1 the first mouse can be orange-color2 the second1 white1 and last one brown4 ,the blade of the knife1 scarlet1 and its handle green1 or any other colors which may please your fancy4 ,remember1 this is a magic peep show1 and often the natural color of animals is changed to more brilliant hues in order to secure a more vivid effect4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agj4--,three blind mice4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aga4--,one of the three blind mice4 ,you can make all three mice from one outline 7,fig4 #aga7 and the knife from ,fig4 #agb4 ,set the slide of mice in place in the box1 peep through the hole and 8see how they run60 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agb4--,the butcher knife4 ,the next illustration will undoubtedly prove to be the most amusing of all1 and will bring forth gales of laughter from your little brothers1 sisters or friends4 ,it is the ,dance of the ,dolls 7,fig4 #agc7 ,on ,fig4 #agd paste orange-colored hair1 a scarlet dress and green shoes2 then over all paste one large piece of white tissue paper which will make the doll's face1 neck1 arms and stockings white4 ,the layer of white paper placed over these colors does not affect them in the least4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agc4--;,dancing toys4 ,cut a circular hole for the ball and cover it with brown tissue paper4 ,dress ,fig4 #age in the same manner as the doll just described1 but in other colors4 ,for instance1 make her hair brown1 her dress light purple1 her shoes yellow1 and her face1 arms and stockings white4 ,if you want features on the faces1 use a very soft lead-pencil and draw eyes1 nose and mouth1 though features are not really necessary1 and1 as a matter of fact1 the dolls look very well without4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agd4--;,girl to dance on ball4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #age4--;,dancing doll4 ,let ,jumping ,jack 7,fig4 #agf7 be all in blue1 except his face--make that white4 ,joints on all the toys1 as seen in the illustrations1 are indicated by pasting thread lines of black paper and pin-head dots of black paper over the places where joints should be1 according to the outlines and dots at the elbows of the girl dolls and the shoulders and hips of dancing ,jack4 ,the ,bouquet 7,fig4 #agg7 consists of a red tulip 7,fig4 #agh72 a deep-yellow ox-eye daisy with a brown centre pasted over the yellow--in this case it can be done 7,fig4 #agi7--;a bluebell 7,fig4 #ahj72 and a white daisy with yellow centre 7,fig4 #aha74 ,you will find that this piece1 with all its bright colors1 will be one of the prettiest of your designs4 ,fig4 #ahb is a branch of green leaves4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agf4--;,jumping ,jack4 ,cover each blossom with its respective color1 and then paste one piece of green tissue paper over all the leaves and stems and the effect will be very natural4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agg4--;,floral slide4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agh4--,the red tulip4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #agi4--,ox-eyed daisy4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahj4--;,bluebell4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aha4--,white daisy4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahb4--;,green leaves4 ,the ,little ,sun-bonnet ,girl 7,fig4 #ahc71 playing with a lot of bright-colored balloons1 forms the last slide4 ,make the little girl's dress blue1 her sun-bonnet white and her hands1 feet and ankles pink 7,fig4 #ahd74 ,let the strings of the balloons be of white tissue paper and each balloon of a different color from all the others2 one may be dark red1 the others green1 pink1 purple1 light yellow1 blue1 scarlet1 orange1 brown1 light green1 white and vivid yellow4 ,the slide will be very brilliant4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahc4--,little sun-bonnet girl4 ,invent other designs yourself4 ,think of something you would like to see and try it on a new slide2 when you succeed with one1 you will want to make another and another4 ,the more slides you have for your magic peep show the longer the fun will last1 and you will be able to give no end of pleasure to your little friends4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahd4--,sun-bonnet girl4 ,when exhibiting the peep show set the box on top of a table where the light will shine through the slides and let the party take turns facing the window and peeping through the little hole at the novel1 brilliant scenes beyond4 ,illustration3 ,champion of the ,new ,outdoor ,game ,,chapter ,,xiii ,,plant ,,your ,,garden ,,if ,,you ,,can ,a ,new ,flower ,game ,,bright summer days are the time to be out of doors in the sweet1 fresh air1 with the birds and flowers1 where there is plenty of space to run and have a good time4 ,what a lot of games can be played in the open4 ,there is ,hide-and-,go-,seek1 ,catcher1 ,tag1 ,hop-,scotch and many more4 ,you will be able to add a number to the list4 ,probably1 though1 you have played all of them over and over again1 so we will try and think of something new4 ,we must have a game that will be lively1 interesting1 and at the same time require a certain degree of skill1 and the game must be one where we can enjoy the making of things requisite for the sport2 but the material must not cost more than a few cents4 ,i have it6 ,a game of flowers with roses that will not wilt or fade but last for a long time fresh and bright4 ,we will call it 8,plant ,your ,garden if ,you ,can10 because one cannot always be absolutely sure of planting the flowers1 and that is part of the fun4 ,two ,dozen ,roses will be needed for this garden game1 half a dozen white1 half a dozen red1 half a dozen yellow and half a dozen pink4 ,the flowers are of tissue paper and very pretty4 ,cut squares measuring twelve inches along each of the four sides1 from white1 pink1 yellow and red tissue paper2 the dotted lines on the diagrams indicate where the paper must be folded 7,fig4 #ahe74 ,fold each square across the centre 7,fig4 #ahf74 ,fold again crosswise through the centre1 forming a small square of four layers 7,fig4 #ahg74 ,again fold1 this time diagonally 7,a to ,b1 ,fig4 #ahg71 and you will have a triangle 7,fig4 #ahh74 ,fold once more diagonally 7,fig4 #ahh7 ,a to ,c2 this will give ,fig4 #ahi4 ,cut straight across from ,e to dot ,d 7,fig4 #ahi71 then cut a slash an inch and three-quarters deep in the centre of the edges as shown by the line ,f in ,fig4 #aij4 ,open out the paper 7,fig4 #aia74 ,the slashed edges will form the petals of the rose4 ,curl each corner edge of every petal with a blade of a pair of scissors according to dotted lines on the petal 7,fig4 #aib74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahe4--,square #ab inches each side4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahf4--,square folded once across centre4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahg4--,square folded twice4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahh4--;,four layer square folded diagonally4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahi4--,triangle folded diagonally through centre4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aij4--,second triangle slashed on edges4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aia4--,unfolded triangle with slashed edges for rose petals4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aib4--,section of paper for rose showing one curled petal4 ,begin by holding one corner of one petal between the thumb of your right hand and one blade of the scissors2 gently pull your thumb and the scissors blade outward1 sliding them along each side of the petal1 while you hold the remainder of the paper steady with your left hand4 ,the thumb rubs over the petal2 at the same time the edge of the scissors blade scrapes the under side of the petal1 which causes the paper to curl4 ,fig4 #aib shows one petal with both of the side corners curled4 ,when you have curled around the first half of the circle1 turn the paper over and curl the petals around the other half of the circle in an opposite direction4 ,fig4 #aic gives two petals curled forward and two backward1 representing two petals on each half of the tissue-paper rose4 ,after all the petals are curled lay the centre of the tissue paper out flat and place on it three level teaspoonfuls of flour2 then gather up the edges of the rose and wind a strong thread several times around below the petals and above the flour-bag formed by the centre of the paper 7,fig4 #aid74 ,tie the string1 adjust the petals and the rose will be finished 7,fig4 #aie74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aic4--,two curled petals on each half of rose4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aid4--;,flour in centre of paper and string around below rose petals4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aie4--;,finished rose and flour bag4 ,mark ,out ,two ,flower ,beds where the roses are to be planted4 ,each bed must measure three yards in length and one yard in width4 ,the beds must run parallel to each other and be separated by a space of three yards4 ,each of the two flower beds must then be divided crosswise through the centre1 making four flower beds in all1 two on each side--one for every player4 ,fig4 #aif shows the plan with flower beds divided4 ,the circles denote the station points or places where the players stand1 and the dotted line the direction the roses should take when played by the girl or boy stationed at the position marked 8,barbara40 ,the other players send their roses in like manner over the intervening space to the flower bed diagonally across from their position4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aif4--,plan of flower bed for game4 ,that there may be no mistake regarding each particular enclosure where the different-colored roses should be planted1 ,use ,flags to designate the color of the various flower beds4 ,from inexpensive cotton cloth of a solid red color cut a flag eighteen inches long and twelve inches wide2 hem the raw edges2 then tack one end of the flag on a slender stick one yard or more in length2 sharpen the free end of the stick and push it down into the earth at the outer back corner of the flower bed intended for the red roses4 ,have the flag stand straight and firm4 ,make a white1 a yellow and a pink flag in the same way4 ,erect each in the outer back corner of its own bed1 which will be the bed where roses of corresponding color are to be planted4 ,all the flags must be of equal height4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aig4--,tape in clothespin for pegging to ground4 ,if the game is played at the seashore on a smooth1 hard beach1 mark out the flower beds by running the end of a stick along in the sand4 ,if the game takes place on a level lawn1 use white tape for marking the beds2 peg the tape down to the earth with common wooden clothespins 7,fig4 #aig71 first sliding the tape in the clothespin 7,fig4 #aih74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aih4--,white tape outlining flower bed4 ,the ,four ,rackets for the ,game are ordinary flat palm-leaf fans1 one fan to each player4 ,the game is played by sides1 and calls for four players1 two on each side4 ,the ,game is that each player in turn shall plant as many roses in her own garden as she can4 ,every player has six roses of one color2 the two holding respectively the white and the red roses are on one side1 while the two with the yellow and the pink roses take the opposite side4 ,when all is ready and the players are at their stations1 a signal is given and the game begins4 ,the first player holds one of her roses out with the left hand1 strikes it with the fan-racket held in the right hand1 and endeavors to send the rose flying and land it in her own garden4 ,if she succeeds1 the rose is said to be 8planted10 and scores her one point1 but should the rose go beyond the boundary line of her flower bed1 fall short of it1 or the flour-bag of the rose be broken1 the play is a 8failure0 and scores one point for the opposite side4 ,when a rose falls on the boundary line of its own flower bed1 the play is a 8fault10 and the player may try again with the same flower4 ,after the first player has had her turn1 a player on the opposite side tries her skill1 for the turns must alternate from side to side4 ,the game ends with the playing of the last rose1 and the side scoring the greatest number of points wins the game4 ,all roses when played must remain where they fall until the close of the game1 with the exception of those falling on the boundary line of their own beds4 ,a ,tally ,card will be required for keeping a record of the game4 ,make one of white pasteboard 7,fig4 #aii74 ,the initials can be changed to those taking part in the sport4 ,every point scored must be written under the color and initial or name of the person who scores it4 ,when1 because of the failure of one player1 the opposite side scores a point1 the score must be recorded in the third column belonging to that side on the tally card under the word 8,won40 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aii4--,tally card4 ,to ,determine the ,choice of ,sides1 which shall be first1 and the distribution of colors1 draw straws for the colors and toss for position of sides4 ,to draw straws1 take four straws of varying lengths1 and grasp them in your hand in such a way that the extending ends of the straws seen by the other players are the same in length1 while the uneven ends are closed within the hand2 allow each player to draw a straw4 ,the girl or boy taking the longest straw has first choice of colors2 the player holding the straw next in length has second choice1 and so on4 ,to toss for position of sides means that a player from each side shall toss a small stone toward a stick laid on the ground two yards distant from the spot where the players stand4 ,a twig placed on the spot may mark the point from which the stones are to be tossed4 ,the stones must be tossed in turn1 not at the same time1 and the player whose stone comes nearest to the mark wins the right for his side to the choice of position on the grounds1 also the right of first play4 ,one charm of this game is that the roses when volleyed by the players invariably land on the ground blossom uppermost1 and these twenty-four bright blossoms scattered over the green lawn or sandy beach1 with gay1 colored flags outlining the four corners of the garden court1 and1 best of all1 the group of merry boys and girls1 make a very attractive and pretty scene4 ,the game1 though intended for four players1 may also be played by either two or eight players4 ,when only two take part1 each must play the twelve roses belonging to his side2 in other respects the rules are the same as in a four-handed game4 ,when there are eight players1 four must stand on each side and each player have three roses1 two players necessarily playing the same color1 but not in the same bed1 as the garden on both sides must be divided into four beds that every player may plant roses in a separate flower bed2 otherwise the original rules hold good4 8,plant ,your ,garden if ,you ,can0 may be adapted to the house when chill ,autumn days appear and the weather grows cold and rainy4 ,when played indoors the beds may be marked out by white tape as on the green lawn1 only in this case wooden clothespins would be of no use1 and thumb tacks1 such as are used by artists1 must take their place to fasten the tape down on a bare wooden floor1 and safety-pins when the floor is carpeted4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bjj4--;,home-made ,santa ,claus as ,he will ,appear on ,your ,hearth ,christmas ,morning4 ,,chapter ,,xiv ,,jolly ,,little ,,santa ,,claus ,,with ,,his ,,reindeer ,,and ,,sleigh ,,do you want to see--actually see6--,santa ,claus seated in his sleigh filled with toys1 and driving his famous reindeer8 ,you may do so and have him come to your home4 ,even if there is no chimney and open fireplace for ,santa ,claus to climb through1 the blithe little fellow can be induced to appear1 sleigh and all1 and he will keep his turnout standing perfectly still that all the family may have a good1 long look at him4 ,but you must carefully follow directions and help ,santa ,claus get ready for your ,christmas 7,fig4 #bjj74 ,it would be difficult to say positively how long ,santa ,claus has lived1 or when he first made his appearance1 but we all know just how he looks1 8,his eyes twinkle1 his dimples are merry1 ,his cheeks are like roses1 his nose like a cherry40 ,we know that he is sure to come every ,christmas1 and the girls and boys look forward gladly to his visit4 ,the little ,hollanders name our ,christmas ,saint ,santa ,claus1 the same as we do1 though sometimes we call him ,kris ,kringle4 ,in ,england he is both ,santa ,claus and ,st4 ,nicholas1 in ,switzerland ,samiklaus1 in ,russia he is ,st4 ,nicholas4 ,but no matter by what name he may be called1 he is always the same1 always the jolly little fellow bringing good cheer to every one4 ,santa ,claus takes great delight in driving his tiny reindeer and sleigh full of toys over roofs of houses for the special benefit of the girls and boys he knows1 and that includes all of them4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bja4--,ordinary sled4 ,possibly ,santa ,claus will drive only two reindeer in his sleigh this year4 ,he is willing1 however1 to bring them all if you wish4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bjb4--;,box for top of sled4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bjc4--,santa ,claus sleigh ready for fur robe4 ,an ordinary sled 7,fig4 #bja7 will do for the foundation of ,the ,sleigh1 and a box for the body of the sleigh 7,fig4 #bjb7 to set on the sled 7,fig4 #bjc74 ,find some furs to use as robes to hang over the sides and back of the sleigh2 any kind will do--boas1 collars1 circulars or rugs4 ,fit them in and over the sides of the box4 ,if you have no furs1 try plush or colored blankets4 ,tack gay-colored paper over those portions of the box which are not concealed by the robes1 and lay a small1 light board over the top front of the box1 resting the ends of the board on the sides of the box to make the seat on the sleigh4 ,cover the board with the same paper as that tacked on the box4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bjd4--;,extensions on each hoof4 ,make two ,reindeer of stiff pasteboard like ,fig4 #bjd4 ,now1 do not think you cannot make the deer because you may not be skilled in drawing1 for you can do so easily4 ,take a large sheet of paper and draw on it an oblong forty-eight inches wide and thirty-six inches high2 divide the oblong into squares measuring six inches on each of the four sides1 which will give eight squares in width and six squares in height4 ,with the aid of these squares it will be fun to copy the reindeer4 ,number the side lines of your oblong and letter the top and bottom lines as in ,fig4 #bje4 ,examine the lower corner space of ,fig4 #bje enclosed by the lines ,a-#e1 and you will find the hind hoof and part of the hind leg stretching diagonally across the space4 ,use a soft lead-pencil and begin copying the deer by drawing a slanting fine from the extreme outward lower corner upward about one-third of the distance from the bottom to the top of the space ,a-#e4 ,this short slanting line forms the bottom of the hoof1 the little space1 enclosed between the hoof and the long toe above it reaches very nearly to the centre of the lower part of the square ,a-#e4 ,make yours so4 ,draw the upper edge of the long toe2 then run a slanting line up to the top line of the square space ,a-#e1 and make it touch the top line #e less than one-quarter the distance from the side line ,a to the opposite line of the same square4 ,return to the lower part of the hoof already begun and draw the inside line of the hoof and portion of the leg in the same space1 ,a-#e4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bje4--,reindeer enlarged enclosed in squares4 ,in the space #d-e1 immediately above the space ,a-#e1 you will perceive that only a lower corner is drawn in and that all the four squares above the square #d-e are vacant1 so continue your drawing on the bottom space ,a-,b4 ,the extreme upper corner of this is cut off by a short straight line2 then a shallow scallop extends entirely across the upper part and runs into the third lower space ,b-,c4 ,if you notice closely the space enclosed by the lines #d-e1 ,a-,b1 immediately over the one you have been working on1 you will see that the corner on the line #d-;,a is vacant1 while all three of the other corners are occupied by portions of the hind leg1 and that the empty space extending from the vacant corner #d-;,a forms almost a square with two lines slightly curved and the corner diagonally across from the vacant corner #d-;,a1 on the line #d1 cut off by a short line bent bow-shaped4 ,draw it in the same way over the corresponding space on your paper4 ,look at ,fig4 #bjf1 following the line on the space #d-e1 ,a-,b1 and you will discover that it is the same as in ,fig4 #bje1 only smaller1 and by carefully comparing the two diagrams1 ,fig4 #bje and ,fig4 #bjf1 you will find the lines are formed alike in each1 differing only in size2 thus you will understand how you can make your deer very much larger simply by drawing it on larger squares4 ,continue as you have begun1 taking one square space at a time1 and copy on your large squares the outline of the entire deer as given on the squares of ,fig4 #bjf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bjf4--,reindeer enclosed ready to be enlarged4 ,when the drawing is finished1 go over all the pencil lines which form the deer with black paint or ink1 making the lines heavy and plain1 that they may be seen from across the room4 ,as soon as the paint is absolutely dry erase the pencil-lined squares4 ,to make sure that the deer will stand firmly1 extend downward a slanting line from the top of each hoof and draw another level line out from the bottom of each hoof to meet it1 according to dotted lines in ,fig4 #bjd4 ,cut out your deer and with pins or thumb-tacks fasten him out flat on another large sheet of paper2 then with the soft lead-pencil run a line on the paper around the deer1 which will give you the second deer2 outline the markings on this like those on the first deer2 then cut it out4 ,if you want six deer for ,santa ,claus' sleigh make them as you did the second deer4 ,back each deer with very heavy1 stiff pasteboard and nail a thin strip of wood on each of them4 ,let the wood reach from the middle of the head to the edge of the hind leg 7,fig4 #bjg74 ,fasten the two animals together with three narrow flat sticks tacked across from deer to deer1 one stick at the centre and one on each of the two ends of the slanting strips of wood fastened on each deer4 ,the framework will then rudely resemble an inclined ladder4 ,stand the reindeer in front of ,santa ,claus' sleigh and see how fine they look4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bjg4--,reindeer re-enforced by strip of wood4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bjh4--,santa ,claus' boot4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bji4--,santa ,claus' trousers4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #baj4--,santa ,claus' coat4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #baa4--,santa ,claus' cap4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bab4--;,cap trimmed with ermine4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bac4--,santa ,claus' wig4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bad4--,santa ,claus' whiskers and eyebrows4 ,to represent ,santa ,claus1 make a large rag doll stuffed with straw or excelsior4 ,it is not necessary to spend much time on making the doll1 as it will be used only once1 and will then be almost entirely covered1 showing only the upper portion of the face for which you can mark easily with features4 ,make the boots 7,fig4 #bjh7 like stockings of black muslin2 have them long and loose enough at the ankle to form wrinkles4 ,the trousers 7,fig4 #bji7 should be of scarlet cotton flannel1 fleece side out2 the coat 7,fig4 #baj7 cut of the same material2 the cap 7,fig4 #baa7 of the red cloth cut melon shape1 and sewed together4 ,santa ,claus' costume must be trimmed with bands of fur4 ,ermine will look best1 and it is easiest to make4 ,cut strips of white cotton flannel and mark them with black ink to represent the little black elongated spots on real ermine4 ,trim the tops of the boots 7,fig4 #bjh71 the neck1 sleeves and edge of the coat 7,fig4 #baj7 and edge of the cap 7,fig4 #bab7 with fur4 ,make the wig of raw white cotton1 and fasten it on the doll's head 7,fig4 #bac71 then the beard1 moustache and eyebrows also of raw cotton 7,fig4 #bad71 and glue them on the face4 ,paint ,santa ,claus' face pink1 his cheeks and the end of his nose bright red1 and his eyes blue4 ,when dressing him1 bring the fur-topped boots up over the trousers 7,fig4 #bjj74 ,with tacks and string fasten ,santa ,claus in an upright sitting position on the seat of the sleigh4 ,tie a long1 narrow red ribbon around the neck of each reindeer and pin or tie the ends of these ribbon reins on to the mitten-covered ends of the arms which form his hands4 ,he will then seem to be gayly driving his reindeer4 ,fill the box of the sleigh with ,christmas ,gifts wrapped in bright colored tissue paper4 ,any article liable to break should receive special attention4 ,a cup and saucer 7,fig4 #bae7 is one of the most difficult articles to manage1 and if you can wrap this up1 properly1 the wrapping of all other gifts will be easy4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bae4--;,christmas cup and saucer4 ,take the saucer first1 place it on the centre of a piece of tissue paper 7,fig4 #baf71 fold the paper up around it1 bringing the ends together at the centre 7,fig4 #bag74 ,do the same with the cup 7,fig4 #bah72 then crush down the top of the paper over the saucer and set the paper-covered cup on it 7,fig4 #bai74 ,now place the two on more paper and wrap up both together 7,fig4 #bbj74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #baf4--,saucer in centre of tissue paper4 ,if there are not enough gifts to fill the box of the sleigh1 open newspapers and crush them into the bottom of the box to fill up the extra space2 spread white paper over the top of the newspapers1 and fill in with the prettily wrapped gifts4 ,each parcel should be tied with a ribbon and decorated with holly1 mistletoe or evergreen 7,fig4 #bbj74 ,cover the top of the paper parcels with various toys 7,fig4 #bjj71 and ,santa ,claus with sleigh and reindeer will be ready to surprise the family early ,christmas morning4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bag4--,tissue paper over saucer4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bah4--;,cup in tissue paper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bai4--,wrapped cup and saucer together4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbj4--;,cup and saucer ready for the sleigh4 ,try to have as many home-made gifts in the sleigh as possible4 ,your ,christmas ,cards can be plain white pieces of cardboard decorated with the head of ,santa ,claus made of an almond on which is inked a face2 the long hair and beard of refined white cotton being glued on the nut and a red peaked cap fastened on the top of the head2 this makes a fine ,santa ,claus4 ,the head should be glued on the left side of the card1 and on the blank portion should be inscribed the greeting1 8,merry ,christmas40 ,,chapter ,,xv ,a ,,living ,,christmas ,,tree ,,this ,christmas tree is not planted in a tub or fastened to a stand2 it does not remain just where it is put1 neither is it attached to a mechanical device that makes it whirl and spin around dizzily as they sometimes do in the shops4 ,it is a living ,christmas tree1 a green ,christmas tree all covered with glittering ornaments and bright colored toys1 with little bells at the bottom that tinkle musically as it moves1 and on the topmost point a brilliant star that sends out tinsel rays from every point4 ,then1 a little distance below the star1 a face--a laughing face with shining eyes that reveal the guardian angel of the tree4 ,you can keep the preparation of the living tree absolutely secret and make it a complete surprise1 for it does not have to be set up where all may see in order to be decorated1 and no hint of its existence need be given until the time arrives1 the door is thrown open and the beautiful1 sparkling ,christmas tree glides slowly into the room4 ,how to ,prepare the ,living ,christmas ,tree4 ,choose quite a tall girl for the angel of the tree and from dark green1 undressed cambric cut a long1 plain cloak that will fit smoothly over her shoulders and hang like an inverted cornucopia from neck to feet4 ,make the ,peaked ,hat out of stiff brown paper1 cutting it like ,fig4 #bba1 and pasting it together like ,fig4 #bbb4 ,cover the hat with some of the green cambric1 allowing a cape of the material to fall from hat to shoulders at the back 7,fig4 #bbc74 ,get three or four quires of moss-green tissue paper1 cut it into strips six inches wide and cut each strip into rather coarse fringe1 leaving a solid strip for heading at the top1 two inches wide4 ,beginning at the bottom sew the fringe around the cloak1 allowing it to reach just to the edge of the cloth4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bba4--;,cut the hat after this pattern4 ,above the first row of fringe1 and overlapping it1 sew the second row1 bringing its lower edge within three inches of the bottom edge of the first row4 ,in this way put on row after row of fringe1 always overlapping it1 until the cloak is entirely covered1 then cover the hat and its cape in the same manner4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbb4--,paste it together like this4 ,take a light wooden hoop--one of the kind the children roll on the pavements in 8hoop time10 and1 turning the edge of the cloak up once1 fit the hoop in the fold and hem the edge over it4 ,this will hold the cloak out firmly at the bottom and it should hang smooth and straight from the shoulders with a generous lap where it closes in front4 ,illustration3 ,the ,living ,christmas ,tree4 ,pin the fronts together1 leaving an opening only large enough to slip over the head4 ,now suspend the cloak on a waisthanger in such a way that you can reach it from all sides1 and proceed ,to ,decorate ,around the bottom sew a row of small bells1 and here and there all over the cloak1 sew large dress hooks1 on which to hang the fragile glass ornaments and small presents4 ,pin on the tinsel decorations and strings of popcorn with safety pins and leave the finishing touches until the angel has entered her tree4 ,the tall hat1 tipped by its bright star1 may be completely trimmed and put safely away until needed4 ,all decorations and presents must be light in weight4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbc4--;,cover the hat and leave a cape of the material4 ,on the eventful night let the ,christmas tree angel slip into the tree1 and1 after it is nicely adjusted1 hang around her neck strings of colored glass balls1 and suspend from the hooks the glass ornaments and presents4 ,put the peaked hat on her head1 and the living ,christmas tree will be ready for her triumphant entry4 ,to avoid the danger of accident do not allow the tree in a room where there are unprotected gas lights1 candles or open fire1 and let the cloak be put on the angel in a room adjoining the one in which she is to appear1 for going up or down stairs incased in the cloak is not to be thought of4 ,illustration3 ,one of the ,booths at the ,girls' and ,boys' ,fair with ,articles ,made by ,themselves4 ,,chapter ,,xvi ,,how ,,to ,,get ,,up ,a ,,girls' ,,fair ,,let two or three young friends help you get up the fair4 ,tell them that this is not to be an ordinary fair1 it will be more interesting and unique2 that buyers will find things which cannot be purchased elsewhere for any amount of money1 as all articles for sale and even the decorations will be made by the girls and boys themselves1 and duplicates are not to be found in the stores4 ,inform the young people that a prize will be given to the girl and to the boy whose work is the best4 ,form a ,managing ,committee and talk over arrangements with them4 ,if the fair is to be large1 you will need either one large room or several small ones4 ,when the question of place has been settled to the satisfaction of all1 make out a list of the various girls and boys who will help with the entertainment1 and divide the list into as many parts as there are young people on your managing committee1 including yourself4 ,give each member of the committee his or her portion of the list1 with instructions to see every person whose name is on the paper and find out what each particular one will promise to make for the fair4 ,do not confine the soliciting to young people of your own little circle1 ask for contributions from all the girls and boys your managing committee are able to reach4 ,some may want to make several articles each1 others may wish to do the decorating1 and so on4 ,space must be provided on the list of names for writing down under each name the articles promised 7,fig4 #bbd74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbd4--,list of promised articles4 ,let each contributor understand that every article sent in must have the name1 age1 and address of the sender written in ink and fastened securely on each separate article1 that every girl and boy may receive full credit for what she or he has made 7,fig4 #bbe74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbe4--;,card ready to attach to one article4 ,in addition to the attractive booths you should have the ever popular grab-bag and the 8,four and twenty blackbirds ,baked in a pie0 will be just the thing4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbf4--;,a tub like this for the blackbird grab-bag4 ,take an ordinary wooden tub 7,fig4 #bbf71 cover the outside with gay tissue paper laid on in flat plaits from top to bottom4 ,paste the paper along the inside of the top edge1 carry it over on the outside down under the bottom edge4 ,cover the handles with the same paper1 and fasten ribbon bows on the outside of the handles 7,fig4 #bbg74 ,if the tub is covered with pink tissue paper1 tack pink ribbons on the handles2 if red paper is used fasten green on the handles4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbg4--,the grab-bag tub covered with colored paper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbh4--,package ready for grab-bag4 ,fill the bottom of the tub with large1 lightly crushed pieces of newspaper1 cover these with a double layer of smooth paper1 leaving sufficient space at the top for a layer of sawdust1 bran or sand1 deep enough to cover the different sized articles intended for the grab-bag4 ,each separate article must be wrapped in paper and tied with a string 7,fig4 #bbh74 ,make as many ,blackbirds as you can place conveniently1 without too much crowding1 on top of the pie4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbi4--,pattern of blackbird4 ,use medium stiff cardboard or smooth water color paper1 not too limber1 for the birds4 ,cut them from an enlarged pattern of ,fig4 #bbi1 as the birds must be life-size4 ,paint or ink the bird black on both sides and1 when it is dry1 bend up the tail in a curve4 ,bend up the neck at dotted line of ,fig4 #bbi4 ,pinch together the beak and bend it downward1 bringing the head forward at dotted line of ,fig4 #bbi4 ,turn up the wings according to dotted lines on ,fig4 #bbi1 and curve them over and outward at the top 7,fig4 #bcj74 ,puncture two holes in the back of the bird at the dots ,a and ,b 7,fig4 #bbi74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bcj4--;,blackbird bent in shape4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bca4--;,bend one end of a hairpin into a square hook4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bcb4--,top of hook bent into handle4 ,there must be a handle for lifting the blackbirds2 make it of a hairpin4 ,bend one end of a wire hairpin into a square hook 7,fig4 #bca7 and slide the longer end up through the foremost hole on the underside of the bird2 tie the centre of a string1 nine inches long1 on the horizontal bend of the hooked end of the hairpin2 then push the short end of the hook up through the other hole in the bird1 bringing the string up close against the bird's breast4 ,bend the short end of the hairpin down on the bird's back and flatten it with a hammer4 ,curve the top of the hairpin into a handle 7,fig4 #bcb7 and fasten the hooked end of the hairpin more securely to the breast and back of the bird by pasting a piece of paper over the short portion of the hairpin lying over the back 7,fig4 #bcc74 ,push the paper up tight around the edge of the wire4 ,paste another piece of paper over the short length of hairpin on the bird's breast in the same manner 7,fig4 #bcd74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bcc4--;,hairpin fastened to back of bird4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bcd4--;,hairpin fastened to breast of bird4 ,set the blackbird away until next day1 when it will be perfectly dry1 and you will find the hairpin secure in its place1 standing straight and steady4 ,tie the two ends of the string together into a hard knot2 then bend one half of another wire hairpin into a hook 7,fig4 #bce7 and fasten it securely on the string at the end of the loop2 twist the long handle of the hairpin hook 7,fig4 #bce7 around and over the string1 as shown in ,fig4 #bcf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bce4--,make a hook of another hairpin4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bcf4--;,fasten the hook to the string4 ,instead of making one complete blackbird at a time1 it will be much quicker and easier to make a pattern and cut out all your blackbirds first2 then ink or paint them all1 and continue working on them in this way until all are finished about the same time4 ,it will not take long when once you have the pattern enlarged1 and you can make the pattern the proper size by the system of squares1 large and small1 as explained in ,chapter ,,xiv4 ,when the birds are made and ready for the pie1 hook ,a ,package on ,each ,blackbird 7,fig4 #bcg71 and hide the parcel and string down under the sawdust1 resting the bird on top of the pie2 then when any one wants to purchase a 8grab0 let him lift any bird he chooses from the pie by means of the hairpin in the bird's back4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bcg4--;,blackbird with package ready for pie4 ,the girl or boy in charge must take the parcel from the hook1 give it to the purchaser1 quickly slide another package on the hook and sink it down in the pie in place of the first one4 ,while the purchaser is left entirely free to choose1 she should take care not to disarrange the packages in the pie4 ,illustration3 ,the ,blackbird ,pie4 ,extra packages must be kept in a covered box or basket at one side1 back of the 8,blackbird ,pie40 ,another original idea for your fair will be ,the ,express ,office ,at this table each article must be daintily tied up in white paper and the package labelled with the ,christian name of one of the young people4 ,wrap up a number of articles that your friends may find parcels waiting for them when they call at the express office4 ,the packages should also bear the name of the city from which they are supposed to have been sent4 ,for instance1 if you have a friend named ,mary1 and ,mary happens to be acquainted with some young people in ,cincinnati1 mark the parcel for her with the name ,mary and the place ,cincinnati1 ,ohio4 ,the addition of the name of some city will add greatly to the interest and excitement when the package is received4 ,though a package may be intended for a certain person1 any one with the same ,christian name may purchase the article1 but it cannot be sold to a buyer bearing another ,christian name1 and should some one come for an express package and the express agent be unable to find a parcel labelled with the purchaser's name1 the would-be buyer must leave the office empty-handed4 ,the uncertainty of finding a package at the express office lends a certain charm to this table1 for every one will feel some curiosity to ascertain for a surety whether he or she is included with the fortunate ones whose names appear upon packages4 ,arrange all your articles for the express office in alphabetical order1 those on one side of the table for girls1 and on the other side for boys2 then the parcel bearing the name called for may be quickly handed out to the inquiring purchaser4 ,letters to ,girls and letters to boys are easy to write4 ,ask as many friends as possible to write one or more letters to any companions they choose whom they think will attend the fair4 ,the letters must be signed by fictitious names1 never the writer's own name or the name of any real person2 then those receiving the missives will have the sport of trying to find out which of their friends actually wrote the letters4 ,several days before the fair opens all the mail1 after being addressed and sealed1 should be sent under additional cover to you personally4 ,the ,post-office must be made very attractive1 though it need not occupy much space4 ,a mere corner of the room screened off with dividing drapery of turkey-red cotton cloth or any gay material will answer the purpose4 ,open the drapery at the centre division and make a three-cornered tent-like window in front between the two curtains with the aid of a chair4 ,place a box on the chair reaching to the top of the chair-back1 set the chair between the two curtains1 turn its back toward the people and cover it with the same material used for the curtains2 then pin this drapery to the curtains on each side4 ,the ,decorations must be very simple and inexpensive2 something which can be made easily and quickly1 and when finished they should be bright and effective4 ,have your decorating committee cut a number of flags from different colored tissue paper or low priced muslin varying in length1 anywhere from ten to fifteen inches1 and in width from five to nine inches 7,fig4 #bch and ,fig4 #bci74 ,if the ceiling is very high the flags may be larger4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bch4--,pattern of flag4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bci4--,pattern of pennant4 ,paste the straight dotted edge of each flag over a strong string long enough to extend in a graceful loop from the centre of the ceiling to the side wall 7,fig4 #bdj74 ,place the flags about twelve inches apart on the string and make four strings to reach to the four corners if the room is small1 if large1 a dozen or more flag-strings1 according to the size of the room4 ,have a generous supply4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdj4--;,flags for decoration4 ,tie one end of each of the flag-strings close to the ceiling on the chandelier or lamp hook4 ,wind an extra string tight around and over the string-knots on the chandelier to hold the strings in place and keep them from slipping down4 ,tie the free ends of the flag-strings to picture-hooks and fasten the hooks on the picture-moulding4 ,in this way you can obtain good results without the slightest injury to the walls4 ,should there be no picture-moulding1 fasten the strings to large1 strong tacks or small wire nails driven in on the top ledge of the window and door frames where they will do no harm4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bda4--;,fringe cut for tassel4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdb4--,winding top of fringe into tassel head4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdc4--,tassel ready for decoration4 ,fasten extra strings from top of window and door frames1 and draw them taut along the walls1 then tie the intervening flag-strings on these and the effect will be much the same as with picture-moulding1 almost like a tent of small flags4 ,hang a long1 gay tassel on the wall at the end of each flag-string4 ,make the tassels of bright tissue paper4 ,take the once folded sheets of the variously-colored tissue paper as they come from the store1 and cut them into long fringe1 lengthwise of the folded sheets 7,fig4 #bda71 making each separate strand of fringe not less than one inch wide4 ,pinch the twenty-inch-length fringe together at the top1 wind and tie it with a string 7,fig4 #bdb71 allowing one end of the string to extend out at the top2 wind farther down and tie again to form the head of the tassel four and one-half inches from the extreme top 7,fig4 #bdc74 ,these large tassels tied to picture-hooks by eight or twelve inch lengths of string wound with gay paper and attached to the picture-moulding at the end of each line of flags make a fine finish and form a decoration for the walls4 ,let your tables be of different sizes1 and cover them with white cotton sheets folded in such a way that the sheet will fall within one inch of the floor at the front and at the two sides4 ,decorate the white covering in various ways1 making the tables gay with inexpensive colored cambric1 or crimped tissue paper4 ,the plain tissue paper will not be strong enough to use for this purpose4 ,the first covering of white gives value to the colors1 causing them to appear even more brilliant than they are in reality1 and it also renders it possible to use much less colored material than would otherwise be required1 in this way lessening the outlay for decorations4 ,but in order not to tear the muslin sheets while fastening on the decorations1 paste must be used in place of tacks or pins4 ,make the colored material into wide strips cut into points or fanciful designs and paste the strips at their upper edges along the top of front and sides of the white covered tables1 allowing the lower edge to hang entirely free1 except where pendant portions are inclined to stand out2 these may be fastened in place with a little paste4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdd4--,red paper folded for cutting design4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bde4--,unfolded red paper ready for decorating fair booth4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdf4--;,folded paper for green decoration4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdg4--;,green decoration cut and opened4 ,cut some of the strips about fourteen inches wide2 others wider1 a few narrower2 and make each strip long enough to reach around the front and two sides of one table4 ,lay a brilliant red strip eighteen inches wide down on a flat surface and fold crosswise through the centre2 fold again and again until the piece is of the desired width1 about two and one-half inches2 then cut according to dotted lines 7,fig4 #bdd74 ,open out and cut off every other lower ornament and you will have ,fig4 #bde4 ,attached to a table this decoration gives the effect seen in the first illustration4 ,fold and cut a green strip fourteen inches wide like ,fig4 #bdf4 ,open and it will be ,fig4 #bdg4 ,another design of orange color is given in ,fig4 #bdh and ,fig4 #bdi4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdh4--,orange design ready to cut4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdi4--,orange design open4 ,you can devise many other decorative designs fully as attractive as these1 and it is well to experiment with pieces of old newspaper1 cutting them into various designs until you find just what you think will make good patterns4 ,in this way your originality is brought out and in a measure your artistic sense developed4 ,select a cheery1 happy girl for ,postmaster --one who cannot help giving a bright smile with every letter1 and try to induce her to make some pleasant appropriate remark when handing out the mail1 as this will add much to the enjoyment of the occasion4 ,more important though than anything else will be the large1 the small1 the useful1 the beautiful and the odd articles for sale made by the girls and boys4 ,there should be a lot of original valentines1 ,may baskets1 ,easter-egg novelties1 paper fireworks1 ,hallowe'en games1 funny and instructive toys1 tiny log cabins1 scenes from ,japan1 ,russia1 the ,philippines1 and many other interesting things1 not forgetting the ,punch and ,judy shows1 the circus1 the seven wonders of the world1 and the home-made rugs1 candles and candlesticks4 ,the post-office entails little or no extra expense and money taken in for letters will be almost clear gain4 ,expense incurred by the entire fair need be but slight and all the proceeds might be devoted to some charitable purpose4 ,one of the best of objects for the money obtained by your fair is the 8,fresh ,air ,fund10 which helps the poor little suffering city children to a breath of pure fresh air and saves the lives of many frail girls and boys4 ,think how glad you can make some of these young people2 then1 of all the enjoyment your own companions will have in getting up the fair1 and how proud and happy your parents and teachers will feel when they see the result of your work4 ,if a 8,fresh ,air ,fund0 does not exist in your locality there are other methods of using your profits to good ends4 ,really there is no telling how much good your fair may accomplish in many ways4 ,,chapter ,,xvii ,,camping ,,out ,,in ,,your ,,back ,,yard ,,who is ready to go out on a camping expedition to ,make-,believe ,land8 ,it is a wild land1 full of wild creatures if you choose to believe in them4 ,cats you will probably meet on the trail1 and they are wild ones if you will4 ,wolves1 too1 may prowl around1 for what else are ,tramp and ,nipper1 your own dearly loved dogs1 but descendants of the wild wolf4 ,there will be plenty of sailing1 fishing and outdoor sports4 ,guides can be secured at headquarters and you will not have to travel far1 for the camping ground is your own back yard4 ,you must have your ,camping ,outfit1 as all campers do1 and it is the proper thing to think1 plan and talk much about this same outfit4 ,as the trip is to be made overland and you will have no camping wagon1 use bags for carrying the various articles needed in camp4 ,old flour bags are just the thing4 ,into these you can put all your things except perhaps the camp kettle4 ,the camping party should be supplied with a tent1 a hatchet1 a camp kettle1 coffee pot1 tin plates and cups1 old knives1 fork and spoons1 a tin pail and dipper and a tin wash-basin2 all these1 as well as provisions must be taken on the journey in true campers' fashion1 for there should be no running back from ,make-,believe ,land to get forgotten articles4 ,shawls and blankets to spread on the ground if it seem too damp will be a welcome addition to the outfit1 and the party should be provided with sharp pocket knives for whittling stakes and for other needs4 ,illustration3 ,camping in ,make-believe ,land4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bej4--,tie the corners of the sheet with tape4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bea4--,the sheet is ready to put up for the tent4 ,select the site of your camp and pitch your tent with reference to the clothes line1 for the line is to support the tent and act as a ridge pole4 ,make the ,tent of two muslin sheets sewed together along two of the edges1 one edge on each sheet1 which run from the wide hem at the head to the narrow hem at the foot of the sheet4 ,tie a tape on each of the four corners 7,fig4 #bej7 and tie a tape at the centre of the ends of the tent sheet-covering4 ,this will give three tapes on each side of the tent--six tapes in all 7,fig4 #bea74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #beb4--,this is the wooden tent peg4 ,make six wooden pegs resembling ,fig4 #beb4 ,you can have them either round1 square1 three-cornered or irregular2 the only essentials are that the pegs be strong and large enough to hold the tent securely4 ,have a notch cut near the top for the tape and a point whittled at the bottom that the peg may be easily driven into the ground4 ,look about carefully and decide exactly where you want the tent placed on the clothesline2 then hang the crosswise centre of the covering evenly over the line4 ,hold the top ridge centre in place with clothespins while you stretch one side out away from the clothesline1 and peg it to the ground by tying the tapes around the pegs and pushing the pegs slantingly into the ground1 with the peg head running from and the point directed toward the tent 7,fig4 #bec74 ,remove the clothespins and peg down the other side of the tent in the same way4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bec4--,this is the way to peg your tent to the ground4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bed4--,the sticks are laid across the table legs ready for the board4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bee4--,your little camp-table4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bef4--,nail the cleats inside the box for the shelves4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #beg4--,this is your camp-cupboard made of a box4 ,find the best place near the tent for ,a ,table1 and make the table in true woodsman fashion4 ,take four strong forked sticks1 sharpened on the lower end1 and drive two of them into the ground in a straight line about one foot or more apart1 and the remaining two in a line with1 and two feet from the first sticks 7,fig4 #bed74 ,have the sticks stand above the ground about two feet1 or the height you want the table1 and keep the crotch1 or angle where the two forks separate1 on all the sticks at an equal height from the ground4 ,lay a stick across each pair of forked sticks4 ,get a piece of board1 rest one end on each of the supports you have just made1 and you will have a rustic table1 strong and suitable for any camp 7,fig4 #bee74 ,use wooden boxes for seats4 ,select one box for your ,safe or ,cupboard in which to keep supplies and camping utensils4 ,fit one or two shelves1 made from a side of another wooden box1 in the cupboard4 ,do this by first nailing strips of wood1 for cleats1 on the inside of each side of the cupboard at equal distances from the bottom 7,fig4 #bef74 ,slide in the shelves1 resting each on two pieces of wood 7,fig4 #beg74 ,set a lot of lids of tin cans in the cupboard to serve as camping plates1 also a few tin spoons1 an old table knife1 a kitchen fork or two1 three tin cups1 and a smooth1 clean1 folded piece of white paper for a tablecloth4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #beh4--,sink the pail part way into the ground4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bei4--;,bank the earth up around the pail for the spring4 ,now for ,the ,spring ,ask your mother to let you have a large1 clean pail suitable for drinking water4 ,carry the pail to the opposite side of the yard from your tent4 ,there dig a hole large enough to sink the pail down about half its height 7,fig4 #beh74 ,bank the loose earth up all around the pail 7,fig4 #bei71 and cover the earth with leaves1 grass1 moss and vines2 hiding the pail completely with the greenery2 then fill the pail with fresh1 cool water1 and lo3 there is your mountain spring 7,fig4 #bfj74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfj4--,like a country spring in your back yard4 ,a clean tomato can1 free from rust1 with the top removed1 will make ,a ,fine ,pail for carrying water4 ,you can make a hole in the tin1 near the top on each side of the can1 by hammering a good-sized wire nail through1 and then form a handle to the pail by threading one end of a piece of twine through each hole and tying a large knot on the outside to prevent the string from sliding out of place 7,fig4 #bfa74 ,when you need water in the camp1 always go to the spring for it1 and carry the water in the little tin pail4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfa4--,the camp-pail is made of a tin can4 ,it is not necessary to have a real ,camp ,fire1 but you can pretend there is one4 ,drive two forked sticks in the ground a short distance from each other2 lay a stout stick across from one to the other forked stick2 then pile up some dry twigs midway between the stakes4 ,tie a strong cord on the centre of the cross stick1 leaving one end long enough to loop down and under the handle of a pail or kettle and reach up and tie to the short end of the cord4 ,you can put various things into the camp kettle and pretend to cook them over the make-believe fire 7,fig4 #bfb74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfb4--,you can pretend to cook over the make-believe fire4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfc4--;,a low wooden packing-box for the boat4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfd4--,the box with its pasteboard ends4 ,of course you must have a boat1 for there are lakes in ,make-,believe ,land and plenty of fish to be caught1 so ,make a ,boat for your camp4 ,select a rather long1 narrow wooden packing-box 7,fig4 #bfc71 and on each end tack an extra pointed pasteboard end 7,fig4 #bfd74 ,to make the pasteboard end you will have to measure the height of the packing-box1 and cut from an old pasteboard box a strip of pasteboard wide enough to fit the height of the wooden box and long enough to allow for tacking on the end of the wooden box and extending far enough out beyond the box to form half1 or one side1 of the pointed end with two inches over4 ,score the extra two inches and bend 7,fig4 #bfe72 the bend ,a forms the extreme end when the pasteboard point is bent in shape4 ,cut another strip of pasteboard two inches shorter than the first strip1 and sew it on the two-inch bent flap of the first strip 7,fig4 #bff74 ,score the two ends of the long strip and be careful to score them on the side that will cause the pasteboard to bend outward in the right direction1 then bend 7,fig4 #bfg74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfe4--,the pasteboard strip with end bent4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bff4--,the second pasteboard strip is sewed on first strip4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfg4--,the pasteboard is now ready to be tacked on to box making pointed end4 ,tack the pasteboard strip on the end of the wooden box and make another pasteboard point for the other end of the box 7,fig4 #bfd74 ,cover both pasteboard ends with stout paper by gumming the paper over and down on the outside top edge of the pasteboard points4 ,make the boat seats of short boards laid across from side to side of the wooden box and nailed in place 7,fig4 #bfh74 ,use broom-sticks for oars1 and make believe the boat is off on the water1 a long distance from the tent4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfh4--,with the seats in place it is a boat4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfi4--,the row-boat is turned into a sail-boat4 ,if you want to play that you are ,out ,fishing in the boat1 take any kind of long sticks or walking canes for fishing poles1 with common string for line and a bit of paper tied to the end of the string for bait4 ,when you want to turn the row-boat into a sail-boat1 you can tack a three-cornered piece of white cloth on the end of a pole and rig up a sail 7,fig4 #bfi74 ,cut a hole in the forward centre of the bottom of the boat immediately next to the covered bow1 run the pole through the hole down into the earth until it is well planted in the ground and stands straight and steady2 then tie a string to the free end of the sail and fasten the string to the boat to keep the sail stretched out1 just as if there were truly a good stiff breeze and you were sailing along at a rapid rate with the spray dashing upon1 and at times over1 the sides of the boat4 ,if your back yard is large and you need more tents for friends1 erect several1 one on each stretch of the clothesline4 ,should the line be fastened to four posts1 a tent can be put up on each of the four turns of the clothesline1 making a little settlement of tents4 ,illustration3 ,playing ,tether-,ball with the ,home-,made ,game4 ,,chapter ,,xviii ,,outdoor ,,fun ,,with ,,home-,,made ,,tether-,,ball ,,with an outlay of a few cents you can make this entire tether-ball game and make it well4 ,the common hollow rubber ball should be two and a half inches in diameter--about the size of a tennis ball4 ,you will not need any money for the two rackets1 which are cut from old boxes or shingles4 ,the ,pole may be a stationary clothesline post1 a small1 unused flagstaff1 an extra long clothesline pole1 a long curtain pole1 or a very long1 straight bean pole1 and for smaller children the handle of an old long-handled broom will answer4 ,use strong1 soft twine to make ,the ,cover for ,your ,ball ,cut twelve pieces1 each twenty-four inches in length2 place all the lengths straight and evenly together2 then tie a string around the entire bunch1 an inch and one-half from the centre 7,fig4 #bgj74 ,in this figure and several other diagrams the single strands of twine are not drawn in detail1 because1 should every separate thread be outlined1 much confusion might ensue4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgj4--,tie all the strands of the string together4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bga4--,tying the strings for the tether-ball covering4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgb4--,the braid for ball loop4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgc4--,untie and remove the string4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgd4--;,braid into one braid4 ,after tying the lengths of twine together1 separate the longest part into three divisions of four strands each 7,fig4 #bga74 ,braid these strands together in one braid1 beginning close to the string tied around the bunch2 continue braiding firmly and tightly for the distance of two and a half or three inches 7,fig4 #bgb71 then untie and remove the string from around the bunch 7,fig4 #bgc72 bring the two ends of the braid together1 and joining all the loose strands into three bunches of eight strands each1 braid all into one braid 7,fig4 #bgd74 ,when this larger braid is one inch long1 with another string tie the loose ends of it firmly together close up to the braid4 ,you will then have a braided ring on a braided stem4 ,wind the stem with an extra string2 then tie a hard knot and cut away the ends of the string 7,fig4 #bge74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bge4--,the strands are ready for netting the ball cover4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgf4--;,first step in tying string covering for the ball4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgg4--,tie the knots in this way4 ,divide the loose strands into bunches of three strands each1 making eight bunches 7,fig4 #bge74 ,pin the stem down to something stationary and firm2 then take three strands1 or one bunch1 in each hand1 and pass the first finger of your left hand between the two bunches2 hold it there while you carry the bunch in your right hand across the bunch in your left hand2 this forms a loop4 ,do not take your finger out of the loop until the entire double knot is made4 ,bring the bunch from your right hand under and through the loop formed by the crossing of the bunches2 this will give ,fig4 #bgf4 ,pull the strings until the tie is a short distance from the stem2 then tie the same strands again to form a firm knot4 ,fig4 #bgg shows the method4 ,tie together two more bunches1 and two more1 until all the bunches have been used and you have made four knots 7,fig4 #bgh74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgh4--;,first row of knots in ball cover4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgi4--,the uncovered tether-ball4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhj4--,the second row of knots in ball covering4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bha4--;,covering of tether-ball almost complete4 ,fit the network over your ball 7,fig4 #bgi71 allowing the covering to remain on the ball while you tie the bunches of strands into another row of four knots below the first row4 ,look at ,fig4 #bgh4 ,the bunches are all numbered1 showing how they are to be united4 ,corresponding numbers must be tied together3 #a with #a1 #b with #b1 and so on4 ,the result will be like ,fig4 #bhj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhb4--,tying final knot on the bottom of the ball4 ,keep the ball in the net and make another lower row of knots1 which will give you ,fig4 #bha4 ,now turn the ball over and tie two opposite bunches of strands up tight and firm against the bottom of the ball 7,fig4 #bhb ,a74 ,bring together the remaining two bunches1 ,b and ,c1 and tie them over the knot ,a4 ,again tie in a hard1 firm knot2 then bind all the strands together by winding with a separate piece of string4 ,fasten securely4 ,it is necessary for the ball to be covered1 so that it may have a strong yet harmless ring at the top1 for no metal may be used on the ball4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhd4--,the tether-ball court4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhe4--;,cut a notch near the top of the pole4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhf4--,the tether pole is erected and ready for the game4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhc4--,mark out the tether-ball court in this way4 ,before erecting the pole you must mark out ,a ,court on the ,grounds4 ,drive a stick in the earth where you want your pole to stand4 ,on this stick tie a piece of string close to the ground2 then sharpen the end of another short stick and tie the other end of the string on the second stick near its top2 let the string measure two and one-half feet from one stick to the other stick4 ,pressing the point of the second stick slantingly against the earth1 run it around and around in a circle until a circular line is distinctly marked 7,fig4 #bhc71 then you can pull out the stake and dig a hole where it stood at the centre1 and plant your pole4 ,mark a straight line across the centre of the circle and extend this straight line beyond the edge of the circle six feet on each side4 ,on opposite sides of each of the straight lines running out from the circle mark a cross about two and one-half feet from the circle and two and one-half feet from the line1 ,f and ,f 7,fig4 #bhd74 ,the cross designates the spot where the player on either side must stand to serve the ball when the game begins4 ,the crosses are called service crosses4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhg4--,this is the first step in tying the ball to the pole-string4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhh4--,second step in tying ball to pole-string4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhi4--,the tether ready to play4 ,the length of the tether pole you are to use depends upon your height and that of your young friends4 ,make the pole long enough to allow being planted sufficiently deep to be firm and steady and extend up above the surface of the ground1 vertically1 to the height of about three feet above your head4 ,cut a notch near the top of the pole before erecting it 7,fig4 #bhe74 ,tie one end of a long string fast around the notch4 ,the string must be well waxed1 twisted and doubled and waxed again1 and it must reach within two feet of the ground4 ,tie the ball on the loose end of the string and erect your pole so firmly that it will not even tremble when you bat the attached ball ever so vigorously 7,fig4 #bhf74 ,fig4 #bhg gives the first step in tying the ball on the pole string4 ,d is the end attached to the pole1 ,e is the loose end4 ,pass ,e under ,d1 then around back again over ,d and through the loop 7,fig4 #bhh72 repeat this stitch over and over1 drawing the string very tight each time4 ,finish by tying the ,e end of the string on the ,d end in several knots4 ,examine ,fig4 #bhi4 ,it will give you the process of tying1 but the knots are drawn loose that you may see how each is made4 ,paint a red ring around the pole just above the height of your head4 ,make ,a ,pattern for the ,rackets of a piece of paper twelve inches long and five and one-half inches wide2 fold the paper lengthwise through the centre and cut according to curved line in ,fig4 #bij4 ,open the pattern and lay it over a shingle1 the handle at the thickest part2 draw a pencil line around it and carefully whittle out the racket4 ,smooth down the rough edges with sandpaper 7,fig4 #bia74 ,make a second racket in the same way4 ,now let us thoroughly understand the meaning of the divisions of the court before attempting the game4 ,inside the ground circle no one shall go1 for it is not allowable at any time during the game to step on1 or within1 or reach over the circle line on the ground surrounding the tether pole4 ,the straight line is used to divide the ground into two courts1 one on each side of the line1 making a separate court for each player4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bij4--,paper pattern for the racket4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bia4--,the finished racket looks like this4 ,the cross in each court is intended to mark the spot where a player must stand to 8serve0 or strike the ball when the game first begins4 ,the player must stand on the cross of the chosen court while serving2 at other times during the game she may go any place within her court1 but she must stay in her own court on her own side of the line4 ,the ,object of the ,game is for each player to strike the ball on the end of the string in such a way as to cause the string with ball attached to wind completely around the pole above the red band4 ,the game is intended for two players1 and it begins by each one1 in turn1 tossing a small stone or piece of wood as near as possible to the tether pole while standing at a spot1 previously marked1 ten feet from the pole4 ,the girl landing a stone nearest the pole has first turn and choice of courts2 the other player must go in the court on the opposite side and beyond the circle4 ,the server holds the ball in her hand and1 striking it with her racket1 endeavors to send the ball winding around the pole1 but as the ball approaches the other player or opponent1 the opponent tries to stop the progress of the ball with her racket and send the ball back to wind around the pole in the opposite direction4 ,as the ball returns toward the first player1 a second time she endeavors to strike it and wind the string her way around the pole4 ,in this manner the ball is kept going back and forth between the two players until one player succeeds in winding the entire string and ball above the red band2 this wins the game1 and the girl winning the greatest number of games out of eleven wins the set4 ,while playing the game the ball may be struck but once at a time1 no player being allowed to have two or more trials during one turn4 ,the turns shall alternate between the two players4 ,if a player fails to send the ball into her opponent's court on its way around the pole1 the failure is called a fault1 and the player making the fault loses her turn4 ,the lost turn goes to the opponent1 who then stands on the cross in her own court and has a free strike at the ball4 ,if a player strikes the ball more than once during one turn1 she is guilty of a fault1 and loses her next turn4 ,if a player over-steps the boundary of her own court in any way1 she is guilty of a fault and loses a turn4 ,when the string winds around the handle of the racket1 or winds about the tether pole below the red band1 the player so winding the string commits a fault and loses a turn4 ,all faults give the opponent a free hit from the cross on her own court4 ,when grown-up girls and boys play tether-ball1 the pole must stand nine feet high when erected4 ,the red band on the pole must be six feet above the ground4 ,the circle on the ground around the pole must be three feet in diameter4 ,the straight line dividing the courts must extend ten feet outward from each side of the pole1 making the entire length twenty feet4 ,the ball must hang1 when at rest1 two and one-half feet from the ground4 ,this game may be played by sides1 of equal numbers4 ,,part ,,ii ,,miniature ,,seven ,,wonders ,,of ,,the ,,world ,,chapter ,,xix ,,the ,,pyramids ,,of ,,egypt ,,if you could have seen a certain little boy who lived so long ago that it would make you dizzy to try to think back to the time when he ran about playing and learning many things1 you would have thought him a queer looking little chap4 ,he was not clothed like boys of our day1 and his skin was almost a copper color1 resembling somewhat that of the ,american ,indian4 ,his name was a very odd one1 spelled ,c-h-e-o-p-s and pronounced ,ke-ops--possibly his comrades nicknamed him 8,key0 when they played together on the sand4 ,he had another name1 ,khufu1 and it is hard to tell which the boy liked better4 ,cheops's ,home was in ,egypt1 where there are more crocodiles than you can count1 and doubtless the little brown fellow1 at a safe distance1 enjoyed watching the sleepy creatures while he vaguely wondered why crocodiles always crawled up on the banks to lie so long and still in the sun4 ,there were many other strange animals and queer ,egyptian things--unlike any you have ever seen--that interested and delighted the child4 ,when ,khufu grew to be a man he was ,a ,great ,monarch1 an ,egyptian ,king1 and instead of watching crocodiles busied himself watching and ruling a nation4 ,the ,king did not bother greatly about the house he lived in1 but spent much energy and many years in building an enormous pyramid1 the largest ever erected at any time4 ,when you grow older you may possibly take a trip to ,egypt and see this ,wonderful ,structure1 built #ijj ,b4,c4 ,it is made of huge stones1 most of them thirty feet long1 five feet high and four or five feet wide4 ,how do you suppose men ever managed to lift such monstrous blocks to build the pyramid8 ,well1 they were obliged to labor very hard1 for it took two hundred layers of stones for the pile1 and all the work was done with the utmost care and precision4 ,you must also use care and precision in building your ,egyptian pyramids4 ,have them exact1 and in place of the heavy stone blocks use ,coarse ,sandpaper ,if possible1 get it of a tawny yellow hue1 that the miniature pyramids may be the same color as the originals1 now that the outside casings of the latter are off4 ,king ,cheops had an army of one hundred thousand men laboring constantly during twenty long years to pile up his stones4 ,you can make your ,khufu ,pyramid in twenty minutes and need employ only ten fingers instead of one hundred thousand men4 ,illustration3 ,the ,great ,egyptian ,pyramid ,cheops1 ,made of ,sandpaper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bib4--;,cut one side of the pyramid of sandpaper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bic4--;,gum narrow strips of muslin along the right side edge4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bid4--;,join all the parts together4 ,cut one side of ,the ,pyramid from sandpaper 7,fig4 #bib72 if the paper is not stiff enough1 paste it on a piece of cardboard2 an old box-lid will do4 ,make two more sides like the first and gum narrow strips of muslin along the right side edge of each 7,fig4 #bic74 ,the dotted line shows the edge of the pasteboard underneath the cloth4 ,join all the parts together by means of these strips 7,fig4 #bid74 ,when making the fourth side1 extend it out into the projection 7,t1 ,fig4 #bid7 and cut a corresponding slit in the first side 7,u1 ,fig4 #bid74 ,place the pyramid down flat on a level surface under a weight to dry4 ,when ready remove it and cut off the ends of the strips 7,s1 ,v1 ,o1 ,fig4 #bid72 then bend the toy into shape by bringing the first and fourth sections together and sliding ,t into ,u 7,fig4 #bid74 ,the pyramid must stand erect and firm as in ,fig4 #bie4 ,remember that the four sides of the real pyramid are built upon ,a ,perfect ,square1 and the base lines of yours should also form a true square4 ,if you can get some tough paper which will fold together in a flat crease without breaking1 you may make the pyramid of one piece instead of four1 by cutting it the shape of ,fig4 #bif and bending it evenly along the dotted lines to form the four slanting sides4 ,the loose ends must be fastened together by means of extension and slit4 ,if you have no regular sandpaper make some4 ,give the paper a thin wash of glue1 and before it dries sprinkle it evenly with sand4 ,an old kitchen pepper-box filled with sand will make a fine sprinkler4 ,if you cannot get the pepper-box1 take a small empty baking-powder can and punch tiny holes in the cover by hammering a fine wire nail through the tin in many places2 use it as a sprinkler4 ,you must prepare the paper and have it evenly sanded before cutting out the design4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bif4--,you may make the pyramid in one piece4 ,in ,egypt there are three famous structures in addition to the ,sphinx3 the great pyramid1 the middle-sized pyramid and the little pyramid--like the big bear1 the middle-sized bear and the little wee bear in the story book4 ,each ,pile of ,stones was set up by a different king1 and each one is named for the monarch who built it4 ,the largest is called for ,cheops2 the second is named ,chephren 7pronounced ,kefren7 and the smallest has the longest name ,mycerinus 7pronounced ,me-ker-in-us74 ,make the colossal ,cheops as large as the dimensions of your paper will admit4 ,the original is like a mountain1 measuring #gdf feet each side of the square foundation and reaching up #dej feet and nine inches in height4 ,king ,chephren did not build his stones quite as high2 he was satisfied with a base1 each side of which is #fij feet and nine inches and a height of #ddg feet and six inches4 ,the last1 ,king ,mycerinus1 must have grown tired of playing with the stone blocks1 for his pyramid is merely a hill #bjc feet high1 with each side of the foundation #ced feet and six inches1 not nearly so tall as ,cheops's monument4 ,build your little pyramid about half as high as the second one4 ,after making the ,egyptian structures1 naturally you might think that they could be grouped as you pleased to place them1 but these pyramids are ,different from ,ordinary ,toys and must always be fixed in certain positions4 ,stand them in a diagonal row1 each one facing exactly ,e4 ,w4 ,n4 ,s4 ,fig4 #big gives their correct positions4 ,the first must stand to the northeast of the second1 the second to the northeast of the third1 and the ,sphinx east of the second monument4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #big4--,stand the pyramids in a diagonal row4 ,there1 they are finished4 ,now that we have built the pyramids1 let us ,carve the ,wonderful ,sphinx with its body like a crouching lion and its head1 like a man's1 modelled from that of an ancient ,egyptian4 ,the original is an enormous queer creature hewn from stone and made before the pyramids were built2 consequently1 it is very old4 ,it was on the plains more than #d1jjj years before the birth of ,christ4 ,little wonder that it now appears worn and chipped and that1 like your small sister's doll its nose is broken off4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bih4--;,cut the ,sphinx out like this4 ,begin carving the ,sphinx by cutting a larger size from ,fig4 #bih of stiff sandpaper4 ,mark the head with ink as nearly as possible like ,fig4 #bii4 ,should you fail in this1 find a print of the head in some old paper or magazine1 cut it out and paste it on ,fig4 #bih4 ,bend the design across the dotted line1 and the ,sphinx will be ready to crouch close down on your sandy plain4 ,there is no need of carving the body1 because that of the real ,sphinx is entirely covered with sand1 with only the head above ground1 and we want ours to look like the original4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bii4--,the head of the ,sphinx should look like this4 ,in parts of ,egypt the wind sweeps the sand in great masses against and over all objects1 so the people had their ,buildings ,made with ,slanting ,sides that the sand might slip off when it struck them4 ,try pouring some sand on your pyramids and you will understand the reason of the peculiar style of architecture4 ,the land in ,egypt on which the ,sphinx and pyramids stand is the plain of ,gizeh2 consequently1 you must give that name to the place where you set up your structures4 ,the ,tall ,date ,palm is a beautiful tree4 ,the leaves are glossy and spread out in a graceful crown2 its stem is marked with old leaf scars1 giving it a very different appearance from the bark of our native trees4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjj4--;,cut this from green paper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cja4--,the tall date palm4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjb4--;,bend the stem where it joins the base4 ,cut ,fig4 #cjj from light-weight green paper1 and mark it as ,fig4 #cja2 then cut ,fig4 #cjb of very stiff pasteboard4 ,paste ,fig4 #cjj on the top over the letter ,p2 next bend the stem where it joins the base 7,fig4 #cjb7 and plant the tree almost any place on your plain of ,gizeh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjc4--;,enlarge this camel4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjd4--,make the saddle of writing paper4 ,several date palms1 either grouped or scattered1 would look well and tend to relieve the severity of the landscape4 ,a thin layer of sand sprinkled over the plain1 the stand of the ,sphinx and the paper roots or stands of the trees will give the place a realistic appearance1 and the scene will then be ready for the camels and ,arabs4 ,you may own ,as ,many ,camels as ,you ,desire2 all you have to do is to use the old ,egyptian method of squares1 as explained in ,chapter ,,xiv1 and it will enlarge the camel in ,fig4 #cjc2 then cut out the figure1 lay it down flat on cardboard and run a lead pencil around its edge4 ,cut out this second animal and repeat the outline as often as you want camels4 ,you will then have fine camels which will stand firm on four feet and be strong enough to carry burdens4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cje4--;,fold the saddle in this way4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjf4--;,cut out the ,arab like this4 ,make the ,saddle of writing paper 7,fig4 #cjd74 ,paint or mark it as in ,fig4 #cjh1 fold it like ,fig4 #cje and fit it on the camel's back4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjg4--;,fold together at back in this way4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjh4--;,arab on the camel4 ,cut out the ,arab 7,fig4 #cjf71 being sure to make the short slit in the back of the drapery so that the man will sit well on the saddle4 ,along the dotted lines place a strip of paste and fold the figure at the back1 pasting the two sides together at the centre 7,fig4 #cjg74 ,when dry mark as in ,fig4 #cjh and mount him on the animal4 ,as a harness tie a string on the camel's head1 ornament it with tiny tassels 7,fig4 #cji7 and give the end of the string to the ,arab1 threading the string through the hole in his right hand 7,fig4 #cjh74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cji4--;,fasten a harness on the camel's head4 ,the trees1 animals and men must be placed some distance in front of the pyramids1 that the latter may seem to be a long way off2 otherwise1 all your objects will be out of proportion1 because when a live camel stands close up to the ,grand ,pyramid it looks very small4 ,have several ,camels with ,men ,riding them1 some free from harness and rider1 others held with the halter by ,bedouins seated on paper rocks1 which you can make by bending a piece of cardboard the right height4 ,all the objects given can be enlarged to any desired size by the system of squares shown in ,chapter #ad1 and the entire ,egyptian scene may be taken up1 each piece folded flat and placed in a large envelope when not in use4 ,,chapter ,,xx ,,the ,,colossus ,,of ,,rhodes ,,pretend this is not the twentieth century1 but #bhh ,b4,c41 and that1 with many other young people1 your home is hundreds of miles away on a little island in the ,mediterranean ,sea called ,rhodes4 ,here the weather is sunshiny and bright1 and children do not have to remain indoors because of the rain1 for on this delightful island the sun comes forth in all its glory nearly every day during the year4 ,the people think so much of the sun that they erect statues to it1 which they call 8sun gods02 they even have the head of a sun god on one side of their coins1 and on the other side they print a rose1 for the citizens of ,rhodes are almost as fond of that flower as they are of the sun4 ,such quantities of roses grow on the island that all girls can have as many as they wish4 ,now1 we will play that ,your ,name is ,chares of ,lindus1 that you are a great sculptor and can model all sorts of wonderful and beautiful objects1 and that the city of ,rhodes has commissioned you to make a gigantic bronze statue of ,apollo1 their sun god4 ,so you must pretend that you have built two small islands at the entrance to the port of ,rhodes1 and that on each island you have erected immense stone pedestals fifty feet high1 so that your ,colossus need not be obliged to stand in the water4 ,the statue must be made to span the harbor with 8legs wide apart10 as ,napoleon stands in the pictures of history4 ,apollo must be very large1 about one hundred and eleven feet high1 in order that every ship entering the harbor may pass between the legs of this ,towering ,colossus as a tribute to the god2 and when sailors approach the statue and pass beneath it they will marvel at the beautiful figure of polished metal and carry news of it all over the world4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #caj4--;,enlarge this pattern very carefully4 ,make the ,colossus of bronze filled in with stone4 ,use stiff fine lawn or fine batiste as the outer bronze covering of the statue2 let the cloth be perfectly smooth1 without a wrinkle4 ,take raw cotton batting for the stone filling4 ,enlarge very carefully on stiff1 smooth paper the pattern 7,fig4 #caj72 make it measure nine and one-fourth inches from the tip-top line to the bottom line2 then cut it out and lay the paper pattern down flat over a double fold of the cloth4 ,with a soft lead pencil run a line on the cloth entirely around the figure2 be particular about having all the curves of the figure correct4 ,baste the two layers of cloth together and machine-stitch them around the outside edge of the pencil outline4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cac4--,your ,colossus of ,rhodes will look like this4 ,do not ,sew the ,lines ,straight where they should curve2 remember this and devote the best of your talents to the work4 ,leave a half-inch opening at the shoulder of the upraised arm ,a 7,fig4 #caa74 ,pull off a bit of the soft1 raw cotton and force it in at the opening ,a 7,fig4 #caa7 between the front and back of the figure4 ,with a smooth1 slender1 dull-pointed stick push the cotton well up into one of the points surrounding the head1 which represent the rays of the sun4 ,when you have the cotton in the tip of the point1 pack in another piece and continue to stuff the point with cotton until it is filled out firmly4 ,stuff all the points and the head in the same way2 then fill the opposite shoulder and upper part of the arm which is held down at the side1 and next the uplifted hand and arm1 and the body4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #caa4--,this is the way to build the ,colossus4 ,begin at the ,sole of the left foot and stuff the lower half of the partially filled hanging arm1 then the lower part of the body and the entire length of the leg1 and fill in the other leg4 ,before stuffing the feet take two strong1 stiff hat-pins and break off the heads4 ,if you bend the ends in removing the heads1 hammer them out straight again2 the pins must be perfectly straight4 ,very carefully work a pin1 broken end first1 up each leg well into the body4 ,the dotted lines along the legs in ,fig4 #caa represent the pins placed inside2 the points of the pins extend not less than an inch and a half below the feet ,b1 ,b 7,fig4 #caa74 ,c1 ,c 7,fig4 #caa7 shows the raw cotton1 which has not yet been packed into the feet4 ,lift the figure by the two pin points1 and if it is firm and stiff finish stuffing the feet2 if it bends when held by the pin points1 carefully twist out the pins and insert them again1 adjusting them until they keep the figure stiffly upright when held by the points4 ,sew up all the openings and ,cut ,out the ,statue1 then slowly punch open the centre of the divisions between the rays around the head and the uplifted arm1 with the point of a blade of the scissors4 ,enlarge each hole by twisting the pointed end of a penholder around and around until the opening is sufficiently large4 ,turn the ,colossus over on the other side and carefully cut away the fringe of cloth that surrounds each opening4 ,in like manner open the space between the body and the arm extending down the side4 ,when stuffing the figure1 use the cotton soft2 do not roll it into hard wads1 and be careful not to run the end of the stick through the cloth covering and tear it2 the same care must be taken when inserting the pins up the legs4 ,with thread and needle stitch an outline between the fingers and around the lower portion of the raised hand4 ,filling in the figure with cotton will give you an idea of the labor your great-grandmothers expended upon their bedquilts when they stuffed elaborate designs of grapes and vines on the coverings4 ,such quilts are now highly valued4 ,give ,apollo an ,all-over ,coat of ,varnish ,when the statue is perfectly dry bronze it with liquid bronze1 and if the small openings by the side of the arms seem partially to have closed1 twist the end of the pen handle through each one to enlarge the spaces4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cab4--;,cut a strip of cloth for drapery4 ,cut a strip of cloth according to ,fig4 #cab for drapery4 ,hold one end against the figure at the side where the arm joins the body and fold the cloth loosely across the front and around the back of the figure1 bringing the other end of the drapery forward through the space between the arm and the body4 ,fasten it in place with a pin 7,fig4 #cac74 ,bronze the scarf so that no portion of unbronzed cloth is visible2 then allow the statue to dry1 and with sharp scissors trim off any little ravellings along the edges of the stitching4 ,with pen and ink ,mark the ,features on the face4 ,the chin being held up foreshortens the face2 this means that the position causes the features to look as if they were closer together than they actually are1 and that the eyebrows are nearer the top of the head1 which makes all the features seem higher than when the chin is held level4 ,do not forget this while inking the face4 ,draw rather high on the forehead two curved lines for the eyebrows2 under these mark two curved oblongs for the eyes1 a curve for the nose1 with two elongated dots for nostrils1 a larger curve for the mouth and a little one for the lower lip4 ,practise drawing the face on a piece of paper before attempting to ink it on the bronze head4 ,illustration3 ,making the ,colossus of ,rhodes ,find or make two boxes of heavy cardboard each about two and a half inches high1 an inch and a half wide1 and two and a half inches deep4 ,open the boxes and give the outside a thin coating of glue4 ,while the glue is wet sprinkle with sand1 and1 when dry1 replace the covers and the boxes will be two stone pedestals for the statue4 ,erect ,apollo upon the stone foundation by pushing the projecting pin points through the tops of the boxes2 work a cork on the end of each pin point1 having the cork large enough to rest firmly on the bottom of the box after it is attached to the pin point2 then1 holding each cork in place1 fasten them in turn to the bottom of the box by pushing a common pin up through the bottom of the box into the cork4 ,fig4 #cad shows the inside of the sanded box with the point of the hat-pin firmly planted in the top of the cork1 while the cork is held securely to the bottom of the box by means of the pin run into it from the outside of the box4 ,apollo must stand firm2 the statue and foundation boxes should be so securely fastened together as to seem made in one piece4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cad4--;,fasten the statue's feet to the boxes in this way4 ,there1 the famous ,colossus of ,rhodes1 one of the renowned ,seven ,wonders of the ,world1 is completed1 and now that you have made the statue you can never forget it4 ,pretend that ,apollo towers in the air at least one hundred and fifty feet when on the pedestals4 ,of course1 such a remarkable piece of sculpture could not be constructed in a moment's time1 so make-believe that you1 the sculptor1 ,chares1 of ,lindus1 have been twelve years at work on the wonderful bronze figure4 ,get a sheet of blue tissue paper to serve as the water1 stand ,apollo on it1 and make two or three ,tiny ,paper ,boats with ,masts2 set them on the water under the bronze statue that the vessels may be sailing beneath the statue into the harbor of ,rhodes 7,fig4 #cac74 ,when you have erected the ,colossus on a table and everything is ready1 invite the girls and boys in to see the work2 tell them all about the statue's being one of the 8,seven ,wonders of the ,world0 and what fun you had making ,apollo1 and that you intend to make another of the 8,wonders10 which you will show to them4 ,play that the ,colossus has stood guard over the harbor of ,rhodes for fifty-six years2 then make an earthquake ,tumble it ,down ,double up your hand and give a hard knock on the under side of the top of the table1 exactly beneath the spot on which ,apollo stands4 ,with a little aid of the imagination the noise produced will sound like the rumbling of an earthquake1 and the shock will cause the earth1 or the top of the table1 to tremble and quake violently1 and down will fall the ,colossus4 ,make believe that ,the ,statue is ,broken in many pieces and that the people of ,rhodes allow the fragments to lie scattered on the ground1 for you know that after the real ,colossus had been thrown down1 it remained where it had fallen for many centuries1 until the year #fef ,a4,d41 when ,rhodes was conquered by the ,saracens1 who sold many of the pieces of the bronze sun god to a ,jew of ,syria ,edessa4 ,this man had nine hundred camels carry the fragments on their backs to ,alexandria4 ,nearly three centuries after the disaster1 ,pliny saw the pieces of the ,colossus still lying where it fell3 8,and even as it lies there prostrate10 he reports1 8it stirs to wonder4 ,few men can clasp its thumb with their arms2 the fingers alone are greater than most statues2 vast caverns yawn in its shattered limbs2 within one sees blocks of stone by whose weight the builder established it40 ,the ,colossus cost about #ejj1jjj1 which was obtained from the sale of the engines of war presented to the ,rhodians by a man named ,demetrios ,poliorketes1 after they had made him give up the siege of their city1 #cjc ,b4,c4 ,there were several thousand statues in ,rhodes but none so large as the ,colossus1 which is said to have weighed #gbj1ijj pounds4 ,the famous ,laocon and the ,farnese ,bull were both modelled in ,rhodes4 ,in ,roman time ,rhodes was thought the fairest city in the world and is described by historians as superior to all other cities of its era1 for the beauty and convenience of its ports1 streets1 walls and public edifices1 all of which were profusely adorned with works of art4 ,among the students in its university were ,brutus1 ,cassius1 ,csar and ,cicero1 and the first ,greek grammar1 the one which became the model of ,greek and ,latin grammars1 was written in this city1 so you find that ,rhodes has played a very important part in the world4 ,but the island of ,rhodes is no more a powerful state2 it is now a possession of ,turkey1 and is ruled by a pasha1 who holds office for life1 governing also the adjoining islands belonging to ,turkey1 and collects the revenues4 ,we will have interesting news from time to time from this same island1 for one of the newspapers has stated that a ,danish scientific expedition will go to discover all that remains of the ,colossus of ,rhodes4 ,you must be on the lookout1 therefore1 to know how much they find of the statue and how the pieces look2 then you will wish to compare your ,colossus of ,rhodes with the facts stated and any pictures which may be published on the subject to see how closely your ,apollo resembles the original 8,wonder0 of the world4 ,illustration3 ,cardboard ,pharos of ,alexandria ,,chapter ,,xxi ,,the ,,pharos ,,of ,,alexandria ,,and ,,the ,,mausoleum ,,of ,,halicarnassus ,,play that you are ,sostratus of ,cnidus1 a great architect1 and that you live in the city of ,alexandria1 on the coast of ,egypt4 ,here there is a ,king called ,ptolemy1 who desires you to erect a building different from any ever known2 he wants something grand1 original and unique1 an immense structure adapted to an entirely new purpose4 ,you must make it of white stone and do your very best1 for you are to have the honor of building the 8,pharos of ,alexandria10 ,the ,first ,lighthouse ,ever ,known ,think what that means3 ,when it is finished the people from other countries will see your ,pharos and wonder why it never occurred to them to build a lighthouse1 and they will hurry to erect similar structures on their coasts1 that sailors on all the seas may have guides in times of danger and not be dependent upon bonfires burning at the entrances of harbors4 ,these chance watch-fires are now the only kind of lighthouses the people have1 so get ready your material and make preparations for building1 that you may help the poor sailors4 ,remember1 though1 that we are living in the third century ,b4,c41 and that we are not in the ,united ,states but on the island of ,pharos4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cae4--;,foundation of ,pharos of ,alexandria4 ,select the eastern extremity of the island for ,your ,building ,lot ,it happens that your lighthouse will be on an island in the identical ,mediterranean ,sea in which the ,colossus was reared1 only not on the same side of the water4 ,the island of ,pharos has a neck of land1 built by men1 which stretches through the water to the city of ,alexandria1 making it easy to go back and forth for building material4 ,you must have plenty of ground space for your new style of beacon-light1 because the foundation is to be very large1 about six hundred feet square1 and the building will be many stories1 growing smaller and smaller in size as the stories extend upward4 ,the lighthouse must be five hundred feet high1 that the light may be seen miles out at sea4 ,illustration3 ,building the ,pharos of ,alexandria ,stiff1 white paper will answer for the stone4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #caf4--;,begin with a piece of paper like this4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cag4--,run a line across one side4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cah4--,make another line on the opposite side4 ,cut the ,foundation piece like ,fig4 #cae with a square centre measuring five inches along the dotted lines on each of the four edges4 ,near two of the edges are long slits 7,a ,a74 ,extending out from the centre square are the four sides of the square1 each an inch and a half in depth4 ,on one end of each side there is a flap1 ,c1 at the opposite end a slit1 ,b1 and two of the sides have an extra extension1 or bottom flap1 ,d4 ,cut all of the heavy lines and carefully crease the dotted lines4 ,the best way to make ,fig4 #cae is to cut a piece of paper eight inches wide and eleven inches long 7,fig4 #caf74 ,run a line lengthwise across one inch and a half from the outer edge 7,fig4 #cag72 repeat the same on the opposite edge 7,fig4 #cah72 then mark a line across each of the ends three inches from the edge 7,fig4 #cai74 ,make another line midway between this line and the edge at each end1 which will bring the division one inch and a half from the edge ,e1 ,e 7,fig4 #cbj74 ,crease all the lines1 bending them inward4 ,open out the paper after each folding1 and when all lines have been creased and opened you will find it very easy to mark and cut the sides and flaps of ,fig4 #cae4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cai4--;,a line across each end4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbj4--;,another line will divide the space at each end4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cba4--;,first story of ,pharos of ,alexandria4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbb4--,second story of ,pharos of ,alexandria4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbc4--,third story of ,pharos of ,alexandria4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbd4--;,fourth story of ,pharos of ,alexandria4 ,cut three more papers for ,the ,next ,three ,stories2 divide them with lines like ,figs4 #caf1 #cag1 #cah1 #cai1 #cbj1 and cut them like ,figs4 #cbb1 #cbc1 #cbd4 ,the centres of these must each be smaller than the last1 measuring respectively four1 three and two inches square1 but the depth of the sides remains the same4 ,the size of your second-story paper will be ten by seven inches1 the third1 nine by six inches1 and the fourth1 having the bottom flaps1 measure one instead of one and a half inches1 as do the others1 requires paper seven by five inches4 ,figs4 #cba1 #cbb1 #cbc1 #cbd are given to show the relative sizes of the four stories when the paper is cut and laid out flat2 the diagrams are also intended to explain the cutting of the slits on the centre squares4 ,notice that in the first story 7,fig4 #cba71 as in the additional three stories1 neither of the ends of the left-hand slit reaches to the edge of the square1 while the right-hand slit 7,h ,h1 ,fig4 #cba7 touches at one edge4 ,in the second story 7,fig4 #cbb7 the right-hand slit not only runs to the edge of the square1 but there turns at right angles and extends through the edge of the paper 7,g ,g74 ,the right-hand slit of the third story 7,fig4 #cbc7 differs from the other two2 it runs within a short distance of the edge of the square1 where it turns at right angles1 making a straight line to the adjoining side of the square1 there turning again at a sharp angle2 the slit reaches entirely through the edge of the paper ,h1 ,h 7,fig4 #cbc74 ,in the fourth story 7,fig4 #cbd7 the slits are cut like those in the first story ,i1 ,i 7,fig4 #cbd71 being the long slit4 ,fig4 #cbe gives the diagram for the fifth story1 which is the top one4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbe4--;,fifth story of ,pharos of ,alexandria4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbf--,the pitch-wood fire4 ,this ,room has large openings in the four sides to allow the beacon-light to shine out into the dark night4 ,the centre of the diagram 7,fig4 #cbe7 is one inch square2 two of the sides have slits cut near each side edge of the windows2 on the other sides of the squares are extending flaps4 ,cut all the heavy lines1 and bend inward and crease all the dotted lines1 then put the top story together in proper form by sliding the four side edge flaps through the slits1 which will bring the edges of the sides together1 forming the four corners of the room4 ,bend back and crease down the portion of the flaps which extend inside of the room2 do this to make the fastenings secure4 ,use strips of bright-red and orange-colored tissue paper cut into fringe on one edge and twisted together into a bunch1 as in ,fig4 #cbf1 for the ,pitch-,wood ,fire which is to gleam out upon the treacherous approaches to the harbor4 ,having fuel for the make-believe fire1 and white stone1 or paper1 cut ready for building1 your lighthouse may be erected in a few moments4 ,pierce a small hole in the exact centre of ,fig4 #cbd ,c1 and bend down the sides1 allowing the side flap of each to extend around the corner and on the outside of the adjoining side4 ,slip the end of each flap through the slit which it covers1 shown by ,b1 ,fig4 #cae1 and bend back the end that comes through on the inside2 fit the end of the fire 7,fig4 #cbf7 tightly into the hole ,c on the top of ,fig4 #cbd and the work will resemble ,fig4 #cbg4 ,through the two slits on each side of the fire slide the two bottom flaps of the fifth or top story2 flatten the ends of the flaps up tight to the under side of the top of the fourth story4 ,be sure to keep the front side of each succeeding story directly under the front side of the one over it1 that the steps may fit in place4 ,fasten each lower story to the one above in the same way that you attached the fourth to the fifth4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbg4--;,fourth story with pitch-wood fire ready for fifth story4 ,when the ,pharos is finished make the three flights of ,white ,marble ,steps leading to the top of the lighthouse4 ,cut the top flight 7,fig4 #cbh7 of stiff white paper4 ,let it measure one-half inch in width and four and one-half inches in length1 including the top landing4 ,the side extension ,k of the landing should be three-quarters of an inch long4 ,fold the flat1 straight strip of paper back and forth many times1 in fan fashion and crease firmly to form steps 7,fig4 #cbi74 ,slip the extension ,k into the slit ,i on the right-hand side of the top of the fourth story1 and slide the bottom of the stairs into the slit ,h on the left-hand edge of the third story4 ,make the next flight of steps like the top ones1 only longer--five and one-half inches in length before being creased4 ,place the end of the platform extension over the bottom of the top flight2 run it through the slit ,h which turns at right angles from the edge and fasten the bottom of the steps in the right-hand slit edge 7,g7 of the second story4 ,attach the third flight of marble steps diagonally across the second story in the same manner4 ,the paper strip for these last should measure when flat seven inches in length4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbh4--,top flight of marble steps4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbi4--,top flight with steps creased ready to attach to lighthouse4 ,the real ,sostratus of ,cnidus had a ,natural ,island on which to erect his lighthouse1 but you may have the fun of making one for your ,pharos4 ,find a box a little larger than the lighthouse and cover it loosely with any kind of stiff cloth2 have the cloth smooth and tight only over the space on which the ,pharos is to stand4 ,on all the other portions of the box the covering should be irregularly placed1 so that it will jut out in places2 fold in others and have as much the appearance of an immense rough rock as possible4 ,if the box is of pasteboard1 sew the cover on with a stitch here and there2 if of wood1 tack the cover on4 ,when ready glue or ,tack the ,island on a foundation of wood or one of heavy pasteboard covered with sea-blue cloth or paper to represent the waters of the ,mediterranean ,sea2 give the island a very light coat of varnish or glue1 except the central space reserved for the lighthouse4 ,be careful not to allow the glue to dampen the cloth sufficiently to make it limp4 ,while the glue is moist1 sprinkle generously with sand4 ,when dry1 glue on the ,pharos4 ,turn inward the down-hanging bottom flaps and glue them down securely to the stone4 ,draw the statue 7,fig4 #ccj7 on white paper and cut it out4 ,then cut a slip up through the centre of its stand1 bend the stand at the dotted line1 one half of it forward1 the other half backward1 and paste the statue upright on top of the building4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccj4--,statue4 ,if you would like to do just as the real architect ,sostratus did1 write your name in this way3 ,,sostratus ,,of ,,cnidus ,,to ,,the ,,rescuing ,,gods1 ,,for ,,the ,,benefit ,,of ,,sailors on one side of the first story of the ,pharos2 then paint over it with white paint so that the name cannot be seen4 ,after the paint has dried1 write over the white paint1 8,king ,ptolemy40 ,sostratus of old carved his name deep on the stone wall of the building1 then plastered over it and set the ,king's name in the plaster4 ,instead of the plaster you have used paint4 ,now place the ,pharos in the bright sunlight2 let it stand between you and the light1 with the corners of one of the front edges toward you1 and see how well it appears1 and how closely the colored tissue resembles real fire burning and shining brightly from the top openings4 ,make tiny paper boats1 not over an inch in length1 with wee paper sails1 and scatter them on the make-believe water4 ,the contrast in size of the ,pharos and boats will give a faint idea of the huge proportions of the lighthouse4 ,call in ,your ,friends and let them enjoy the lighthouse with you2 tell them they must pretend that the structure is gigantic in size1 that the laborers were paid only twenty cents a day1 and even with such low wages1 the ,pharos cost over a million dollars4 ,explain to them how all lighthouses of the ,roman world were named ,pharos1 after your building1 because yours was the first and marks an epoch in the world's history4 ,say to the boys and girls that this white building you are showing them is one of the ,seven ,wonders of the ,world1 and beside being very beautiful1 it is one of the most useful of all the 8,seven ,wonders40 ,you must make believe that your ,pharos was completed in the year #bhb ,b4,c41 and remained standing sixteen centuries4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cca4--,the ,mausoleum of ,halicarnassus4 ,the ,mausoleum of ,halicarnassus4 ,turn a square or nearly square pasteboard box upside down4 ,on the centre of the top glue a pasteboard cella made like the one in the ,temple of ,diana1 ,chapter ,,xxiii4 ,surround the cella with paper pillars made in the same manner as those in ,chapter ,,xxiii1 and glue them along the four edges of the box4 ,cover all with a pasteboard ceiling glued on2 then make a pyramid of white pasteboard1 similar to the ,egyptian pyramid1 but let this one have a flat top4 ,fasten the pyramid on top of the ceiling and paste four paper horses with chariot and driver on a small box on top of the pyramid4 ,glue the structure on a board and make two small boxes for each ground corner4 ,fasten these in place and paste a paper horse with rider on top of each box1 then your ,mausoleum will be finished 7,fig4 #cca74 ,the building should be white4 ,the original was a monument in memory of ,mausolos1 and was built by his wife ,artemisia4 ,it stood in the city of ,caria on the southwestern tip of ,asia ,minor in the year #cec ,b4,c4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cde4--,your ,little ,statue of ,zeus ,,chapter ,,xxii ,,the ,,statue ,,of ,,zeus ,,at ,,olympia ,,imagine that you see before you a majestic white statue of gigantic size1 made of ivory1 seated upon an immense throne of ebony1 ivory1 gold and precious stones1 and wearing upon his golden hair a crown of enamelled green olive leaves4 ,over one shoulder is thrown a mantle of glittering gold1 embroidered in white lilies1 which falls down over his ivory body across the knees4 ,in one hand he holds the winged figure of ,victory1 in the other a long1 slender sceptre crowned with an eagle1 and on his feet are rich golden sandals4 ,there3 ,was not that worth seeing8 ,you have been looking at ,zeus of ,olympia1 the most beautiful and wonderful statue ever made by ,phidias1 who lived ages ago and modelled ,zeus about the year #dci ,b4,c4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccb4--,make ,zeus of a doll4 ,you can make a little statue of ,zeus1 but you must pretend that ,you ,are the ,sculptor ,phidias and that you are actually modelling the real giant statue4 ,make believe that hundreds of elephant tusks have been sent to you from distant regions to supply enough ivory for the work1 and that you have an abundance of gold1 precious stones and ebony4 ,make ,zeus of a doll 7,fig4 #ccb7 five and one-half or six inches in length4 ,pry off its wig1 then give the doll a coat of varnish4 ,should the arms be flat1 round them out with a layer of raw cotton glued on and paint the doll white all over4 ,you must make the entire doll absolutely white4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccc4--;,gild hair1 beard and mustache4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccd4--;,gild hair at the back4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cce4--;,gold sandals on the feet of ,zeus4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccf4--;,fold the paper for cutting crown of olive leaves4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccg4--,the crown of olive leaves4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cch4--,zeus is ready for his robe4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cci4--,make the throne like this4 ,gild ,hair1 ,beard and ,mustache on the head 7,figs4 #ccc and #ccd74 ,gild the sandals 7,fig4 #cce74 ,make a crown of green tissue paper olive leaves4 ,fold and cut like ,figs4 #ccf and #ccg1 and fasten together on the back of the head with glue4 ,bend and bind ,fig4 #cch into a sitting position with feet crossed2 keep the statue so until you glue it on the throne4 ,cut the ,throne of ,white ,cardboard 7,fig4 #cci72 the back1 seat and front from top of centre ornament to extreme edge of front are six and three-quarter inches4 ,the seat is one and one-quarter inch wide and two and three-quarter inches long4 ,the arms are one inch high and the top of arm half an inch wide2 the length of arm is an inch and a quarter4 ,the front is one inch wide1 the feet ,g and ,f1 on each side are half an inch long not including the flaps4 ,length of back of throne is four and one-half inches4 ,each side is an inch and one-quarter wide2 their greatest length1 counting the entire length of one of the feet1 is an inch and a half4 ,the width of back piece 7,fig4 #cdj71 not including ,x and ,x1 is two and three-quarter inches4 ,the sides ,x and ,x are one and one-half inch in length1 as they fit exactly the under side of the throne sides ,j and ,j4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdj4--;,an extra back-piece for the throne4 ,lightly ,score1 then bend dotted lines and cut heavy lines4 ,bend inward the side part ,a 7,fig4 #cci7 including ,d and ,l2 then bend forward the top part ,b2 slide ,c through ,d from outside and bend inward the box-like arm at ,e4 ,bend the other arm likewise4 ,bend backward the sides extending along the dotted lines ,f ,f and ,g ,g1 then the front along dotted line ,h2 at the same time slide ,i and ,i against the inner sides of the throne ,j and ,j4 ,bend forward the back of the throne at ,k4 ,bring forward the arms and run ,l and ,l through ,m and ,m1 then pass ,l and ,l forward through ,n and ,n1 and slide them back through ,o and ,o4 ,bring the extension ,p1 including ,t and ,q1 across the front2 run the tongue ,q through ,r4 ,bend the left side1 passing ,s through ,t and ,u1 which fits directly under ,t2 ,s must go through the two slits to the under side of the chair4 ,use the ,blade of a ,penknife in sliding tongues and flaps through slits and use it to straighten out the points of tongues after they are through the slits4 ,bend down and backward ,w and ,w 7,fig4 #cdj72 then bend back ,x and ,x and fasten ,fig4 #cdj to the throne by sliding ,v through ,y on back of throne4 ,rest the seat of throne over ,w and ,w and the sides ,j and ,j 7,fig4 #cci7 over ,x and ,x 7,fig4 #cdj74 ,attach the throne to the ,upper ,dais by lower flaps4 ,fig4 #cda shows the upper dais4 ,the four sides are each one inch high1 its top is three and one-half inches on each of the sides2 all four extensions are one inch and a quarter long1 tongues not counted1 and the four slits are each an inch and one-quarter from the edges of the sides4 ,the two slits marked1 one with a square1 the other with a diamond1 hold the flaps of the footstool 7,fig4 #cdb7 marked with same designs4 ,in the diagrams of footstool and dais the slits are marked with designs like the designs on flaps and tongues1 which slide through them4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cda4--,the upper dais of the throne4 ,bring the two correct parts of the upper dais 7,fig4 #cda7 together by matching them1 as heart to heart1 etc4 ,cut heavy lines1 lightly score and bend dotted lines of the upper dais and put it in shape4 ,make the top of ,footstool 7,fig4 #cdb7 an inch and a half long and one inch wide2 let the front1 back and sides each be half an inch high1 the back extensions one inch long1 the two side flaps each one inch long1 front extensions an inch and a half long1 not including tongues4 ,cut heavy lines1 score lightly and bend dotted lines and slip tongues through slits4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdb4--,the footstool for the feet of ,zeus4 ,attach the ,stool to upper dais by bottom side flaps2 bend the flaps up flat against the under part of the dais4 ,in the same way fasten the throne on the upper dais by sliding the four down-hanging extensions through the four remaining slits on top of the upper dais marked with the same designs4 ,bend and put together the lower dais 7,fig4 #cdc7 and fasten the upper dais on it4 ,make the lower dais five inches square on top and one inch high4 ,glue the bottom flaps of lower dais down on stiff cardboard or thin wood1 in size about eight by ten inches4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdc4--,the lower dais4 ,inlay the ,throne with ,ebony by painting a black band across the top1 down each side of the back and down the front of the arms2 keep the lines straight and neat4 ,gild the centre and two side ornaments on top of the throne4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdd4--,the lion panel for the throne4 ,trace the panel with the two lions 7,fig4 #cdd71 gild the lions and gum the panel on the front of footstool2 then unbend ,zeus and place him on his throne1 bringing him well to the front that his feet may rest on the footstool4 ,fasten the statue firmly in place with glue and pins4 ,pin one folded end of a strip of smoothly ironed starched cloth on the back of ,zeus1 bring the cloth up over the left shoulder down across the knees in folds like those in ,fig4 #cde1 the statue of ,zeus1 and with glue and pins ,fasten the ,drapery loosely here and there1 then gild the entire strip of cloth4 ,make the sceptre of a headless hat-pin4 ,trace the gold eagle from ,fig4 #cdf2 gild and cut it out1 then taking a stitch through the eagle's body with the hat-pin1 slide the eagle up to the top of the pin and glue it in place4 ,make ,zeus grasp the eagle-crowned sceptre by binding his hand and sceptre tightly together with thread4 ,add a little glue to make sure they stick fast2 steady the sceptre by running its point down into the small needle hole that has been previously punctured in the dais1 and paint the sceptre white4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdf4--;,cut out a gold eagle4 ,trace and cut out the ,winged ,figure of ,victory 7,fig4 #cdg71 glue it to the empty hand of ,zeus and glue the hand tight on the top of the arm of the throne4 ,then1 to give an idea of the immense size of the statue1 place a one-inch doll in front of the throne1 glue a bit of drapery on it1 and let the doll represent a worshipper at the shrine of ,zeus4 ,play that the ivory1 gold and ebony throne is glittering with precious stones and golden pictures from the stories of the gods1 and that the arms of the throne are supported by two sphinxes4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdg4--,the winged figure of victory4 ,the real statue was in the chief temple of ,olympia in ,greece1 where the ,olympic games were held every fourth year1 and ,zeus was so large1 it was said1 that ,should ,he ,rise from ,his ,throne he would lift the roof off the building2 also1 that the statue was the supreme masterpiece of art4 ,everyone was anxious to see it4 ,the people believed that should one stand before the figure and gaze upon it1 he would immediately forget all worry and care4 ,possibly this charm may be transmitted to your little ,zeus4 ,the next time you are worried1 try it1 and see if you do not find yourself smiling as you contemplate the little statues4 ,you might let your young friends come to see your ,zeus for four successive days and play that each day is a century1 because for four centuries the real ,zeus attracted crowds of people1 as it was held a calamity to die without having seen ,zeus of ,olympia4 ,,chapter ,,xxiii ,,the ,,temple ,,of ,,diana ,,at ,,ephesus ,,many white marble columns1 twenty-eight in all1 will be needed for ,diana's ,temple1 but the columns are so easy to make1 that you will think it fun and wish more were required4 ,use stiff white paper1 pretending it is marble1 and cut all the columns according to ,fig4 #cdh4 ,keep strictly to the given dimensions1 being careful to cut each column exact and true and perfectly even4 ,slash up the bottom and roll the entire column on a long pencil to make it curve1 then take it off and spread strong glue or paste along the marked edge and wrap the column around a smooth1 straight stick two inches in circumference1 lapping the unmarked lengthwise edge over the glue-covered edge of the column4 ,press the edges together until they cling tight1 then remove the column2 bend out the slashed bottom and roll the two top extensions as in ,fig4 #cdi4 ,now ,look at ,your ,column2 see how gracefully the capital curves into a roll on each side1 reminding one of a blossom on the end of a stem4 ,the column you have made is called ,ionic1 and when you examine the columns or pillars of buildings1 you will easily recognize those with ,ionic capitals4 ,it was principally because of the beautiful rolled capitals crowning its columns that the temple of ,diana was known as one of the ,wonders of the ,world1 for it was the first structure that utilized this beautiful style of architecture4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdh4--;,cut all of the columns like this4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdi4--,the finished column4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cej4--;,ground plan of ,diana's temple4 ,find a piece of extra stiff white cardboard1 nineteen by eleven inches1 and on it draw ,the ,ground ,plan of your temple 7,fig4 #cej74 ,the distance from the outside edge of one ladder-like strip to the outside edge of the other is nine inches4 ,the strips are each sixteen inches long1 two inches wide and divided into six spaces4 ,make the spaces by folding a sixteen-inch strip of paper exactly crosswise through the centre1 then folding each half of the paper three times4 ,place this strip along the edge of the sixteen-inch lines on the ground plan and mark the spaces4 ,draw the oblong for the cella on the centre 7,fig4 #cej74 ,make it four inches wide and ten and one-half inches long1 leaving half an inch space between this oblong and the inner sides of the ladder-like strips4 ,take one column at a time and glue the slashed portion firmly on the ladder-like strip4 ,begin at ,a1 ,fig4 #cej1 and ,erect the ,outer ,row of ,columns1 allowing each column to stand immediately along the inside of the outer line ,,ab1 ,fig4 #cej1 with its exact centre over the short cross-line1 as in ,fig4 #cea 7circles indicate columns74 ,each column must stand erect and plumb4 ,place the next row of columns just within the long inner line as in ,fig4 #ceb4 ,in the same way erect the second double-columned row on the opposite side of the foundation and glue together the sides of the rolled capitals which touch at the top of each pair of pillars on both rows4 ,illustration3 ,your ,miniature ,temple of ,diana4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cea4--;,circle shows where to place first column4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ceb4--,position of first double row of columns4 ,for the oblong centre1 ,make a ,cella of a coverless white cardboard box minus the two ends 7,fig4 #cec74 ,let the cella be four inches wide1 ten and one-half inches long1 and five and one-half inches high4 ,when making any article of cardboard1 always lightly score every line intended to be bent2 this is very important to insure good work4 ,glue the cella or inner temple on the boundary lines marked for the purpose on the centre of the foundation board1 and glue the outside of the two walls firmly to the edges of the rolled capitals of the columns which touch them4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cec4--,the cella4 ,cut the dais of cardboard five by three inches1 and bend it like ,fig4 #ced2 have it three-quarters of an inch high and glue it on the floor of the cella 7,fig4 #cec7 two inches from the back edge with its open sides facing the walls of the cella4 ,trace on cardboard and ,cut ,out the ,goddess ,diana 7,fig4 #cee74 ,bend the extension beneath ,diana's feet half forward and half backward1 then glue ,diana on top of the dais in the centre at the back4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ced4--,make a dais for ,diana4 ,build on the ceiling and roof of the temple4 ,make the ceiling of cardboard ten by sixteen inches1 and cut the two gables1 one for each end of the roof1 like ,fig4 #cef1 two and three-quarter inches high and ten inches long1 not counting the extensions on the three sides1 which must be bent and glued to the ceiling and roof4 ,when the gables are fastened securely on each end of the ceiling1 cut the roof of white cardboard seventeen by twelve inches1 bend it lengthwise through the centre and glue it on top of the ceiling by fastening the ends tight to the upright gables4 ,allow the roof to extend a trifle beyond and over the edges of the ceiling and also project half an inch over front and back of the temple4 ,fit the roof-covered ceiling over the top of the temple2 see that everything is properly placed1 then remove the ceiling2 drop a little glue on top of each roll of the capitals on all of the pillars1 again adjust the roofed ceiling and hold it steady until it adheres firmly to the temple4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cee4--,statue of the ,goddess ,diana4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cef4--,the gable4 ,take a box eleven inches long1 nine inches wide and three inches high2 turn it bottom side up and glue your foundation with its stately temple securely on the box4 ,use white passe-partout strips to fasten the box down tight on a light-weight board1 twenty-seven by sixteen inches4 ,get medium light-weight1 smooth white water-color paper1 for making ,the ,marble ,steps on each of the four sides of the temple4 ,each flight must be made in two pieces or sections4 ,in all there will be eight sections4 ,cut paper for the right-hand section of front steps nine and one-half by six inches1 the left-hand front section nine by six inches4 ,make the two sections for back steps the same4 ,cut the right-hand side steps in sections thirteen by six inches1 and twelve and one-half by six inches4 ,make the other side sections the same4 ,now be very careful in your measurements4 ,if your measurements are not exact your steps will not fit together4 ,divide each section of paper lengthwise from side to side into half-inch spaces by drawing twelve lines across1 beginning half an inch from the top of the paper4 ,this will make thirteen spaces 7,fig4 #ceg7 which1 when creased backward and forward1 fan fashion1 will form seven steps1 counting top and bottom landings or treads4 ,take the longest section of the front steps and square off one end with lines half an inch apart and of varying lengths running down across the first line 7,fig4 #ceg74 ,begin at the ,top square1 ,c1 and draw a diagonal line across it2 continue the diagonal lines across every other descending square 7,fig4 #ceh74 ,cut away the squared marked paper from the diagonal lines and the squares marked ,d ,d ,d ,d ,d ,d in ,fig4 #ceh as shown by heavy line in ,fig4 #cei4 ,this makes the corner of the stairs4 ,lightly score all the horizontal lines1 then crease the steps backward and forward along the horizontal lines4 ,make the other half section of front steps same as first1 with the exception that the corner must run out to the left instead of the right hand1 so draw the vertical lines 7,figs4 #ceg1 #ceh1 #cei7 at the left side of the section and make that corner like the right-hand one1 only reversed4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ceg4--,vertical lines mark the end of the steps4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ceh4--;,draw diagonal lines across4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cei4--;,cut away the squares as shown here4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfj4--;,brace for centre of steps ready to be cut4 ,make a ,brace for the centre where the two sections join1 of a two and one-half by three-inch piece of cardboard ruled in half-inch squares and cut like the heavy line on ,fig4 #cfj4 ,the steps on this must be cut still deeper1 each one-half inch1 according to the heavy lines in ,fig4 #cfj1 and the extensions bent over at dotted lines as in ,fig4 #cfa4 ,fit and glue the straight edge of the left-hand front section of steps on this brace2 have the brace flush with the edge of the steps4 ,the brace should not reach to the tops as the tread of that step lies upon the foundation of the temple4 ,when the brace is on1 lap the edge of the right-hand section over the left-hand section half an inch2 glue the two together1 and the front flight of steps will be finished4 ,make the back flight in like manner4 ,the ,side ,steps have no square corner extensions like ,fig4 #cei2 the corners are cut according to the heavy line in ,fig4 #ceh4 ,each of the side flights of steps must have its central brace1 the same as the front 7,fig4 #cfa71 and the two sections of each side must be joined together as you joined the front flight4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfa4--,the finished brace4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfb4--;,brace for corner of steps ready to be cut4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfc4--;,corner brace finished4 ,make four more braces1 one for each corner1 by dividing with horizontal lines a piece of cardboard for each into six half-inch spaces1 then crossing these lines by vertical lines wider apart1 the width being the exact diagonal distance across a half-inch square1 for they must fit the diagonal edges of the steps at the corners of the four flights4 ,there must be five of these wider spaces 7,fig4 #cfb74 ,cut along the heavy lines and bend down the point along dotted lines 7,fig4 #cfc74 ,fit and ,glue one of these braces at each end of the two side flights1 then glue the side flights on the sides of the temple foundation and the ground board4 ,fasten the extensions ,d ,d ,d ,d ,d ,d 7,fig4 #cei7 of the corners of front and back steps to the side steps by binding them over and pasting them on the side steps4 ,at the same time glue the front and back steps on the temple foundation and ground board4 ,set the temple up on a double pile of books placed on a table4 ,the temple must be elevated that your friends may look in at the open front and behold the ,goddess ,diana4 ,your beautiful little classic temple will give some idea of the grand original structure rebuilt in ,asia about #cef ,b4,c41 whose marble columns numbering one hundred and twenty-seven1 were sixty feet in height and each the gift of a king4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgg4--,the ,hanging ,gardens of ,babylon ,you ,can ,make4 ,,chapter ,,xxiv ,,hanging ,,gardens ,,of ,,babylon ,,make believe that you are in a singular place2 the city is square1 filled with square lots1 on which are square houses1 built of square bricks1 and1 strangest of all1 by the side of the king's magnificent square palace there stands a wonderful garden4 ,the garden is also built square in four mighty steps or platforms1 one above the other1 each supported by arches4 ,these are the famous ,hanging ,gardens and you are in the ancient city of ,babylon where ,nebuchadnezzar is king1 and the time is about the year #ehj ,b4,c4 ,the ,king's ,wife1 ,amytis1 used to live in the mountainous country of ,media1 and when she married and came to ,babylon1 she longed for the sight of a hill1 so her husband1 ,king ,nebuchadnezzar1 had the ,hanging ,gardens built for her4 ,pretend that ,the ,queen ,has ,invited ,you to explore the gardens with her4 ,up1 up the many flights of marble steps you go to the tip-top of the beautiful hill1 and standing there by her side you have a splendid view of the surrounding flat country as well as of the ,river ,euphrates1 which divides the city into two equal parts1 half on the east and half on the west side of the river4 ,the ,gardens are built as high as the walls of the city 7three hundred feet7 so you can readily look over the walls to the stretch of land on all sides4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfd4--;,cut a piece of pasteboard exactly square4 ,if you will find some very ,stiff ,pasteboard we can go to work immediately and build toy ,hanging ,gardens4 ,cut a piece of the pasteboard exactly square1 measuring on each of the four sides eighteen and one-half inches 7,fig4 #cfd74 ,of this we will make a box-like foundation4 ,draw a straight line three inches from each edge1 as shown by the dotted lines in ,fig4 #cfe4 ,take each line in turn and1 placing the edge of a straight ruler along it1 score the line2 that means1 run the knife-blade along the pencil line at the edge of the ruler1 cutting the pasteboard only partially through4 ,as each line is scored1 raise the pasteboard and bend it away from you along the scored line1 then allow the pasteboard to lie out flat again4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfe4--,mark it off like this4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cff4--;,cut like this4 ,after all the lines are properly scored1 cut the lines ,a ,a and ,b ,b 7,fig4 #cfe7 only far enough inward to meet the lines ,c ,c and ,d ,d 7,fig4 #cfe74 ,allowing a scant half-inch extension at each corner on the lines ,c ,c and ,d ,d1 cut the corners out as in ,fig4 #cff4 ,bend the four little extensions1 then the sides ,e and ,f 7,fig4 #cff74 ,cover the extensions with strong glue and1 bending the remaining sides ,g and ,h 7,fig4 #cff71 glue the extensions1 one at a time1 securely on these sides4 ,hold ,each ,extension ,tight to the side until it sticks fast4 ,in this way the cardboard will be made into a large1 square box1 which1 when perfectly dry1 must have openings cut through all the sides that it may resemble closely the foundation platform of the real ,hanging ,gardens4 ,to ,make the ,twelve ,openings on each of the sides of the foundation platform1 cut a strip of cardboard twelve and one-half inches long1 and three inches wide4 ,across the entire length of the strip draw lines half an inch apart1 as ,i ,i 7,fig4 #cfg74 ,cross these short lines by a long line running lengthwise one inch from the top edge1 ,j ,j 7,fig4 #cfg74 ,between this line and the upper edge draw another line1 running lengthwise1 a quarter of an inch from the line ,j ,j1 as ,k ,k1 ,fig4 #cfg4 ,you now have a strip of cardboard twelve and one-half inches long and three inches wide4 ,across its entire length you have run two long lines1 and across the entire width many short lines4 ,begin with the ,second ,division from one end of the strip marked by the short lines1 and make a dot on the centre of the line ,k ,k 7,fig4 #cfg7 where this line crosses the second division4 ,l 7,fig4 #cfg7 shows the dot4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfg4--,to make the twelve openings4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfh4--,stand the box on one side4 ,the diagram ,fig4 #cfg is merely intended as a guide1 giving only portions of the twelve and one-half inch strip you are making4 ,begin at the lower corner of the small division under ,l 7,fig4 #cfg7 and draw a curved line up to ,l2 draw another curved line from the opposite corner of the same division up to the same point4 ,the two lines will ,form an ,arch as in ,m 7,fig4 #cfg74 ,skip one division and draw another arch on the fourth division in the same way that you drew the arch of the second division4 ,in like manner draw an arch in the space between the lines ,k ,k and ,j ,j of every other division on the strip4 ,this will make twelve arched divisions1 leaving a solid division or pillar at each end of the strip and also between each opening4 ,with the point of your knife-blade ,pierce ,holes around the edge of all the arches as shown by the arch ,n 7,fig4 #cfg72 then with scissors cut the two sides of the second division up to the arch and1 holding the cut piece with your thumb and first finger1 bend it backward and forward until it breaks away from the strip1 leaving an arched opening4 ,smooth the rough edge of the arch by cutting away the uneven particles4 ,cut all arches in like manner ,o ,o 7,fig4 #cfg7 and cut the least bit from across each end of your strip--not more than a sixteenth of an inch--that the strip may slide inside of the box foundation4 ,the strip will be a guide in making all of the arches of your ,garden4 ,stand the ,box on ,one ,side and slip the strip inside of it2 lay the strip down flat on top of the lower side of the box 7,fig4 #cfh7 and1 holding it firmly in place1 mark the divisions and arches on the box by running a pencil line around the edge of each opening arch of the strip4 ,remove the strip1 and one side of the foundation will be marked ready for the twelve archways to be cut out4 ,repeat the markings on each of the four sides of the box foundation1 cut open the archways as you cut those in the strip and you will have made a garden foundation like the first story of ,fig4 #cfi4 ,the ,babylonians used arches to support their enormously heavy structures because arches are the strongest kind of foundations4 ,make another box of a perfect square of pasteboard measuring thirteen and one-half inches on each of the four sides1 to form the second platform4 ,mark off the two and one-half inch sides and your box will be eight and one-half inches square1 with a height of two and one-half inches4 ,after the glue of this is thoroughly dry1 cut the arches4 ,use the same strip for a guide that did duty for the first platform arches4 ,cut four arches from one end of the strip and shave off the outside edge of the solid fifth division which forms the end of the strip where the portion has been taken off4 ,the strip will now ,fit in the ,second ,box ,platform4 ,when this is all complete1 make a third box still smaller1 of pasteboard nine and one-half inches square4 ,measure off a two-inch border on every side to form the sides of the platform4 ,the box should be five and one-half inches square and two inches high4 ,cut arches in this platform with the aid of the same guiding strip of open archways after first cutting off three additional openings to make it fit the new box4 ,you can also trim off the bottom of the pillars along the lengthwise lower edge of the strip that it may be narrow enough to fit more perfectly in the third platform4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfi4--;,foundation of the ,hanging ,garden4 ,make the fourth and ,last ,platform of pasteboard six inches square4 ,when finished let the box measure three and one-half inches square and one and one-quarter inch high4 ,two more openings must be cut from your arched strip to shorten it sufficiently to fit in the last box platform1 for this platform must also be cut into open arches4 ,build up the four platforms one on top of the other1 as in ,fig4 #cfi4 ,place the centre of each platform exactly over the centre of the one beneath it4 ,to ,find the ,centre take each platform in turn and lay a ruler very lightly on its top that no pressure may bend the arched sides2 draw a pencil line across from the upper right-hand corner to the lower left-hand corner ,p1 ,q 7,fig4 #cgj72 cross this line with another drawn diagonally across the square from the other two corners ,r1 ,s 7,fig4 #cga74 ,the exact centre of the square top of the platform is at the dot ,t 7,fig4 #cga71 where the two lines meet and cross each other4 ,find the centre of each platform and very carefully puncture a hole through the centre with a coarse darning needle4 ,you will have use for these centre marks when fastening the platforms together4 ,the ,four ,different ,floors of the original ,gardens were supported by pillars and arches1 as you have made yours1 only the real platforms had more pillars under them4 ,between the pillars which formed the square of the first lower platform twelve arched passageways ran1 entering from each of the four sides and dividing the ground beneath1 equally between pillars and passages4 ,there were rows and rows of pillars and arches that gave the effect of a honeycomb with open-sided cells4 ,the arches proper were formed at the top of the many pillars which supported them1 and all were built of the ,queer ,square ,bricks which had the king's name stamped on them1 with other writing in a square bounded centre4 ,the bricks were twelve inches long1 twelve inches wide1 and three inches thick and looked like ,fig4 #cgb4 ,you must pretend that your pasteboard pillars between each opening are made of just such bricks and that there are many1 many more brick pillars throughout the entire space beneath the floors4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgj4--,to find the centre4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cga4--;,cross this line with another4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgb4--;,a ,babylonian brick4 ,cut ,light-,green ,tissue ,paper into strips wide enough to extend a trifle over the edge of the platforms while reaching in across the top far enough to have the inner edge of the strip covered by the platform resting over it4 ,the tissue paper should form a flat green band bordering the entire top ledge of the first three platforms4 ,cover the entire top of the fourth and last platform with the green tissue paper4 ,before you can ,plant the ,shrubs and ,trees you must dig holes in the earth for their roots4 ,take each platform in turn and1 with a coarse darning needle1 puncture holes entirely through both green paper and pasteboard4 ,let the holes be in straight rows2 make them on the projection or step of each platform1 midway between the extreme edge and the walls of the next higher story4 ,on the first1 second and third platforms the holes should be an inch and a half apart4 ,pierce three holes through the top of the fourth platform1 one at the back on the extreme left-hand corner and one on each side of that hole1 but much nearer the centre4 ,you ,will ,need ,ground upon which to erect your ,hanging ,gardens4 ,get a piece of heavy1 stiff pasteboard which will not bend1 or a light board about seventeen inches wide and nineteen inches long4 ,cover it with green blotting paper1 allowing the paper to extend over all the edges4 ,paste the four turned-over portions of green paper on the under side of the board or ground4 ,now build up the ,gardens4 ,first ,stick a ,long ,hat-,pin through the centre of the fourth or top platform4 ,then run the hat-pin through the centre of the third platform2 slide this up next to the top platform1 keeping the sides straight and parallel4 ,add the second and the first platforms to the others1 running the pin each time through the centre of the top of the platform4 ,place the structure on the ground with one of its sides flush with--that is--along the edge of the ground1 and its adjoining side two inches from the adjoining edge of the ground1 leaving about five inches of ground in front and four inches of ground at the other side of the ,gardens4 ,then stick the hat-pin firmly down into the ground and leave it there until the structure is all glued together4 ,in fitting the building on the ground be certain that it is turned so that the back of the top platform on which you have pierced the hole at the extreme left-hand corner lies along the back edge of the ground ,o 7,fig4 #cgc74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgc4--,place the building on the ground in this position4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgd4--,paste the strip to the side of one box and the top of another4 ,to ,bind the ,different ,parts of the structure firmly together and fasten the whole building to the ground1 cut sixteen strips of white writing paper two inches long and a scant half-inch wide2 fold each strip crosswise through the centre2 then1 paste half of one strip on the fourth platform upward from the right-hand lower corner2 bring the free half of the strip out flat on top of the next platform1 which extends immediately beneath it1 and gum down securely 7,fig4 #cgd74 ,bind the other three lower corners of the top platform down to the top of the next platform in the same manner2 then fasten the third to the second and the second to the first platform1 also the first platform to the ground4 ,when the paste is perfectly dry1 cautiously remove the hat-pin4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cge4--;,cut the first flight of steps like this4 ,build the ,four ,flights of ,steps from stiff white writing paper4 ,cut ,fig4 #cge1 for the first flight of steps2 make them exactly according to the dimensions or sizes of the different parts given4 ,you will find that the stairs themselves ,c1 ,c 7,fig4 #cge7 must be four and one-eighth inches long and an inch and one-eighth wide4 ,the height of the side of the stairs ,d1 ,d 7,fig4 #cge7 is three inches4 ,the length of the bottom of the side of the stairs ,d1 ,e 7,fig4 #cge7 is four inches4 ,the top of the side of the stairs ,d1 ,f 7,fig4 #cge7 is one inch1 and the width of the back1 one and one-eighth inch2 this should be the same width as the stairs ,c1 ,c 7,fig4 #cge7 because it is intended to fit on and over the flap ,h that turns down from the top landing and is the same width as the stairs ,c1 ,c 7,fig4 #cge74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgf4--,your stairs will stand alone4 ,illustration3 ,making ,our ,hanging ,garden4 ,the height of the back is three inches4 ,the ,top ,landing of the ,stairs 7,l1 ,fig4 #cge7 is one inch by five-eighths of an inch4 ,cut all of the heavy lines of the stairs and bend backward all of the dotted lines except that along the flap ,g at the bottom of the side which must be bent forward that it may lie flat on the ground4 ,open out the stairs flat and with pen and ink draw straight lines from side to side of ,c ,c2 the lines will serve for steps4 ,in like manner make lines on each of the three other flights of steps4 ,bend down the two flaps ,h and ,j on the top landing 7,fig4 #cge71 then the line ,f ,e along one edge of the steps2 turn outward the flap ,g1 bend down the line ,f ,l at the head of the stairs1 which will bring the flap ,j under the top of the side ,d ,f4 ,turn back the line ,d ,d that the back may cover the flap ,h4 ,crease down the flap ,k tight and flat2 let its top ,m extend around and lie flat against the under side corner ,n of the flap ,h1 and your flight of stairs will be able to stand alone 7,fig4 #cgf74 ,gum the ,extension of the top landing securely along the front edge of the extreme left-hand corner of the first story of your ,gardens and fasten the flap ,g to the ground4 ,make three more flights of stairs in the same way1 only let the second flight run in the opposite direction from the first1 as shown in ,fig4 #cgg4 ,to do this1 simply bend the dotted lines forward instead of backward1 except the lower flap at bottom of the side1 which should be bent backward2 this method of folding turns the stairs around1 bringing the under side of the paper topmost after the stairs are bent into shape4 ,let the second flight of stairs measure in length from ,c to ,c 7,fig4 #cge7 three and one-half inches1 in width seven-eighths of an inch1 height from ,d to ,d two and one-half inches1 length ,d ,e three and one-eighth inches1 length of top of side ,d ,f three-quarters of an inch1 height of back two and one-half inches1 width of back seven-eighths of an inch2 top landing1 three-quarters of an inch by three-eighths of an inch4 ,fasten the ,second ,flight of ,stairs at the right of the second story as you glued the first on the left hand of the first story4 ,crease the third stairway in the same way as the first1 for it is to run in the same direction4 ,let these stairs measure in length from ,c to ,c 7,fig4 #cge7 two and seven-eighths inches1 in width five-eighths of an inch1 height from ,d to ,d two inches1 length ,d ,e two and one-half inches1 top of side ,d ,f half an inch1 height of back two inches1 width five-eighths of an inch2 the top landing one-half inch by one inch4 ,fasten this stairway at the left-hand corner of the third platform4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgh4--;,cut out the stone bulls by this pattern4 ,make the fourth and last stairs turn in the same direction as the second4 ,these are the smallest3 ,length from ,c to ,c 7,fig4 #cge7 one and three-quarters inches1 width three-eighths of an inch1 height from ,d to ,d one and one-quarter inch1 length ,d ,e one and one-half inch1 top of side ,d ,f one-quarter of an inch1 width of back three-eighths of an inch1 height of back one and one-quarter inch4 ,top of landing one-quarter of an inch by five-eighths of an inch4 ,bend into shape and glue this flight of steps at the right-hand corner of the top platform of the ,gardens4 ,now go to work on the ,stone ,broad-,fronted ,bulls which are to stand in pairs at the landing of each stairway4 ,make ,fig4 #cgh of white paper and with ink draw the wings1 face and hat like ,fig4 #cgi4 ,then cut out the strange animal1 part bull1 part bird1 and part man4 ,bend at dotted line on top of wings 7,fig4 #cgh72 bend outward all four of the extensions under the hoofs and stand the creature at the top of the first stairway4 ,paste the extensions out from the hoofs firmly to the platform4 ,carve or cut out seven more stone bulls and place two at the head of each stairway as in ,fig4 #cgg4 ,gum each stone bull securely in place4 ,one more bull is needed which must stand up high on top of a stone shaft 7,fig4 #chj74 ,height of shaft is three and one-fourth inches1 not counting flaps or bull2 width of same pattern at top fully two and one-half inches1 width at bottom three and one-fourth inches4 ,height of bull from top of wings to bottom of feet one and one-fourth inch4 ,mark and fold it along dotted lines like ,fig4 #cha1 sliding the two flaps ,p ,p 7,fig4 #chj7 through the slits ,q ,q2 crease the flaps backward to form paper hooks that hold fast4 ,turn out the extensions ,r ,r1 which must be pasted down flat near the right hand on the back part of the top of the third story4 ,the shaft will extend up high above the fourth story1 as in ,fig4 #cgg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgi4--,the stone bull who will guard your stairway4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chj4--,the bull on the shaft is made in this way4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cha4--,stone shaft and bull4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chb4--,use writing paper for the statues4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chc4--;,a tree in the garden of fringed paper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chd4--;,a palm tree4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #che4--;,a tree in the garden4 ,make ,two ,statues a little larger than diagram and glue one at the right-hand corner of the front of the first platform1 and the other on the right-hand corner of the back of the first platform as in ,fig4 #cgg4 ,use two pieces of white stiff writing paper for the two statues 7,fig4 #chb74 ,cut all the heavy lines and bend back all the dotted lines except the extensions ,v ,v2 bend these forward4 ,slip the flap ,s through the slit ,t2 bend down and fit in the top ,u2 then glue the statues in place4 ,color all of the white extensions of stairs1 bulls1 and statues with green paint or with green tissue paper pasted over them4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chf4--,make fringe like this4 ,the ,garden will now be ready for ,the ,shrubbery ,use different tones of green tissue paper for the three varieties of trees 7,figs4 #chc1 #chd1 #che74 ,make several trees of each kind and have all of the same variety1 made of one tone of paper4 ,for ,fig4 #chc fringe the paper as in ,fig4 #chf2 have four layers of paper for the fringe and one layer for the unfringed part2 begin with the plain strip and roll it around and around a slender stick 7,fig4 #chf74 ,bend the top over to prevent its unrolling 7,fig4 #chc74 ,plant ,this ,tree in the hole you dug for it on the first platform just back of the front statue 7,fig4 #cgg72 alternate these trees with the palm trees1 extending the line entirely around the top of the first platform of the ,gardens4 ,fig4 #chg gives the pattern for the palm2 cut the six leaves and strip all in one piece1 fold each leaf lengthwise through the centre ,w1 and fringe as in ,x2 unfold the leaves and double the strip on dotted line ,y and roll it on a slender round stick as you did the first tree4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chg4--,pattern for the palm tree4 ,for the other tree use six layers of fringe which you have cut like ,fig4 #chf1 and afterward crimped with a blade of the scissors4 ,this time begin at the top of the stick instead of the bottom and with the narrow top of the fringe roll the paper down to the pointed end of the stick4 ,this gives the tree a bushy foliage 7,fig4 #che74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chh4--;,cut circles of green paper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chi4--;,fold and cut like this4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cij4--,the circle cut and opened4 ,cut circles of dark olive-green paper to ,make ,plants like ,fig4 #chh4 ,fold the circle evenly four times and cut like ,fig4 #chi1 stopping at dotted line before reaching the centre4 ,unfold and the papers will resemble ,fig4 #cij4 ,hold each of these at the centre1 and twist a few times to make the stems 7,fig4 #cia74 ,plant the shrubs between the trees on top of the second platform4 ,cut a number of light sage-green tissue paper shapes like ,fig4 #cib for plants4 ,holding each of the plants at the centre1 crease by drawing it lightly through the fingers of the other hand1 twist the stems 7,fig4 #cic7 and plant between trees4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cia4--;,a shrub for the garden4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cib4--,this is for a plant4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cic4--,twist the stem of the plant4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cid4--;,in formal rows4 ,arrange ,your ,plants in precise formal rows1 a tree then a plant1 next a tree and so on allowing a tree in a higher platform to come between two plants in the platform beneath as in ,fig4 #cid4 ,make vines of rather long1 very finely cut and crimped tissue paper fringe2 paste the vines between the row of trees on the first platform1 allowing portions of the vine to hang over the edge4 ,make a number of palm trees and plant the roots or ends of the tree trunks in button moulds4 ,glue the moulds at equal distances apart and in a straight line along the ground on the three sides of the gardens4 ,play that in the highest platform of the pyramid ,an ,engine ,pumps up the ,water from the river ,euphrates1 that runs along below on one side of the structure1 to supply the garden with fountains which you can make believe are sparkling and dashing here and there among rare shrubs and many-colored1 fragrant flowers4 ,you must pretend that the spaces between the arches on the different platforms are made into magnificent apartments and banquet rooms and below in the vaulted corridors the money changers and politicians ply their trades1 while outside on the terraces are to be found the simple1 sweet pleasures of wholesome ,nature4 ,,part ,,iii ,,things ,,to ,,make ,,for ,,home1 ,,gift ,,days1 ,,and ,,fairs ,illustration3 ,the ,tissue ,paper ,christmas ,greens ,look ,very ,natural4 ,,chapter ,,xxv ,,new ,,christmas ,,decorations ,,wreathes of the spiked leaf holly1 branches of white berried mistletoe and yards of evergreen rope can be made of tissue paper to look so natural it is difficult to believe ,mother ,nature did not provide the material4 ,paper enough for the making of ,christmas greens to decorate an ordinary room quite lavishly may be bought for fifty cents or less4 ,one sheet of tissue paper will make thirty-two holly leaves4 ,one sheet of tissue paper will make a large bunch of mistletoe and one sheet of tissue paper will make one yard of evergreen rope4 ,complete success in this work depends largely upon the paper used and great care must be taken in selecting the colors4 ,the quality should be good1 else it will lack the necessary crispness and staying properties4 ,for the holly and evergreen choose a dark moss-green paper1 which is a yellow green with no tinge of blue4 ,for the mistletoe you must have a light gray-green1 also of a yellow tone1 a light cardinal red for the brilliant holly berries1 white for the waxy mistletoe berries and dark gray-brown for holly stems4 ,one sheet each of the red and white paper will probably be sufficient for all the berries you will want1 and one sheet of gray-brown will answer for the stems4 ,besides the paper you must have a spool of fine wire or coarse thread for winding and some natural bare branches or twigs1 or a roll of heavy bonnet wire for stems4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cie4--;,cut a sheet of tissue paper in half4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cif4--;,fold the half sheet of paper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cig4--;,fold again4 ,begin with the ,holly and cut one sheet of the dark moss-green tissue paper in half 7,fig4 #cie74 ,fold the half sheet according to the dotted lines through the middle and you will have ,fig4 #cif4 ,fold ,fig4 #cif through the middle as shown by the dotted line and there will be ,fig4 #cig4 ,bring the two ends of ,fig4 #cig together1 folding at the dotted line1 and it will give you ,fig4 #cih4 ,again fold along the dotted central line and you will have ,fig4 #cii4 ,fold through the middle1 along the dotted line1 for the last time and there will be an oblong1 one and three-quarter inches wide by five inches long4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cih4--;,bring the ends together4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cii4--;,fold once more4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #djj4--,the paper is folded and leaf cut out like this4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dja4--,sixteen leaves like this4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #djb4--;,begin at the top to twist the points4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #djc4--,pinch the underside to form the mid-rib4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #djd4--,the finished leaf will look like this4 ,with a soft lead pencil draw the outline of a half holly leaf after the pattern 7,fig4 #djj71 the fold of the paper forming the straight edge of the outline4 ,cut along the pencil line1 open the fold and there will be sixteen leaves like ,fig4 #dja4 ,the dotted line running lengthwise through the middle of the leaf shows where the paper was folded4 ,have a damp sponge ready and slightly moisten the fingers of your right hand on the sponge--never with your lips in handling green paper4 ,take one leaf in your left hand and with the moist fingers of your right hand twist each point of the leaf into a sharp spike1 beginning at the top of the leaf as in ,fig4 #djb4 ,twist the lower part of the leaf into a stem 7,fig4 #djc7 and1 refolding the leaf down the middle1 pinch the underside of the fold to form the mid-rib1 bringing your two hands together and puffing the paper a little as you do so 7,fig4 #djc74 ,the finished leaf should resemble ,fig4 #djd4 ,the crinkled appearance given by pinching and twisting adds much to the natural look of the leaf4 ,you may vary the size1 making some leaves smaller than others1 but keep as nearly as possible to the pattern1 for experiment has proved it to be a good one4 ,before putting your leaves on the stems make the ,holly ,berries1 for they must be fastened on first4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dje4--,place the cotton in the centre of the paper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #djf4--;,draw the paper around the ball4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #djg4--,wrap the three stems together4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #djh4--;,cut off the ragged ends4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dji4--;,fasten the berries to the end of a twig4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #daj4--;,beginning to wrap the stem4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #daa4--,the stem is wrapped with paper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dab4--;,fasten the leaves to the stem4 ,from your red tissue paper cut a number of pieces two and a half inches square1 make a little ball of raw cotton a trifle larger than a good sized pea and place it in the centre of one of the squares of paper 7,fig4 #dje74 ,draw the paper up and around the ball1 completely covering it1 then twist the remainder of the paper into a stem 7,fig4 #djf74 ,make three berries1 twisting their stems as tightly as possible and bunch them4 ,with your fine wire or thread1 wrap the three stems closely together 7,fig4 #djg7 and cut off the ragged ends 7,fig4 #djh74 ,take up a natural branch and wrap the stems of the berries to the end of a twig 7,fig4 #dji74 ,cut a strip of the gray-brown paper half an inch wide and about four inches long1 and1 beginning close to the berries 7,fig4 #daj71 wrap the stem with the paper as shown in ,fig4 #daa4 ,fasten three leaves to the stem close to the berries as in ,fig4 #dab1 and place other leaves about one inch apart1 alternating first on one side then on the other side of the stem 7,fig4 #dac74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dac4--,place the other leaves about one inch apart4 ,when the holly is to be made into ,wreaths1 the branches should not be large and a small wooden or wire hoop should form the foundation of the wreath4 ,upon this hoop the small branches of holly must be bound1 overlapping one another and extending out beyond the hoop to form a generous wreath4 ,a bright red ribbon bow1 fastened at the top of the holly wreath1 gives it a still more realistic effect4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dad4--;,bring the two ends of the strip together4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dae4--;,cut out the mistletoe leaf in this way4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #daf4--,the twin leaves4 ,for ,mistletoe cut the gray-green tissue paper into pieces eight and one-half inches long by one and a half inches wide4 ,bring the two ends of a strip together1 folding through the middle1 to form the oblong 7,fig4 #dad74 ,fold ,fig4 #dad lengthwise through the middle along the dotted line and on it draw the outline of half of a mistletoe leaf1 with the straight edge on the long fold and the stem end on the short fold of the paper 7,fig4 #dae74 ,cut along this outline1 open the folds and you will have twin leaves like ,fig4 #daf4 ,bring the two open leaves together and twist the connecting part into a stem like ,fig4 #dag4 ,make a number of white mistletoe berries according to the directions given for the red holly berries and wrap them together in pairs2 then nestling a couple close in between two leaves 7,fig4 #dah7 wrap them on the stem4 ,the ,stems of the mistletoe should be very irregular and branching1 and it may be necessary to make them of bonnet wire in order to produce the proper shape4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dag4--,twist the connecting part into a stem4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dah4--,nestle a couple of berries in between two leaves4 ,fig4 #dai shows the branching irregular stem and the position of leaves and berries4 ,some of the twigs should be left bare1 as they are so often on the natural mistletoe branch4 ,fasten on the leaves and berries by wrapping with fine wire and then cover the stems with strips of the gray-green tissue paper1 wrapping it as directed in making the holly branch4 ,the only difference being that while the holly stem is wrapped with paper only far enough to cover the red stems of the berries and the leaves are put on afterwards1 the mistletoe leaves must be fastened on with the berries and the entire stem then covered with the paper4 ,you will remember that the stems of the natural mistletoe are as pale in color as the leaves1 so no dark wood must show in your branch4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dai4--,put the leaves and berries on the stem4 ,hang your bunch of mistletoe from the chandelier and you will find that no one will stop to examine it too closely1 and the ,christmas games can be played just as merrily under the paper as under the real mistletoe4 ,there now remains but the ,ropes of ,evergreen to complete the time-honored ,christmas decorations4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbj4--;,cut this oblong into a fringe4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dba4--;,begin the evergreen rope in this way4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbb4--,the evergreen rope is made like this4 ,fold a sheet of the dark moss-green tissue paper crosswise1 then fold again and you will have an oblong a little less than four inches wide and the length of the paper's width4 ,press the folds down flat and cut them open with a paper knife1 then1 keeping the strips together1 fold crosswise through the middle2 again fold crosswise through the middle and there will be an oblong like ,fig4 #dbj4 ,cut this oblong into a fringe1 bringing the slits to within one inch of the top edge and making each strip not more than one-quarter of an inch wide 7,fig4 #dbj74 ,unfold and separate four pieces to loosen the fringe1 then place the top edges of the four pieces together once more and1 taking a long piece of strong twine1 curl the right hand upper corner of the heading of the fringe over the twine near the end 7,fig4 #dba74 ,from this start to wrap the fringe around and around the twine forming the rope shown in ,fig4 #dbb4 ,when you have almost reached the ends of the first four strips of fringe1 paste the ends of the headings of four more strips on to the first and continue to wrap as before4 ,in this way you may make your evergreen rope as long as you wish4 ,there is just one word of caution which must go with the assurance of the real beauty of these ,christmas decorations and that is3 ,remember to hang your wreaths and ropes where they will not be exposed to the flames of gas1 candle or lamp1 for while they are scarcely more inflammable than the natural greens1 it is not well to take any risks and neither is it at all necessary4 ,with this in mind your rooms may be inexpensively1 prettily and safely decorated with the tissue paper ,christmas greens4 ,,chapter ,,xxvi ,,doll ,,house ,,of ,,pasteboard ,,country houses are very attractive1 even the toy ones possess a certain charm4 ,here is a great1 big1 beautiful1 country doll house for the doll people to live in4 ,it has window shutters to open and close1 doors that will open and shut1 and the doors have little door knobs like real ones4 ,each room has a different1 colored frieze around the walls1 and the floor of the living-room is covered with a handsome rug4 ,all the windows are curtained1 and the house is ready to furnish4 ,you can make any and all kinds of furniture with empty spools of different sizes and pieces of pasteboard cut in various ways4 ,as a hint1 just to show how easily the furniture is made1 glue a round piece of pasteboard on top of ,a ,large ,spool and you will have a pretty little table2 paint it a red brown to resemble mahogany4 ,if you need more suggestions1 spool furniture may be found in 8,what a ,girl ,can ,make and ,do40 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbc4--;,first pasteboard box for doll house4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbd4--;,front and right-hand side cut from box4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbe4--,second box with corners left on front4 ,to make the doll house4 ,get three stiff pasteboard boxes about fourteen inches long1 thirteen inches wide and six and one-half inches high 7,fig4 #dbc74 ,cut the thirteen-inch front and the right-hand side from the first box 7,fig4 #dbd74 ,take the second box and lay the fourteen-inch front down flat on top of an old1 common wooden table which can be used without fear of injury1 and with the aid of a ruler1 draw two straight lines across the front on the inside of the box2 let each line be about one and one-fourth inch from the side4 ,keep the box as it is while you score the lines with a sharp penknife2 then cut out the front1 leaving the upright pieces to form the corners at each end 7,fig4 #dbe74 ,cut the thirteen-inch front and left-hand side from the third box 7,fig4 #dbf74 ,mark two high windows 7,fig4 #dbg7 on the inside1 near the front of the left side of the first box 7,fig4 #dbd74 ,make each window two and one-half inches high and two and one-half inches wide1 leaving a space of three-fourths of an inch between them4 ,lay this left side of the box flat down on the table and use the sharp penknife to score the dotted lines and cut the heavy lines4 ,always cut and score from the inside of the box1 otherwise the shutters will turn inward4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbf4--,third box with front and left-hand side cut off4 ,when the window is scored and cut1 throw ,open the ,shutters and look out through the little opening of the doll's kitchen window 7,fig4 #dbh74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbg4--,two high windows marked in left wall of first box4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbh4--,look through the open windows4 ,in the second box 7,fig4 #dbe7 cut a door five and one-half inches high and three inches wide through the left side wall1 one and three-fourths of an inch from the back wall4 ,the two high windows1 each two and one-fourth inches wide and two inches high and the one ordinary large window1 four inches high and two and one-fourth inches wide1 must be marked on the back wall 7,fig4 #dbi7 and cut 7,fig4 #dcj74 ,cut another door in the room through the right-hand side wall near the front 7,fig4 #dca7 and bend it wide open 7,fig4 #dcb74 ,make ,doorknobs of large-sized beads1 and fasten one on each side of both doors with a strong1 heavy piece of broom-straw run through and glued in a hole punctured through the door with a coarse darning needle or hat-pin4 ,slide a bead on each end of the broom-straw and glue them securely in place4 ,strengthen the hinges of each door with a narrow strip of thin white cotton cloth pasted lengthwise on the open door1 half on the door and half on the wall4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dbi4--,two high and one ordinary window in back wall of second box4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dcj4--,windows in second box opened4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dca4--;,door in right-hand wall of second box4 ,in the third box 7,fig4 #dbf7 cut a large window through the back wall four and one-half inches high and three and one-fourth inches wide4 ,fig4 #dcc shows this window in detail with one shutter open and one closed4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dcb4--;,door opened4 ,excellent ,window ,glass ,can ,be ,made of white tissue paper cut to fit the various windows1 allowing one-fourth of an inch extension on all four sides4 ,immerse the paper thoroughly on both sides in oil2 with a dry1 clean cloth wipe off the oil2 again immerse the papers1 let them remain in the oil for some minutes and a second time wipe the oil from both sides of each paper4 ,this makes the paper almost transparent4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dcc4--,window in detail with one shutter open and the other closed4 ,the window frame or sash1 is made of strips of black or inked paper1 one long1 narrow strip pasted down the entire centre length of each window glass and a wider strip fastened across the first strip at the centre1 from side to side of the glass 7,fig4 #dcd74 ,keep the glass and the sash divisions perfectly smooth while fastening them together4 ,when all are ready1 close the shutters of each room in turn1 and place first one and then another side flat down on top of the table and brush a little glue all around the edges of the window opening 7,fig4 #dce72 lay the glass over the opening1 making sure that the edges of the glass extend evenly out on the wall surface from all sides4 ,do not rub the glass1 press it tightly down with a dry cloth4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dcd4--,window glass4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dce4--,opening of window ready for glue4 ,after the windows have been glazed cut strips of fresh1 smooth1 ordinary wrapping-paper1 not less than one-fourth of an inch wide1 and cover the edges of each window glass with the strips1 paste them on straight and even to form woodwork around the window as well as to cover the edges of the glass 7,fig4 #dcf74 ,fit the second box 7,fig4 #dbe7 in the first one 7,fig4 #dbd71 mark and cut off the portion of the first box 7,fig4 #dbd7 extending beyond the front of ,fig4 #dbe2 do the same with the third box 7,fig4 #dbf71 that all three boxes may be of equal depth1 and when fastened together the long front line may be straight and even4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dcf4--,paper woodwork window frame4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dcg4--,kitchen4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dch4--,the living-room4 ,if ,you ,want the ,doll ,house to ,last for ,years1 reinforce the building with strips of wood 7,a ,b ,c1 ,fig4 #dbd2 ,d ,e ,f1 ,fig4 #dbe2 ,g ,h ,i1 ,fig4 #dbf74 ,where any two strips meet1 glue the ends together and fasten to the pasteboard walls4 ,if you cannot obtain very thin strips of wood1 use strips of pasteboard as stiff as wood4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dci4--,the bedroom4 ,be sure that your flour paste has boiled well and is strong and thick1 for fastening the three rooms together4 ,give the kitchen 7,fig4 #dcg7 a generous layer of paste down the inside edge of the back wall and along the edge of the floor at the open side2 then fit the left-hand edge of the floor and back wall of the living-room 7,fig4 #dch7 over the paste and press it firmly in place4 ,fasten the bedroom 7,fig4 #dci7 on the right-hand side of ,fig4 #dch in the same manner4 ,close the little shutters and ,place the ,doll ,house on the ,floor of a real room1 tight up against the wall2 then put weights along on the inside edges of the floor of the toy living-room and pile books up close against the back wall2 at the same time do not press the side walls out of plumb2 keep them straight4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ddj4--,the bottom of the house is like this ,when the house is perfectly dry1 tack one thin strip of wood across the entire length of the top of the back wall of the house from end to end4 ,you can manage this very readily by turning the house and laying the back wall flat on the table1 the top edge of the wall barely covering the strip of wood2 then you can tack at long intervals from the inside of the wall and fasten the pasteboard walls to the wood4 ,be sure to glue the ends of the side wall strips securely to the back wall strip4 ,set the house upright in proper position and tack thin strips of wood along the under edge of the bottom of the house4 ,fit one strip under the house at a time and tack from the inside of the house through the pasteboard floor into the wood4 ,make the ends of the upright side wall strips fast to the underfloor strip4 ,when finished1 the bottom of the house should resemble ,fig4 #ddj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dda4--;,cut the paper like this for the frieze4 ,make the ,frieze for every room of three strips of tissue paper cut five-eighths of an inch wide4 ,fold each separate strip crosswise through the centre2 again fold through the centre1 and fold a third time1 making eight layers of paper4 ,cut the folded strip like ,fig4 #dda1 unfold1 and you will have ,fig4 #ddb4 ,try for a different pattern in each room1 and let the colors vary4 ,a soft yellow for kitchen1 sage green for living-room1 and a light1 warm yellow pink for bedroom are a pleasing variety4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ddb4--;,frieze opened out4 ,brush a thin layer of paste the width of the frieze along the top edge of the walls of the kitchen 7,fig4 #dbd7 and fasten on the yellow frieze4 ,do the same with the living-room1 fastening on the green frieze 7,fig4 #dbe71 and in the bedroom the pink frieze 7,fig4 #dbf74 ,cut a ,rug for the ,living-,room from sage-green tissue paper2 make it ten inches long and seven and one-half inches wide4 ,fold the paper lengthwise through the centre1 then crosswise through the centre1 and a second time crosswise1 making eight layers4 ,cut according to ,fig4 #ddc1 unfold once 7,fig4 #ddd71 and cut the designs ,k and ,n2 fold diagonally the loose corners ,l according to dotted line and cut design ,m 7,fig4 #dde74 ,open out the rug 7,fig4 #ddf74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ddc4--;,cut through all layers of rug4 ,cover the required space on the living-room floor with a thin layer of paste1 place the rug down over it1 using both hands1 to avoid wrinkles4 ,with the same kind of wrapping-paper used for the woodwork you can make projecting window-sills4 ,fold and crease the paper into a narrow box-lid long enough to extend across the window1 including the woodwork2 glue one of the lengthwise turned-down edges on the wall below the window glass4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ddd4--;,cut out designs ,k and ,n4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dde4--;,cut out design ,m4 ,make three ,shelves for ,books1 with the ends of the shelves turned up to hold the books in place4 ,fasten the lengthwise turned-down edge of the first shelf on the wall three-quarters of an inch below the high window in the living-room1 and paste the other two shelves below at short distances apart4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ddf4--,the rug for the living-room4 ,you can easily make tiny books of several pieces of folded paper cut the desired size and sewed together through the centre fold4 ,hang red ,tissue ,paper ,curtains in the living-room1 white tissue-paper curtains in the bedroom1 and yellow ones in the kitchen1 as seen in ,fig4 #ddg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ddg4--;,house ready for spool furniture4 ,little shelves over the tops of the doors may be made in like manner1 also a cunning little three-cornered bracket to fit the corner of the room for holding a tiny ,japanese vase of satiny yellow ware1 the straight up-and-down kind1 made of a three-fourth-inch length section of common straw pasted on a wee round disk of paper4 ,fill the vase with tiny red paper flowers fastened on broom-straws4 ,,chapter ,,xxvii ,,the ,,making ,,of ,a ,,bayberry ,,candle ,,growing wild all along our eastern coast from ,nova ,scotia to ,florida is the bayberry-bush1 once well known and valued1 now overlooked and almost forgotten1 although a wealth of sweet smelling wax is held in its tiny berries4 ,a quart of bayberries1 a little time1 a little trouble1 and we have a beautiful green wax candle1 hard1 brittle and smooth1 that hot weather will not melt and whose expiring flame yields an incense sweet and aromatic4 ,there is a peculiar joy in using the raw material fresh from ,mother ,nature's hands and starting at the beginning of things--a joy unknown to those who work only with materials that are manufactured--and to get the most out of the work of making bayberry candles you must begin with the bayberries4 ,first locate your ,bayberry-,bushes2 then1 just the time when out-of-door exercise begins to be a delight1 the latter part of ,september or early in ,october1 gather the berries and take them home for future use4 ,the bayberries1 which seem to be nothing but tiny stones covered with a coating of wax1 do not decay quickly1 but shrivel up into small gray pellets that will keep1 it is said1 a year or more4 ,illustration3 ,the ,fragrance of the ,steaming ,bayberry ,fills the ,house4 ,look for a bush that is stiff and irregular1 generally growing low in closely crowded patches like the blueberry1 though at times reaching the height of eight feet4 ,it appears to thrive best and is most often seen in sandy soil1 but it will grow in almost any kind and flourish even amid the rocks on a barren hillside4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ddh4--,the bayberry leaf looks like this4 ,the ,leaves are oblong and from two to three and a half inches in length 7,fig4 #ddh74 ,they usually have several teeth1 or notches1 near the tip and are quite narrow at the base4 ,sometimes they are scattered and again in close bunches4 ,the young leaves are a pale green frequently tinged with red2 when matured they are a bright green1 glossy1 and of a leathery texture and they are very fragrant when crushed in the hands4 ,the bark is brownish gray and the young stems light1 or golden brown4 ,the ,berries are quite small and grow in thick clusters on short stems4 ,fig4 #ddi gives the berries1 drawn from nature and of actual size4 ,they are green at first1 but1 when ripe1 turn a light silvery gray4 ,as it will take about one quart of berries to make one candle you may adapt your picking to the number of candles you want4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ddi4--,these are the bayberries1 actual size4 ,keep the berries in a dry place until ,you are ,ready to ,make your ,candles1 then into a six-quart preserve-kettle pour three quarts of berries and fill to the brim with cold water4 ,this allows two quarts of water to one quart of berries4 ,put the kettle on the range and let it boil steadily four hours--actually boil1 remember--and whenever the water gets three inches below the brim fill it up with hot water4 ,the boiling berries will perfume the house with a spicy balsamic odor that is delightful4 ,when the four hours are up set the kettle back and let the berries simmer for an hour or two1 then farther back where it will simply keep hot4 ,at night take them off the range and set away to cool without removing them from the kettle4 ,the cooling down from the boiling point to the point where the wax begins to form should be very gradual to obtain the best results1 therefore the simmering and keeping hot after boiling4 ,having put the berries away for the night1 try to forget them1 and do not be tempted to disturb the wax as it forms and floats in little cakes on top of the water1 for breaking through the gathering crust will cause much of the wax to sink and cling to the berries beneath4 ,when left undisturbed until morning1 the wax forms into a large cake1 hard and ready to be lifted out4 ,the ,bayberry ,wax is never1 at first1 free from impurities1 such as bits of dried leaves1 stems and occasionally whole berries1 and it must be strained4 ,break up the wax and put it in a porcelain-lined1 shallow saucepan and set it on the range where it will melt slowly2 then strain through a fine wire strainer into a shallow bowl or soup-plate4 ,let the wax become quite cold and hard1 melt and strain again1 this time through a piece of cheese-cloth or fine sheer lawn4 ,so much for the bayberry wax4 ,but there must also be ,candle-,moulds for making bayberry candles1 and not many of us possess these old-fashioned treasures4 ,even if you happen to be one of the fortunate few1 you will find it takes a great deal of the precious wax to fill these old moulds1 and the candles made in them are really larger than you need2 so the home-made candle-moulds will be best in any case4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dej4--;,cut a strip of paper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dea4--;,bring the edge of the paper over the candle4 ,from a sheet of legal-cap writing-paper cut a strip eleven and a half inches long and four inches wide 7,fig4 #dej74 ,take an ordinary adamantine half candle1 which is neither tallow nor wax1 and1 placing the paper on the table1 short edge toward you1 lay the candle down on it and bring the edge of the paper over the candle1 as in ,fig4 #dea4 ,press the paper down firmly and roll the candle away from you1 in this way wrapping the paper closely around it4 ,if the edges are not even1 unwrap and try again4 ,to have a perfect mould you must keep one edge of the paper exactly on a line with the bottom edge of the candle4 ,when the paper is wrapped around the candle to within one inch of the end of the paper1 brush glue across the end of the paper as in ,fig4 #deb4 ,bring the edge over the roll and press down 7,fig4 #dec74 ,take another candle of the same size1 stand it on a piece of paper and1 with a lead-pencil1 draw around the bottom edge1 pressing the pencil point close to the candle4 ,cut around the circle you have made1 leaving a border on its edge half an inch wide1 as in ,fig4 #ded1 and slash the border up to the inner circle1 as in ,fig4 #dee4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #deb4--,pass a brush dipped in strong glue over the end4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dec4--;,bring the edge over and press down4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ded4--,leave a border on the edge of the circle4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dee4--,slash the circle4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #def4--,lap them in regular order4 ,draw another circle1 this time using the roll with the candle in it to mark the size1 and cut around it1 leaving a border three-quarters of an inch wide1 then slash the border as you did the first4 ,cover the laps of ,fig4 #dee with glue1 set the roll containing the candle exactly within the penciled circle1 and turn up the laps1 one at a time1 lapping them over one another in regular order1 as in ,fig4 #def4 ,hold the laps in place until they are firmly glued to the roll1 then make a dot with your pencil on the bottom exactly in the centre of the circle1 and lay the roll aside for the glue to harden while you prepare ,the ,candlewicks4 ,candlewick comes in balls4 ,it is composed of cotton strands which must be braided to make a finished wick4 ,cut from the wick several pieces nine inches long1 select three strands for each candle1 tie them together in bunches of threes1 and braid1 as shown in ,fig4 #deg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #deg4--;,braid the wick4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #deh4--;,cut two notches in the top4 ,take the candle from the roll1 and in the top edge of the roll cut two notches directly opposite each other 7,fig4 #deh71 then melt the candle and pour it while hot into the mould1 emptying it again directly4 ,this will give the inside a coating of wax which will keep the paper from absorbing the bayberry wax4 ,puncture a small hole through the dot in the bottom of the mould and1 after waxing the end to stiffen it1 thread one of the wicks through the hole from the outside4 ,cut off the knot and draw the wick up to within half an inch of the end1 then separate the strands1 spread them out flat and glue them to the bottom 7,fig4 #dei74 ,glue the last disk you made1 over the wick on the bottom of the mould1 arranging the laps in order as you did those of the first4 ,be very careful that none of the slashes run even the shortest distance across the bottom1 and do not use the moulds until the glue is perfectly hard4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dei4--;,glue the wick to the bottom4 ,you will need a separate mould for each candle1 and when all are ready ,make a ,stand of a ,box4 ,in the bottom of the box1 cut three round holes just large enough to admit the candle-moulds 7,fig4 #dfj74 ,set the box in a small meat-platter to catch any spilled wax1 and slip three moulds into the holes1 allowing them to stand on the plate4 ,draw the wick of each up tightly and run a long hat pin through all three1 resting the pin in the notches at the top and bringing each wick in the middle of its mould 7,fig4 #dfa74 ,if this is done properly the wicks will not sag1 but will be held taut by the pin4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfj4--;,cut three holes in the box4 ,break up and ,melt the ,bayberry ,wax slowly1 never allowing it to get hot enough to smoke1 and fill each mould up to the hat pin4 ,in a short time the wax will settle and leave a hollow at the top of the candle4 ,fill up the hollow each time this occurs until the wax remains even across the top4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfa4--,run a hat pin through the wick4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfb4--,peel off the paper4 ,leave the candles in their moulds until they are hard and almost1 but not quite cold1 then draw the hat pin from the wicks and1 taking one mould1 begin at the top and peel off the paper1 carrying it around and around spirally1 as in ,fig4 #dfb4 ,insert the blade of a penknife between the bottom of the candle and the bottom of the mould1 and cut around the edge4 ,remove first one layer of the bottom1 then the other layer1 after which you can draw the candle from the remainder of the mould4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfc4--,the bayberry candle is finished4 ,cut the bottom end of the wick close to the candle1 and also trim off the top of the wick1 making it about one inch long above the candle 7,fig4 #dfc74 ,,chapter ,,xxviii ,,water ,,toys--,,little ,,wax ,,people ,,that ,,swim ,,and ,,ride ,,on ,,rafts ,,these little wax people are very fond of the water2 in fact they are more at home and far happier in the water than when on land4 ,some of the wax girls and boys will be content to sit on the edge of the shore with their feet in the water2 others will cling with both hands to the life-rope and dance up and down as the little waves dash upon them1 though you will find that the more daring ones are not satisfied with jumping1 but will often turn completely over while still grasping the rope4 ,the ,patterns for the ,little ,people are given in ,figs4 #dfd1 #dff1 #dgg and #dhj4 ,cut ten girls from ten pieces of folded white writing-paper after first tracing the lengthwise half of ,fig4 #dfd on half of the paper 7,fig4 #dfe74 ,cut ten boys 7,fig4 #dff7 from white writing-paper 7,fig4 #dfg74 ,paint each girl's hair a different color1 varying from light brown to raven black1 from golden blond to dark auburn4 ,paint their bathing dresses red1 blue1 pink1 orange1 brown1 green1 yellow1 purple1 striped red and white1 and spotted blue and white4 ,paint the boys' bathing suits in a similar manner2 mark the features of both girls and boys in ink1 then color face1 hands1 arms1 legs and feet pink4 ,use water-colors1 and paint the back as well as the front of the dolls4 ,when the paint is dry1 take two girls and two boys and bend their arms forward at the shoulders2 bend several dolls in a sitting position2 take others and bend one leg forward and one backward1 as if they were walking1 and bend the hands together in front on those you wish to dive into the water from a height4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfd4--,the girl bather4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfe4--,this is the way to cut out the girl4 ,when all are ready1 ,dip ,each ,doll in ,melted ,wax4 ,one-half a wax-candle will be sufficient for the work4 ,be sure that each doll is completely covered on both sides with wax1 and instead of paper dolls you will have twenty funny little wax dolls1 the coloring showing distinctly through the wax4 ,with a coarse needle and thread make ,a ,toy ,life ,rope and string on the thread four dolls with arms bent forward--a boy1 a girl1 a boy and a girl--by piercing the hands of each with the needle and drawing the thread through4 ,in this way they are made to hold on to the thread rope4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dff4--,the boy bather4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfg4--,the paper is folded for cutting out the boy4 ,choose a clear1 shallow pool or the edge of a pond for ,the ,bathing ,place ,tie the thread to a stick1 the lower end of which must be fastened securely in the ground under water while its top end stands out above the water4 ,hold the loose end of the thread taut in one hand as you carefully slide the bathers along the life rope until all stand in shallow water4 ,the life rope reaches from the land out into the water4 ,stir the water and cause the waves to rise while you keep the thread moving up and down to make the dolls jump and frolic like real bathers 7,fig4 #dfh74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfh4--,the bathers are having fun4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dfi4--,this strip is for the lighter4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgj4--;,a lighter for the raft4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dga4--,second lighter is in place4 ,for the ,raft make fifteen paper lighters of strips of writing paper nine inches long and three-quarters of an inch wide 7,fig4 #dfi74 ,begin at one corner and roll the paper into a long round stick2 fold over the top to keep the lighter from unrolling 7,fig4 #dgj74 ,dip each lighter in melted wax until it is completely coated all over2 then wax two pieces of common string1 each one a generous half yard in length4 ,tie or cross the centre of each string on a waxed lighter one inch from each end4 ,lay this lighter on a table in front of and parallel to you2 place another lighter up against the ties1 allowing one string from each tie to come over and one under the second lighter 7,fig4 #dga74 ,cross the two lengths of each string over the last lighter1 bringing the lower string up and the upper string down 7,fig4 #dgb72 then lay another lighter up against the crossed strings1 carrying the strings in turn over this lighter 7,fig4 #dgc74 ,again bring the lower string up and the upper string down before placing in another lighter1 and always alternate the large and small ends of the lighters as in ,fig4 #dgd in order to have them equally balanced and to avoid bringing all the small ends on one side and the large ends on the other side of the raft4 ,continue crossing the strings and adding lighters until fourteen are bound into a float2 then tie the ends of the strings on each line securely together 7,fig4 #dge71 and your work will be ready for the fitting of the little mast1 which must stand erect at one end of the raft4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgb4--,lower string up and upper string down4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgc4--,string crossed and carried over third lighter4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgd4--;,alternate large and small ends of lighters4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dge4--;,bind the raft together4 ,use the remaining lighter1 which is the fifteenth1 for the mast2 flatten out the large end and slide it through the central opening or crack of the raft between the seven lighters on each side2 then bend the flat end of the mast along the under side of the next lighter1 up through the next space1 over the next lighter and down through the forward space4 ,weaving it over and under the lighters of the raft keeps the mast firm and steady 7,fig4 #dgf74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgf4--,the raft is launched with lumberman on board4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgg4--,the little lumberman4 ,make a ,little ,lumberman like ,fig4 #dgg4 ,fold a piece of white writing paper2 trace one-half of the lumberman on it 7,fig4 #dgh71 and cut out the figure4 ,when he has been painted and waxed1 stand him by the mast with one arm around it4 ,weave his feet in the raft as you wove the mast1 and he will stand up as straight as a good soldier 7,fig4 #dgf74 ,launch the ,raft on the water2 it will dance merrily over the waves1 and you can have some of the other wax children climb up and sit on the raft as it goes floating about4 ,should the children tumble off into the water1 let them swim for a while1 for that is what they want to do4 ,then you can help them on the raft again or bring them to land4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgh4--;,half of the lumberman4 ,when the raft is riding the waves1 the four bathers holding on the life-line and the other wax girls and boys playing in the sand1 wading and diving in the water1 let a mermaid come slowly swimming through the water toward them4 ,make the ,mermaid of paper and her flowing tresses1 also of paper4 ,mermaids are famous for their beautiful hair1 which they seem to be always combing with a golden comb4 ,your mermaid1 though1 must be content to swim and enjoy herself without the golden comb4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dgi4--;,fold the paper and cut like this4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhj4--,the mermaid4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dha4--,the mermaid's hair in two parts4 ,fold a piece of white writing paper2 trace the lengthwise half of the figure on it 7,fig4 #dgi7 and cut out the mermaid 7,fig4 #dhj72 then cut two pieces of rather long1 finely fringed paper 7,fig4 #dha7 for the hair1 and paint them golden brown on both sides4 ,paint the back of the mermaid's head and the hair around her face the same color4 ,mark the features with ink2 when dry1 color the face1 arms and body pink2 paint the remaining part of the figure gray4 ,after the paint has dried mark fish scales from the waist down2 then glue the straight top fringe of hair across the centre of the back of the mermaid's head from side to side4 ,glue the other piece at the extreme top of the back of the head4 ,after the mermaid is thoroughly dry1 bend all of the hair out from her head4 ,do not allow any of it to lie down flat4 ,bend the body a little backward in a curve from the waist-line1 the arms forward2 then wax the mermaid1 hair and all 7,fig4 #dhb74 ,when the mermaid is in the water1 the little wax children will make friends with her1 and she will perhaps tell them fairy stories of the beautiful life under the waves4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhb4--,the mermaid has flowing tresses4 ,these water toys will last a long time if well cared for and kept in a cool place where the wax will not melt4 ,illustration3 ,the ,process is ,very ,simple4 ,,chapter ,,xxix ,,how ,,to ,,weave ,,without ,a ,,loom ,method ,invented by the ,author ,,rugs1 portires1 table covers1 bedspreads1 hammocks1 in fact1 almost anything that can be woven of rags1 can be woven without a loom4 ,any one can do it1 for the process is extremely simple and all that is required is a board1 a paper of tacks and some rags cut in strips4 ,these may be old rags or new1 silk1 cotton or wool1 and the piece may be woven heavy or light1 in a close weave or a loose one1 to suit its intended purpose4 ,many colors or few can be used1 and the patterns can be as varied as the colors1 for any design in straight lines can be followed in the weaving4 ,a snip of the scissors will cut off one color1 a stitch or two insert another1 and so the pattern grows4 ,it is quick work and you will find it very absorbing as you sit amid your vari-colored rags and see them grow beneath your fingers into harmoniously colored hangings or soft1 warm rugs4 ,a ,board forty inches long will answer for weaving anything one yard or less in width and is of a convenient size to handle4 ,the one-yard width is what an ordinary loom produces1 but if you would have your rug or portire wider there is no reason why the board should not be longer4 ,to prevent the material from catching1 your board must be smooth on both sides and on the edge and it should be as wide as possible4 ,a good-sized pastry board is excellent for weaving a piece less than twenty-two inches in width4 ,rags are ,used for both warp and woof2 if old and soft they should be more tightly packed than when new and firm4 ,the warp is composed of the strips which run up and down in the work1 the woof of those that are woven in and out across the warp1 and the process is like that of weaving a splint basket4 ,the following directions are for making ,a ,blue and ,white ,cotton ,rug for bedroom or bathroom4 ,heavy1 new canton flannel is a good material for the rug and it is better to have new goods where the weave1 as in this case1 is to be smooth and flat4 ,cut the canton flannel1 do not tear it1 into strips half an inch wide1 but do not sew the strips together1 and make into balls as for loom weaving2 piece them as needed while the work progresses4 ,draw a straight line the whole length of the board one inch below the top edge1 then along this line ,tack the ,warp ,as there is to be a blue border four inches wide1 entirely around the rug1 the warp at first must be all blue4 ,take one strip of the blue and tack it on the line at the upper left-hand corner of the board about two inches from the side edge4 ,leave one end of the warp longer than the other and drive the tack only part of the way in 7,fig4 #dhc74 ,give the strip two twists toward you1 close to the tack1 and fasten it down with another tack on the line just half an inch from the first tack4 ,see ,fig4 #dhd4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhc4--,tack one strip of blue on the line4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhd4--;,fasten it down with another tack4 ,fasten your strips on in this way with the tacks half an inch apart and you will have eight ends or eight strips of warp which will form the side border4 ,for the top border cut the blue strips into ten-inch pieces1 twist them at the middle so that the ends will be of an even length1 and tack them along the line as far as you wish the centre to extend2 then add the longer strips of warp for the other side border1 as in ,fig4 #dhe4 ,to the ends of the short blue warp sew strips of white1 lapping the ends with the blue on top4 ,sew them securely like ,fig4 #dhf and whip the end edges to make them lie perfectly flat4 ,this will give a white centre of warp with a blue border at the top and sides4 ,draw each strip of warp down until it is smooth and taut and tack it near the bottom edge of the board4 ,be very careful to have the warp of the border and the centre measure the same distance across the bottom as across the top and keep each strip in a straight line from the top 7,fig4 #dhg74 ,frequent measurements while weaving will keep your rug true and prevent narrowing between the two rows of tacks4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhe4--,this will make a border4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhf4--,sew the pieces securely4 ,when the warp is ready take a strip of blue and begin ,to ,weave4 ,tack the end of the strip1 which is now the warp1 a little to the left and a trifle below the upper left-hand tack 7,fig4 #dhg7 and1 starting under the first strip of warp1 weave it in and out several times2 then draw the warp out its full length as you do a needle and thread after taking several stitches4 ,keep the warp flat and even when it is woven and push it up close to the tacks4 ,weave across in this way1 always under one and over the next1 and drawing out the end of the woof every little while4 ,when you have reached the last strip of warp on the right1 turn the woof over it and weave back again in the same manner 7,fig4 #dhg74 ,the woof for this rug is entirely of blue1 and as you weave across the white warp you will find that it makes a blue and white checker-board centre4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhg4--,keep the warp perfectly straight4 ,when you have woven as much as you can between the two rows of tacks1 take the tacks out1 ,move the ,woven ,part ,up and tack across again along the second or third row of woof from the bottom1 putting a tack through the woof into each strip of warp2 then draw the warp down as at first and tack in place4 ,fig4 #dhh shows the two rows of tacks after the rug has been moved up and also the effect of the checker-board weaving and blue border4 ,this manner of moving up the woven part makes it possible to weave any length you may desire4 ,lengthen the ,warp as you weave by sewing on new pieces1 and when the centre is almost as long as you want it1 cut off the white warp evenly and sew on blue1 then weave until the border at the bottom is the width of that at the top and sides4 ,cut off the woof that is left after weaving the last row1 and1 turning in the end1 sew it securely to the last row of warp4 ,cut ,off the ,warp1 leaving ends about one and one-half inches long2 turn each end of the warp over the last row of woof and sew it down4 ,one end will turn on one side of the rug1 the next on the other side1 as splints turn over the edge in binding off a splint basket4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhh4--;,after the rug has been moved up4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dij4--,rug ,woven by the ,author4 ,it is best to cut off one end of the warp and sew it down before cutting the next1 as this will prevent the woof from slipping out of place during the binding off4 ,tuck each end of the warp under the row of woof just above it and sew again4 ,fig4 #dhi shows how this is done4 ,g1 ,h and ,i are the ends of the warp cut off evenly1 ,f is an end turned up and sewed to the bottom row of woof4 ,e is an end which is to turn under and be brought up on the other side of the rug4 ,d has been turned up1 sewed to the last row of woof and is just being slipped under the third row of woof1 ,j4 ,c is turned under and fastened in place on the other side of the rug1 and ,b has been turned up1 sewed1 tucked under the third row of woof and sewed again4 ,the end is shown above the woof to make the idea plainer1 but in reality it should be hidden under the woof4 ,when the last end of the warp has been secured and the first end of the woof 7,letter ,a1 ,fig4 #dhg7 has been turned over and sewed to the warp1 your rug is finished and will look like ,fig4 #dij4 ,this rug is photographed from one made by the writer on a pastry board4 ,its size is twenty-two by thirty-four inches4 ,three-quarters of a yard of white canton flannel and one yard and a half of blue were used for weaving4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dhi4--;,finish off the end of the rug in this way4 ,to ,make a ,heavier ,rug with the flat weave1 double the warp4 ,that is1 lay one piece of warp directly on top of another1 giving two thicknesses to each strip4 ,a close weave is made by using soft material1 tacking the strips close together for the warp and pushing the woof up tightly1 crushing it together as in loom weaving4 ,diamonds1 squares and ,indian zigzag patterns are easy and you can work out others quite original with yourself4 ,,chapter ,,xxx ,,how ,,to ,,make ,,your ,,own ,,easter ,,cards ,,and ,,gifts ,,everything awakens with new life and rejoices on ,easter2 and the dear old ,earth smiles with sympathy and brings her offering of sweet flowers4 ,it is the day when all people1 little and big1 young and old1 should be filled with joy1 because ,easter means the ,resurrection4 ,it means life1 light and immortality4 ,it is the blest assurance and certainty that love and goodness are the realities of life2 far more precious are they than the inanimate material things you can see and touch4 ,but we can use material things to convey to our friends the invisible1 wonderful good of love1 joy1 kindness1 sympathy1 tenderness1 and friendship4 ,a simple1 inexpensive ,easter card may carry with it happiness1 for 8it is sweet to be remembered10 and you can think of many designs from which to choose a cheery greeting to send to every one4 ,cards ,made to ,represent ,easter ,flowers are always welcome4 ,trace ,fig4 #dia on heavy paper2 paint the flowers to resemble as nearly as possible the natural blossoms1 shading the lily lightly and coloring the passion flower in natural hues4 ,paint the violet a light blue purple and its foliage green4 ,when dry cut out the design2 then bend the card at the dotted lines that each flower may stand erect1 supported by the blank back piece in tent-like fashion4 ,when bent the card will form three tents in a row1 with the smallest in front1 as in ,fig4 #dib4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dia4--,pattern of standing flower card4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dib4--,the ,easter flower card4 ,if you are not able to paint the flowers satisfactorily1 use any colored1 printed flowers you happen to have1 either the embossed ones that come for scrap books1 or those cut from colored advertisements or newspapers4 ,select three different blossoms or groups of flowers and1 taking the largest first1 lay it down flat on a strip of stiff paper with the stems or lower part toward the edge of the paper2 then run a pencil line entirely around the edge of the flower2 this will give a blank enclosed by the outline of the flower4 ,place the same blossom on the paper again1 being sure to bring the top of the flower to meet the top of the outline flower1 in order that the two parts may fit2 then make a second tracing4 ,examine the lily in ,fig4 #dia and you will understand more clearly4 ,unless the two flower tops meet1 one side of the flower tent will be upside down4 ,place the middle-sized blossom on the paper with the lower part next to the lower portion of the first and largest flower1 in the same way that the back support of the passion flower meets the lily stems in ,fig4 #dia4 ,trace this twice as you did the first design4 ,the last and smallest flower must be traced in like manner4 ,notice in ,fig4 #dia that the leaves of the violet meet the lower part of the passion flower1 while the blossom of the violet meets the outline of the blossom4 ,when you comprehend the principle the work will be very easy4 ,paste each bright blossom immediately in front of its back support2 then cut out the entire long card and bend it into three tents which will enable the flowers to stand up and look very attractive4 ,these floral cards may be folded and brought together in flat layers1 to be sent by mail without danger of injury4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dic4--,one half of the cross4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #did4--,the other half of the cross4 ,the ,cross is a most appropriate design for ,easter4 ,you can make one of cardboard which will stand alone4 ,cut ,figs4 #dic and #did from stiff paper1 and make the slit down through the top of one and up through the bottom of the other2 then slide the two crosses together by placing ,fig4 #dic at right angles down through the top of ,fig4 #did1 adjust the two pieces and your cross will resemble ,fig4 #die4 ,the card may be closed flat by turning the two crosses until they lie closely against each other4 ,you can decorate this double cross by painting or pasting flowers on it1 or lettering it with the words1 8,easter ,greeting40 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #die4--,put the two halves together in this way4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dif4--,the tulip bud4 ,another new design is ,the ,tulip ,bud 7,fig4 #dif74 ,this you can open at will and make it blossom4 ,open it still further and the petals appear as if ready to fall1 as in ,fig4 #dig4 ,cut ,fig4 #dih of white paper and paint it to resemble a tulip petal2 make five more petals1 then trace ,fig4 #dii on a piece of cardboard1 fit the six petals together and place them on top of the tulip stem 7,fig4 #dii74 ,hold the petals firmly in position while you run a coarse needle and thread through the petals and cardboard back in order to fasten the flowers on the stem4 ,knot the thread on the outside of the petals and also on the wrong side of the pasteboard card4 ,fig4 #ejj shows the knot on the lower portion of the petals4 ,draw the thread tight to keep the petals firmly in place4 ,paint the stem and leaves green and paste a small round piece of paper over each of the knots which fasten the flower on its stem as shown in ,fig4 #eja4 ,when the bit of paper is painted it will never be noticed4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dig4--,the open flower4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dih4--,the tulip petal4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #dii4--,tulip stem and leaves4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ejj4--,the knot in the petal4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eja4--,paste paper over the knots4 ,you can use this idea with another flower if you do not understand painting in water colors4 ,the ,dainty ,bloodroot wildflower blossom is pure white and you can cut the petals of white paper1 and fasten the flowers on gray-green cardboard4 ,paste the stem securely down and sew the petals in place in the same manner as those of the tulip4 ,the bloodroot will look especially pretty when you move the petals and cause the snowy flowers to open4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ejb4--;,half of the egg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ejc4--,the other half of the egg4 ,one of the most beautiful of manufactured ,easter eggs was the one presented to an ,infanta of ,spain some years ago4 ,the ,gospel of ,easter day was inscribed on the inside of the white enamelled shell1 and when a secret spring was touched a little bird would fly out and sing4 ,it was said to have cost four thousand dollars4 ,we can make an ,easter ,egg ,card that will give almost1 if not quite as much pleasure1 for not more than four cents4 ,this will be of pasteboard and will fold flat like the cross1 but when opened a little chicken will sit up on the inside with its beak wide open and its wings lifted as if ready to sing its little chickie song4 ,more than that1 our egg will stand firmly on one end as ,christopher ,columbus made his famous egg stand4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ejd4--,the outline of the chicken4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eje4--,the little chicken will sit up on the inside4 ,trace ,figs4 #ejb1 #ejc and #ejd4 ,slide the first egg 7,fig4 #ejb7 in at right angles through the second 7,fig4 #ejc72 fit the slits into each other4 ,paint the chicken 7,fig4 #ejd7 a soft light yellow1 and when dry make the markings with ink2 then slide the slit at the feet of the chicken diagonally over the lower cross portion of the two eggs and you will have ,fig4 #eje4 ,in ,jerusalem the ,easter ,bells ring out at precisely nine o'clock in the morning1 telling the people that the religious ceremony of the washing of the feet is about to take place in the large court just outside the ,church of the ,holy ,sepulchre4 ,on ,easter morning in our own land the church bells ring out joyously2 and the gladdened note seems to be given unconsciously by the bell ringer1 some of his ,easter joy having entered into his work4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ejf4--;,cut this out of cardboard4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ejg4--,make three of these bells4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ejh4--,the ,easter bell card4 ,our ,easter card of bells is fashioned after the old ,spanish style of architecture1 in which the church bells are often seen suspended in open alcoves which are built up flat above the body of the church4 ,copy ,fig4 #ejf on cardboard and cut it out4 ,make three bells like ,fig4 #ejg and fasten one on each of the three round dots on the church belfry 7,fig4 #ejf74 ,sew the bells in place as you did the tulip petals1 but in this case allow the thread to be a trifle looser that the bells may sway back and forth1 as if ringing1 when you move the card4 ,cut up the slit through the centre of the stand of the card and crease along the dotted line1 bending half of the stand forward and the other half backward4 ,this will give a good platform and the card will stand alone 7,fig4 #ejh74 ,make the belfry 7,fig4 #ejf7 of a warm gray-colored cardboard and gild the cross and bells4 ,when dry indicate a slight shading with pen and ink4 ,here are some original ,easter toys to be used as small gifts or novel dinner cards4 ,let the ,comical ,little ,turtle be the first you make4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eji4--,the turtle without his shell4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eaj4--,two tissue paper strips4 ,draw on heavy writing paper ,fig4 #eji4 ,cut it out1 and from white tissue paper make two strips like ,fig4 #eaj4 ,paint eyes and mouth on the head and mark the feet2 then with strong glue or sealing wax cover the edges of an egg-shell cut lengthwise and place it on ,fig4 #eji2 next fasten a strip of tissue paper 7,fig4 #eaj7 along the side of the turtle between the fore and hind foot1 making the strip reach partly on the egg-shell and partly underneath on the writing paper2 this is to make the egg-shell and the heavy writing-paper adhere more firmly together4 ,fasten the remaining strip on the other side of the turtle in the same way1 bend the head up a little and the tail down1 also bend all the feet down and the result will be a queer little ,easter turtle able to stand alone 7,fig4 #eaa74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eaa4--;,just like a real turtle4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eab4--,such a ridiculous little pig4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eac4--,piggie's tail4 ,now for the ,funny ,little ,pig 7,fig4 #eab74 ,select a good-sized white egg and blow out its contents in this way3 carefully bore a hole at each end of the egg1 enlarging them only sufficiently to enable you to send its contents out of one end by blowing in the hole at the other end of the egg2 this done1 cut from strong1 stiff paper or cardboard diagram1 ,fig4 #eac1 the tail2 ,fig4 #ead1 the fore leg2 ,fig4 #eae1 the hind leg2 ,fig4 #eaf1 the ear4 ,make two ears1 two fore and two hind legs4 ,mark eyes1 nose1 and mouth on the small end of the shell2 curl the tail with a penknife or scissors and glue it on the pig by spreading out the slits and fastening them on the back of the pig2 then in turn glue in place the legs and ears and behold6 the pig 7,fig4 #eab74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ead4--,piggie's fore leg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eae4--,piggie's hind leg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eaf4--,piggie's ear4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eag4--;,an egg-shell spoon4 ,the ,spoon 7,fig4 #eag7 requires a lengthwise half of an egg-shell1 a piece of stiff cardboard and a bit of plain white tissue paper for its manufacture4 ,cut the edges of half a shell evenly all around with a pair of sharp scissors1 being careful not to crack the shell during the operation2 then cut the handle from cardboard 7,fig4 #eah74 ,glue and attach the handle with sealing wax on the outside of the small end of the shell1 bending the handle down a little where it joins the shell1 secure the handle still more tightly in place by fastening a piece of tissue paper 7,fig4 #eai7 over that portion of the handle which is glued to the egg-shell1 allowing the tissue paper to extend out a little beyond either side of the handle and fasten the extensions tight down on the shell4 ,when finished the spoon can be gilded along its edges or otherwise ornamented 7,fig4 #eag74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eah4--;,cut the handle from cardboard4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eai4--,the tissue paper fastening4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebj4--;,a little umbrella4 ,an ,umbrella made of half an egg-shell would protect us from the rain if only it were large enough1 but such an umbrella is a good size for your purpose1 because you desire an odd little toy and here it is 7,fig4 #ebj74 ,to make the umbrella1 cut from paper 7,fig4 #eba71 fold it together as in ,fig4 #ebb1 turn down and outward the upper flaps2 then glue the two sides of the folded handle tightly together2 next fasten the spread-out flaps down on the inside centre of half an egg-shell with sealing wax2 be sure to make the handle come in the middle of the shell1 otherwise the umbrella will lop over a little to one side4 ,the rim and handle may be painted brown or black1 and lines to represent the seams of a real umbrella can be made on the outer surface of the shell4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eba4--;,cut the umbrella handle like this4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebb4--;,fold the handle in this way4 ,the ,doll's ,chair is not difficult to make4 ,cut ,fig4 #ebc from medium-weight paper1 not too heavy1 ornament it as in ,fig4 #ebd or in any other way you may fancy1 then take half an egg-shell and glue the chair seat over the open end with melted sealing wax1 bend the back in an upright position and allow the slit edges of the seat to be bent down on the egg-shell and fasten in place4 ,the bottom of the shell must be levelled off a little and the hole covered with a piece of paper1 in order to make the chair stand up as it should4 ,if tinted paper be used in making this toy it enhances the appearance1 though the colored paper is not necessary1 as white ornamented makes a very pretty little chair4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebc4--,the back and seat of ,dolly's chair4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebd4--;,dolly's chair4 ,strawberry ,the strawberry is in reality a candy box4 ,take a fine-looking egg and blow out its contents1 then dye or paint it red and with black ink mark the dots as in ,fig4 #ebe4 ,next fill the egg-shell with small candies and cover the opening at the top with a piece of green tissue paper cut like ,fig4 #ebf4 ,fasten the paper on the shell with paste used sparingly and only where it is necessary4 ,on the top of the strawberry glue a bow of narrow green ribbon and the candy box will be finished and ready for a unique ,easter gift4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebe4--,the egg-shell strawberry4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebf4--,paste this on top of the strawberries4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebg4--;,a little hanging basket4 ,a ,little ,hanging ,basket can be fashioned from half an egg-shell with narrow ribbon pasted over its edge1 a bow of the ribbon on the bottom and two more at the sides covering the ends of a loop of the same narrow ribbon securely glued on the shell 7,fig4 #ebg74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebh4--;,dolly's cradle4 ,the ,doll's ,cradle 7,fig4 #ebh7 is made by breaking the egg in the desired shape1 first drawing a line with pencil1 so that it may be correct1 then piercing the pencil line with a fine needle4 ,the wee cradle thus formed is pasted on rockers made of stiff paper and bent down at each end 7,fig4 #ebi74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ebi4--;,cut the rockers by this pattern4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ecj4--;,an egg-shell bird's nest4 ,bird's ,nest ,the bird's nest is simply half of an egg-shell1 the outside covered first with a thin coat of glue and then with moss4 ,this is to be filled with candy eggs 7,fig4 #ecj74 ,sail ,boat ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eca4--,the little sail boat4 ,the egg-shell boat will sail very prettily in a basin of water4 ,it is half of a shell1 with a tissue-paper sail 7,fig4 #eca71 the mast cut of stiff paper 7,fig4 #ecb71 folded at the dotted line4 ,fig4 #ecc is the sail cut from colored or white tissue paper4 ,the straight edge of the sail is placed in the fold of the mast and the two halves of the mast pasted together down to the cross line at the bottom4 ,this lower part is slit up1 as in diagram #ecb1 and the flaps bent in opposite direction4 ,these are used for braces in holding the mast upright and are glued to the bottom of the boat4 ,the pennant 7,fig4 #ecd7 is cut of bright-colored tissue paper1 and fastened on the top of the sail 7,fig4 #eca74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ecb4--,make the mast of stiff paper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ecc4--;,a tissue paper sail4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ecd4--,the pennant4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ece4--,the head of the ,mikado4 ,fig4 #ece represents the head of ,the ,mikado fashioned from an egg4 ,the egg must first be pierced at both ends1 and the contents blown out1 leaving the hollow shell2 then a face1 as nearly as possible resembling the ,mikado1 painted on the egg4 ,a narrow strip of black paper 7that encasing needles will answer the purpose7 must be pasted on the back of the head1 and made to stand erect with the top end curled forward as in ,fig4 #ece2 the egg should then be painted black1 except the face1 as seen in the picture4 ,the head must be made to stand in the same manner that ,columbus made his egg stand1 by levelling off a portion of the end4 ,to ,make the ,pin-,cushion 7,fig4 #ecf71 cut two pieces of satin or silk of any desired color by pattern 7,fig4 #ecg72 sew the two pieces together1 leaving a small opening2 fill the bag with bran1 sew up the opening1 and tie around the egg cushion a narrow ribbon matching the color of the cushion1 making a fancy bow at one end1 and a bow and loops at the other4 ,place in pins to form the word 8,easter0 7,fig4 #ecf74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ecf4--,the ,easter egg pin-cushion4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ecg4--;,cut the pin-cushion by this pattern4 ,fig4 #ech shows the head of ,napoleon1 and that you may not be behind the times in your hero worship1 ,i am going to tell how you may make a little ,napoleon for yourself4 ,at least you may make a ,napoleon head1 and ,napoleon's head was really the greatest part of him2 his heart1 ,i fear1 was not so great1 and his body1 we know1 was insignificant4 ,use a goose egg for the head2 the dimensions given for the hat are intended for a large egg4 ,blow the egg from the shell in the manner described4 ,make the largest hole in the small end of the shell and enlarge this hole to the size of a silver dime4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ech4--,napoleon4 ,now1 ,napoleon had what is called a well-balanced head4 ,that was one cause of his greatness2 it could not be upset by anything that went on around him4 ,so1 to make a head that will bear the stamp of ,napoleon's character1 we must contrive to have it keep its position1 or balance2 to stand erect1 unaided and alone1 and it can be done in this way3 ,when the egg has been blown from the shell place the shell in a perfectly upright position1 large end down1 in an egg-cup1 or anything that will hold it steady4 ,into the large hole pour a little melted sealing wax1 and on top of that pour a little melted lead1 or some pieces of shot1 taking care to have the weight fall directly in the centre to make a perfect balance4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eci4--,napoleon's face4 ,fig4 #eci is ,napoleon's face1 which you must draw on one side of the egg with black ink4 ,ink the hair black4 ,blacken the shell on the other side1 too1 for the hair on the back of the head4 ,in drawing the face on the shell remember that the largest end of the shell is the chin1 the smallest end the top of the head4 ,to be sure1 the real ,napoleon never had a hole in the top of his head that we ever heard of1 but the hole in the top of our ,napoleon's head will not show when his hat is on1 and as the hat is to be glued in place no one will ever be any the wiser4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #edj4 ,to make the hat1 or 8,chapeau ,bras10 as ,napoleon would have called it1 and which means a military cocked hat1 you must have some black paper4 ,for the brim a piece five inches square will be needed1 as it measures just that many inches from front to back and from side to side4 ,cut out the brim from pattern 7,fig4 #edj74 ,cut the hole near the centre and cut the slits around it as shown by the heavy lines4 ,bend up the little strips or laps1 as denoted by the dotted line around the hole4 ,the other dotted lines show where the brim is to be turned up front and back1 but the crown must be glued on first4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eda4--;,crown of ,napoleon's ,chapeau bras ,fig4 #eda is the pattern of the crown4 ,from front to back it measures three inches2 from side to side1 at its widest part1 three and a quarter inches2 at the narrowest part the measure is two inches4 ,the heavy line shows where it is to be cut1 the dotted line where it is to be folded4 ,turn in the laps at the sides1 bring them together and paste neatly4 ,fit the crown on the brim1 over the laps of the brim1 and paste the laps of the brim to the inside of the crown4 ,turn up the brim according to the dotted lines on ,fig4 #edj4 ,at the points shown by the crosses on the front of the brim put a drop of paste and bring them up to meet the crosses on the crown of the chapeau4 ,place ,napoleon's chapeau on ,napoleon's head as in ,fig4 #ech1 and glue it to the shell4 ,now set the little hero before you on the table1 touch him with your finger1 and1 if the weight has been well placed1 he will nod and bow1 but his head will always regain its level position4 ,hero though he is1 ,napoleon is the better for a companion1 and we will give him his first wife1 ,josephine1 whom he crowned ,empress of ,france on ,december #b1 #ahje1 the day of his own coronation4 ,to express in a measure the regal dignity of ,josephine on that occasion1 her head must also be held erect2 prepare the shell1 therefore1 as you did the one for ,napoleon's head1 with this difference--place the weight in the small end of the egg-shell1 instead of the large end4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #edb4--;,josephine's face4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #edc4--;,josephine's ,tiara ,illustration3 ,fig4 #edd4--;,crown of ,empress ,josephine ,draw ,josephine's queenly countenance 7,fig4 #edb7 on the egg-shell1 placing her chin at the small end4 ,make her tiara of gold paper1 which you can spangle1 if you like1 to represent the diamonds of which it was composed4 ,fig4 #edc shows how to cut it4 ,fig4 #edd is the pattern for her crown and should also be made of gold paper4 ,paste the two ends of the band of the crown together to form a circle1 then draw the ends of the arches together to meet in the middle1 over the top4 ,fasten these together with needle and thread on which a small glass bead has been strung4 ,the bead will hide the stitches and also take the place of the small cross which occupies that position on the crown of the real ,empress4 ,with your finger curve the arches out as shown in the sketch of the finished head 7,fig4 #ede74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ede4--,the ,empress ,josephine4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #edf4--;,josephine's ,ruff ,the crown and tiara are not fastened together1 but are placed on separately1 for ,josephine wore the diamond tiara when she was crowned4 ,glue the tiara to the head first1 bringing the ends around to meet rather low down at the back2 then set the crown back of the tiara and glue in place4 ,from a piece of white tissue paper cut a ruff1 after pattern 7,fig4 #edf72 crimp the ruff with the blade of a knife or scissors and glue to the back and sides of ,josephine's head4 ,these little heads will be very amusing if you place them opposite each other and set them nodding and bowing1 ,josephine to ,napoleon and ,napoleon to ,josephine4 ,the materials used for the ,good-morning ,chick are simply an egg-shell1 a piece of wire1 some light-yellow worsted1 two black beads and a small piece of writing paper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #edg4--;,cut off the small end4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #edh4--,the chicken's head4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #edi4--,wrap the rings with worsted4 ,select a nice large egg1 and with a sharp knife cut off the small end1 as evenly as possible1 ,fig4 #edg4 ,after emptying the shell rinse it carefully1 and while it is drying make the chicken's head 7,fig4 #edh72 cut from a light quality of cardboard two rings like ,fig4 #edi1 place them together1 and with the worsted wrap the rings over and over1 as shown in ,fig4 #edi1 until the hole in the centre is nearly filled up2 then1 holding it firmly between the forefinger and thumb1 insert the point of a pair of sharp scissors in the outer edge1 slipping it between the two rings2 cut the worsted all the way around1 and1 still holding it firmly1 slide a piece of strong thread between the rings1 and1 drawing it around once1 tie tightly4 ,take the rings from the ball thus made1 and clip and trim it perfectly round4 ,sew the two round black beads on the head for eyes2 make the beak of writing paper after ,figs4 #eej and #eea4 ,fig4 #eej is the upper1 ,fig4 #eea the lower part of beak4 ,pinch into shape as shown by dotted lines2 and with a little mucilage stick the upper end of ,fig4 #eea to the underside of ,fig4 #eej1 as in ,fig4 #eeb4 ,paint the beak a light yellow1 and gum to the head4 ,fig4 #edh shows the head complete4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eej4--,the upper part of the beak4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eea4--,the lower part of the beak4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eeb4--,the beak4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eec4--,use hat-wire for the legs4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eed4--,the foot4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eee4--;,good-morning4 ,holes must now be made in the shell for the legs to come through1 as shown in ,fig4 #edg4 ,this is done by boring carefully with a large1 sharp-pointed needle 7being cautious not to crack the shell in the process71 until the holes are large enough to admit the wire4 ,use a piece of ordinary black hat-wire1 four inches long1 for the legs1 bend in the shape of ,fig4 #eec and slip through the holes in the shell4 ,cut a piece of wire two inches long1 and another one inch in length1 for the foot2 bend in the shape of ,fig4 #eed and fasten to the leg by wrapping tightly with black linen thread4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eef4--,run a line of perforations around the shell4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eeg4--;,fasten the shells together4 ,fit the head in the hole left in the small end of the shell1 and if the work has been well done the chicken will look very natural indeed4 ,the small piece of shell taken from the end will give it a still more cunning appearance if fastened on the chicken's head 7,fig4 #eee74 ,this little trifle makes a very pretty bonbonnire1 as the shell is quite strong enough to hold candy1 and the head may be removed to allow of its being filled or emptied4 ,to make the ,good-night ,chick first blow the egg1 then1 boring with a needle in the manner previously described1 run a line of perforations lengthwise around the shell1 as seen in ,fig4 #eef4 ,this will allow of the shells being opened quite evenly4 ,cover the edges neatly with lutestring ribbon pasted down on both sides like a binding4 ,paste a piece of the same ribbon1 twelve inches long1 across the two halves of the shell1 to connect them1 as in ,fig4 #eeg4 ,make the little chicken1 which should nestle coseyly within the shell1 of two worsted balls1 using rings two inches in diameter for the body4 ,trim the body into a slightly oval shape4 ,the chicken's head is made in the same way as described for 8,good ,morning40 ,glue it to the body4 ,in the illustration 7,fig4 #eeh7 the egg is shown both closed and open1 which will give some idea of what a pretty little gift it really makes4 ,the entire chicken must be glued in the shell as it is not intended to come out4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eeh4--,nestle the chicken coseyly in the shell4 ,,chapter ,,xxxi ,,home-,,made ,,candlesticks ,,if you are working in clay try making a few candlesticks4 ,if you haven't the clay1 why not get some at once and begin this most fascinating work8 ,candlesticks are always decorative2 even the old tin candlestick with its half burnt tallow candle has a certain picturesqueness that the artist recognizes when he chooses that as an accessory to his picture instead of the prosaic oil lamp4 ,then again1 candlesticks give a wide scope to individuality in design1 and that it gives expression to one's originality is one of the greatest charms of pottery making4 ,a potter's wheel is not at all necessary4 ,the primitive method of coiling the clay and gradually1 without hurry1 building it up into the form desired is far the better way for home workers4 ,get ,your ,clay at the nearest pottery where anything finer than flower pots is made1 and if it is a place where they turn out only earthenware ask for their finest clay4 ,very frequently they make a quantity of extra pieces for holiday trade and for these prepare a finer clay than they ordinarily use4 ,fifty pounds of clay will keep you busy a long while and twenty-five pounds will be sufficient for a number of small pieces4 ,it sells at about one and a half cents per pound at most of the potteries4 ,break your dry clay into small pieces with a hammer and then pound to a powder4 ,put it into an earthen crock that has a cover of its own1 and mix with water until it is of the consistency of dough4 ,if you are not to use it immediately1 and it is rather stiff1 make several holes in the clay with your finger1 fill each hole with water1 cover the crock closely with its lid and set away until wanted4 ,illustration3 ,this ,pottery was ,made by the ,author4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eei4--;,cut the clay in two with a knife4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efj4--,put the outside edges together4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efa4--,useful in cutting the clay4 ,when you are ,ready for ,work take out a good sized lump of clay1 put it on a pastry board and knead it like bread4 ,this is to work out all the air and make the grain close and fine4 ,if the clay seems too stiff spread it out in a flat cake1 pour a little water in the middle1 bring the edges together and knead again until the whole piece is softened4 ,when the clay is too soft spread it out and put it in the air where it will soon stiffen4 ,if it is freezing out of doors do not expose the clay but let it dry off in the house4 ,from time to time1 while you are working the clay1 cut the lump in two with a palette knife or ordinary table knife 7,a1 ,b1 ,fig4 #eei74 ,put the outside edges together 7,c1 ,d1 ,fig4 #efj7 and continue kneading4 ,the professional potter has a wire strung above his table and on it cuts his clay quickly and neatly in half1 but a knife will answer very well4 ,you may have a number of ,modelling ,tools or a few1 and you can do very well with two or three contrived by yourself4 ,a wire tool like ,fig4 #efa is useful in cutting away the clay when the walls of a piece are too thick1 but a wire hairpin answers the purpose almost as well4 ,a wooden skewer1 used by butchers for pinning meat1 is also good for some purposes4 ,in my own work one summer1 when far out of reach of modelling tools1 ,i found use for a palette knife1 the handle of an old spoon1 a hairpin and a steel ink eraser with a curved blade4 ,but best of all and most to be depended upon are the fingers1 for these sensitive1 flexible1 natural tools can perform most of the work alone4 ,fig4 #efb is a small jar made entirely with the hands1 no tool of any kind1 save the fingers1 having been used in the modelling4 ,you should have a good ,strong ,table1 one you have no fear of harming1 and that stands firmly and evenly on the floor2 a piece of smooth1 rather thick board about ten inches square upon which to build your pottery and a small pastry board4 ,place the table near a window where there is plenty of light and under it lay a piece of oilcloth to protect the floor2 thus prepared you may plunge into your work and accomplish wonders without disturbing the general order of the room4 ,at a convenient place on the table set a small bowl of water and a cup of slip4 ,the slip is simply clay softened in water until it is about as thick as cream4 ,a large piece of old muslin1 that you can tear in pieces as needed1 should always be at hand1 and a wet sponge on which to wipe your fingers4 ,place your pastry board on the table and when the clay is kneaded lay it to one side and scrape the board1 clearing off all dried particles4 ,unless this precaution is taken crumbs of dry clay are apt to mix with the moist clay and make it rough and gritty4 ,figs4 #efc1 #efd and #efe are three original designs in candlesticks4 ,we will take one of these for a model4 ,fig4 #efc is the simplest and most easily made1 so we will begin with that4 ,have ready a rather deep ,china ,saucer1 tear off a square of muslin large enough to cover the inside of the saucer and to extend over its edge4 ,dip the muslin in the bowl of water and lay it flat in the saucer1 pressing it down as evenly as possible and smoothing out the air bubbles4 ,now take ,a ,large ,handful of ,clay1 roll it between your palms1 lay it on the pastry board in front of you and with an even pressure of your hands roll it back and forth until it lengthens out and forms a snake-like piece a little more than half an inch in diameter 7,fig4 #eff74 ,do not let the roll flatten1 keep it as round as possible and of an equal size from end to end1 then press it with your fingers and flatten the top just enough to take off its roundness4 ,when this is done place one end of the roll narrow side up exactly in the centre of the saucer and make ,a ,close ,coil like ,fig4 #efg1 bringing the edges of the coils together with your thumb nail4 ,when you have coiled one roll make another roll and1 cutting the end of each1 like ,fig4 #efh1 fit them together and make a smooth and even joint4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #egf ,design ,painted on the ,unbaked ,clay4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efe ,a ,leaf ,design4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ege ,the ,little ,pitcher4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efc ,yellow ,candlestick4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efb ,made ,without ,tools4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efd ,hooded ,cobra ,design4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eff4--,roll the clay back and forth4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efg4--,make a close coil4 ,continue to coil the clay until the saucer is filled to the edge1 then build it up one coil higher on the edge and cut the last end of the roll as you did the first4 ,press this end down to join the roll beneath it1 making the joint invisible4 ,now ,dip ,your ,fingers in ,water and rub them gently over the coiled clay in the saucer to smooth it1 but be careful not to get it too wet and not to lower the coil on the edge in the process4 ,if depressions occur fill them with fresh clay joining the edges of the new clay to the coiled clay1 making it one piece with no cracks or seams4 ,in adding clay at any time the new piece must always become one with the old1 else it will crack when dry or in the firing1 and it is best to brush the place to be filled with slip before adding the clay4 ,set your saucer away at this stage of the work until the clay stiffens a little and the piece becomes what is called 8set40 ,it is just here that you must use patience1 for to continue to work while the clay is too soft will frequently spoil the whole thing and the only remedy is to bunch the clay and begin over again4 ,to be successful in the making of pottery one's enthusiasm must be of the kind that will not cool during the necessary waiting periods4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efh4--;,cut the ends like this4 ,when the clay in your saucer has become firm but is still quite pliable1 dip another square of muslin in water1 spread it inside the clay saucer and ,fit in ,another ,saucer of china a trifle smaller than the first4 ,this will give you a pile of three saucers one within the other1 first china1 then clay1 then china4 ,now cover your small board with wet muslin and turn your stack of saucers upside down on the board4 ,lift off the top saucer and you have your clay saucer inverted on top of the smaller china saucer4 ,you will find all the seams of the coil showing on this underside and must join them and make the clay one piece as you did on the inside4 ,with your wire tool 7,fig4 #efa7 or a hairpin1 carefully ,cut ,down the ,parts that seem too thick1 but at the same time beware of making them so thin as to weaken the walls of the saucer4 ,it is better to fill out and make a piece rather heavy than to try at first to obtain the delicacy one naturally desires1 for thin walls often collapse in unaccustomed hands4 ,as you work1 turn the board around and around to be sure the contour is symmetrical4 ,it is often a good thing to raise the work to the level of the eye in order the better to detect inaccuracies of outline4 ,when you have finished the underside and the clay seems firm enough to stand without support1 turn it right side up on the board1 always with the wet muslin between to keep it from sticking4 ,lift out the small saucer which is still in the clay saucer and proceed to remove all traces of the line in the clay made by the ridge on the bottom of the china saucer4 ,this can be done by smoothing down and adding more clay to make a curve instead of an angle4 ,with the wooden skewer make a dot in the centre of the clay saucer1 measuring the distance to be sure it is exact1 then take ,a ,half ,candle1 wrap it spirally and closely with a narrow strip of wet muslin 7,fig4 #efi7 and stand it directly over the mark 7,fig4 #egj74 ,make little crossed lines with a sharp tool1 or hat pin1 around the candle like ,fig4 #ega2 then roll some clay for coiling the candle holder1 flattening the roll as you did for the saucer4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #efi4--,wrap the candle with a strip of wet muslin4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #egj4--,stand the candle in the centre of the saucer4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ega4--,make little crossed lines around the candle4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #egb4--,press the sharpened end of the roll close to the candle4 ,before beginning to coil cover the roughened surface around the candle with slip1 then press one sharpened end of the clay roll onto the saucer close to the candle 7,fig4 #egb7 and bring the roll once around the candle4 ,make crossed lines on top of the coil1 brush with slip and coil again4 ,continue roughening the top of the coil and covering with slip until you have built the holder up a little over two inches from the saucer1 then sharpen the end of your roll and join it to the top 7,e1 ,fig4 #egc74 ,with a brush dipped in slip1 fill up1 to some extent the creases between the coils and make the coil even and round where it may have been pressed out of shape1 for in this part we allow the coil to show4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #egc4--,sharpen the end of the roll and join it to the top4 ,when the walls of the holder are firm enough gently remove the candle and ,smooth the ,inside of the ,holder with a finger wet with slip4 ,if this does not fill up the cracks use a rounded tool1 but be very careful not to press the holder out of shape or enlarge the opening4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #egd4--,make the handle of a coil of clay4 ,make the ,handle of a coil of clay as shown in ,fig4 #egd4 ,first the small coil1 joining the base of the holder to the saucer1 then the larger coil which connects the small coil1 and the inside and the outside of the saucer4 ,use your first finger for keeping the hole in the centre of the large coil the proper size4 ,build up the edge of the saucer slantingly to join the inner coil of the handle 7,f1 ,fig4 #egd7 and allow a ridge to extend from the outer coil a short distance along the outside of the saucer 7,g1 ,fig4 #egd74 ,this ,blending of ,decoration with the ,article itself1 making it appear a natural outgrowth from it1 is a law of beauty in modeled decoration1 which should always be kept in mind4 ,no part of a piece of pottery should look as if it were simply stuck on and might drop off again1 but rather as though it were a necessary part of the whole4 ,when your candlestick is in good shape and still moist1 go over it with a camel's-hair brush dipped in water1 smoothing down any little unevenness in this way4 ,sometimes a coating of slip1 well worked in with the brush will give a good surface4 ,set the piece away after this and let it stand undisturbed for several days1 or until the clay has become quite dry and has turned almost white1 then if it is still imperfect in shape ,scrape it ,down with a steel tool or pocket knife4 ,the clay is so easily shaved off at this stage the danger lies in making too deep a cut and the work should be done gradually and patiently4 ,for the final rubbing use a piece of fine emery paper4 ,even this must be carefully handled1 for if pressed heavily on the clay it1 also1 will cut too deeply4 ,do not put your work away to dry in the sun or near a fire4 ,if dried too rapidly the clay will crack4 ,sometimes it will crack when it dries1 never so gradually2 it may be from shrinkage or because the clay has not been sufficiently kneaded4 ,if ,cracks ,occur while the clay is still moist fill in with new clay and slip4 ,if the piece is perfectly dry mix some finely powdered baked clay with water1 making a thick paste1 and fill the opening4 ,you may be able to get the unglazed baked clay at the pottery1 but if not put a thin cake of clay in any kind of a very hot oven and allow it to bake several hours1 then grind to a fine powder4 ,keep this powder in a labelled box that it may always be at hand when needed4 ,it is generally supposed that when a piece of pottery cracks in the firing there is no remedy4 ,this is very likely true with pieces that have been glazed1 but with unglazed ware my own experience has proved that it can be mended4 ,when an unglazed piece comes from the firing showing cracks1 large or small1 mix a thin slip of clay with a little finely powdered flint and run into the cracks until they are more than filled1 then rub or scrape off the surplus4 ,this formula was given me by a prominent art potter who also furnished the mixture4 ,in putting away ,unfinished ,work1 cover with a damp cloth and keep the cloth damp until you are ready to go on with your modeling4 ,once hard the clay can no longer be worked1 and unfinished pottery must always be kept moist4 ,in the case of a piece having handles1 spouts and like projections1 place something under the cloth to hold it away from these parts and prevent its pushing them out of shape4 ,you ,may ,glaze ,your ,candlestick with colored glaze before it is fired or you may have it fired and returned to you in 8the bisque10 when it can be glazed and sent to be fired the second time4 ,one firing really seems all that is necessary for small pieces1 however4 ,fig4 #efc was fired but once1 the glaze having been applied to the unbaked clay and it came from the pottery in a perfectly satisfactory condition1 without crack or blemish4 ,the glaze used for all the pottery in the little group in our full-page illustration1 is ,marshing's soft ,limoges glaze which may be obtained where mineral colors for pottery and china painting are sold4 ,the glaze is transparent when fired and is to be mixed with color unless the piece has underglaze decoration or the clay is colored4 ,the proportion is one part dry color to nine parts dry glaze4 ,both come in powders and must be thoroughly mixed1 then dissolved in a solution of gum arabic4 ,eight and one-half teaspoonfuls of glaze to one-half teaspoonful of underglaze color is sufficient for two candlesticks4 ,apply this with a ,no4 #h camel's-hair brush and give the piece three coats1 waiting each time for one coat to become thoroughly dry before putting on the next4 ,lay the color on evenly and do not allow little streams of glaze to run over the edges4 ,there are various ,other ,methods of ,coloring ,pottery4 ,one is to work the dry color into the moist clay by kneading4 ,for the little pitcher 7,fig4 #ege7 one tablespoonful of raw sienna was thoroughly worked into a lump of clay the size of a large apple and the pitcher then modelled from the colored clay4 ,prepared mineral color was not used1 but dry 8raw or green0 color purchased at an ordinary paint shop4 ,when quite dry the pitcher turned a beautiful ivory yellow1 but became almost terra cotta when fired4 ,the uncolored glaze was dissolved in gum arabic and applied after the first firing1 and the pitcher was fired a second time4 ,another way to color your pottery is to mix the raw color with slip the consistency of cream and with it paint a design on the unbaked clay4 ,a little gum arabic added to the slip will make it adhere more closely and prevent its rubbing off4 ,this must be fired before the uncolored glaze is applied4 ,the little bowl 7,fig4 #egf7 was decorated in this way and the colors used were raw sienna and burnt sienna4 ,but one coat of glaze was given the bowl which makes it look more like old ,indian ware than if it had the very glossy surface4 ,colored pottery 8,in the ,bisque0 or unglazed state is often very beautiful and if designed to hold water or liquid of any kind the inside alone may be glazed1 leaving the outside in its natural dull and porous condition4 ,of the various designs shown here the saucers were used only for ,fig4 #efc1 and the sooner you are able to discard all such aids and depend upon your eye alone to guide your hands the more you will enjoy your work4 ,probably you can have your candlesticks fired at the pottery where you get your clay1 but if you wish to carry on the work and experiment for yourself secure a kiln of your own by all means4 ,illustration3 ,the ,light of the ,fairy ,lamp4 ,,chapter ,,xxxii ,,what ,,to ,,make ,,of ,,bananas1 ,,oranges1 ,,and ,,apples ,,while icy blasts are still sweeping through the cities of the ,north1 while the snow lies deep on the ground1 and the children1 bundled up until little except their pink noses is visible1 are coasting1 sleighing1 and snowballing1 in the ,south soft breezes are sifting through the green leaves of the trees and gently stirring the beautiful flowers blossoming in the warm sunshine4 ,in the orange groves the great golden balls are ripening1 and on the long-leaved banana trees hang the queer bunches of bananas1 growing in their funny upside-down fashion4 ,pineapples1 lemons and many other fruits are there1 all growing and ripening that the children of the ,north may have them when their own delicious strawberries1 peaches and plums have gone4 ,we are very glad of these ,southern fruits1 even the skins seem too good to throw away4 ,and so they are4 ,save ,your ,orange1 and ,banana1 and ,apple ,skins1 too1 and see what delightful things you can make of them4 ,long1 long ago1 before there were any steamboats1 sailboats or even rowboats in the ,british ,isles1 when men's clothes were merely the skins of wild beasts tied on with leather thongs1 the people went on the water in little circular boats called coracles4 ,these boats were wickerwork baskets covered with the hides of animals and resembled bowls in shape4 ,they were sent skimming over the water very rapidly by means of a paddle which was dipped in first on one side of the boat then on the other4 ,the coracles were so small a man easily carried his boat on his back to transport it over dry land1 looking1 one would think1 very much like a huge turtle walking on its hind legs4 ,it is a boat like this most primitive one that you can make of ,half of an ,orange ,skin ,it will float1 too1 and ride safely the roughest waves of the bathtub sea4 ,as it is perfectly water-tight1 ,miss ,dolly need have no fear of wetting her dainty skirts as she sits in the bottom of the boat4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #egg4--;,cut an orange exactly in half4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #egh4--;,carefully remove the pulp4 ,cut an orange exactly in halves like ,fig4 #egg4 ,slide the blade of a penknife around the edge1 loosening the pulp from the skin1 then cut the pulp in quarters and remove it piece by piece as in ,fig4 #egh4 ,when all is taken out you have your little boat 7,fig4 #egi7 and your orange besides4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #egi4--,the coracle4 ,place the coracle in a basinful of water1 put a small doll in it1 stir the water round and round with a stick1 and watch the boat glide along as swiftly as if its little occupant were paddling with all her might4 ,from the skin of the banana an almost ,perfect ,canoe can be made1 which will look very much like those used by the ,indians at the time when ,columbus discovered ,america4 ,you know1 of course1 that a banana has several ridges on its surface with wide1 smooth spaces between and that the stem end curves up more decidedly than the other4 ,along the middle of the smooth space which takes the upward curve of the stem you must make a slit with the sharp point of your knife1 as shown by the black line on the banana in ,fig4 #ehj4 ,open the slit carefully1 cut the banana in small pieces and take out one piece at a time 7,fig4 #eha74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehj4--,make a slit with the point of your knife4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eha4--,take out one piece at a time4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehb4--;,cut the sulphur ends off two matches4 ,cut the sulphur ends off two matches 7,fig4 #ehb7 and place the little sticks crosswise in the banana skin1 one near each end1 to act as braces in holding the sides apart 7,fig4 #ehc7 and as a seat for the doll-man 7,fig4 #ehd74 ,fig4 #ehd shows both the canoe and the coracle in the water4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehc4--,the little canoe4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehd4--;,banana canoe and orange-skin coracle4 ,in selecting a banana for the canoe choose a symmetrical or even-sided one1 that it may not tip but sit squarely on the water4 ,in case the banana is not perfect and the canoe does tip to one side1 place in it a small weight and the balance will be regulated4 ,the apple lantern1 or ,fairy ,lamp 7,fig4 #ehe7 requires a little more time and patience in its preparation than the boats1 but it is not difficult to make4 ,find a rather small1 perfectly round1 red apple without bruise or blemish4 ,hold it in both hands and gently press it with your two thumbs1 beginning close to the stem and gradually working down to the blossom end4 ,be careful not to break the skin1 but press and press until every part is loosened and the apple feels pulpy like a grape--every part except the blossom2 that holds fast because it is attached to the core4 ,when no hard spots can be found cut a circle around the stem as shown in ,fig4 #ehf1 and little by little dig out the apple until nothing but the skin remains 7,fig4 #ehg72 then you will find a small lump at the bottom which must be left1 since cutting it out would result in a hole in the skin4 ,with a pair of sharp scissors trim away all unevenness or raggedness that may be found on the edge4 ,this will make the opening a trifle larger4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehe4--,the fairy lamp4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehf4--;,cut a circle around the stem4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehg4--,the empty skin4 ,cut a ,slice from an ,ordinary ,candle about half an inch thick 7,a1 ,fig4 #ehh7 and hollow out the under side enough to allow the candle to fit over the lump in the bottom of the apple skin 7,b1 ,fig4 #ehh74 ,fit the candle in place1 and when it is lit you will have the prettiest1 daintiest little fairy lamp imaginable4 ,the light shining through the rosy1 semi-transparent apple skin gives the effect of ,bohemian glass and casts a red glow all around it4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehh4--;,cut the candle like these4 ,the fairy lamp looks very pretty floating in water in a glass bowl1 and a number of lamps around your birthday cake will be a new way of telling how old you are4 ,,chapter ,,xxxiii ,,little ,,paper ,,columbus ,,and ,,his ,,paper ,,ship ,,place a chair against one end of the bath tub1 for ,spain1 and another chair at the other end of the tub for ,america4 ,if the chair seat is lower than the rim of the tub1 build up with books until the top book is as high as the tub2 then fill the bathtub more than half full of water and pretend it is the ,atlantic ocean4 ,cut out two paper dolls1 one for ,king ,ferdinand1 the other for ,queen ,isabella4 ,remember which chair is ,spain1 and seat the royal couple in ,spain1 on a throne1 made of a bent piece of cardboard4 ,bring ,columbus before the monarchs and let them bid him ,godspeed2 then put ,columbus in his ship1 the ,santa ,maria1 with a number of sailors1 and send the vessel sailing off on her voyage of discovery4 ,gently push the boat forward by the projecting spar at the stern1 and the little craft will sail along like a real ship on a real ocean2 but you must be careful not to push too hard and capsize the vessel4 ,when the boat reaches ,america1 have ready on the chair at that end of the bathtub1 some wild ,indians with their wigwams1 and let ,columbus and his men land1 while the ,indians stand gazing at them in astonishment4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ehi4--,the hull of the ,santa ,maria4 ,before we make the little paper people1 let us build ,columbus' ,ship4 ,this ship is to be as nearly like the ,santa ,maria1 the real ship in which ,columbus sailed1 as is possible to make of paper4 ,cut a piece of light-weight cardboard fifteen and three-fourths inches long and seven and one-half inches wide2 on this draw the diagram of the boat 7,fig4 #ehi71 making the greatest lengths of the diagram exactly as long and the greatest widths as wide as the cardboard4 ,find the lengthwise centre of the cardboard1 which will be three and three-fourths inches from each long side line1 as the cardboard is seven and one-half inches wide4 ,draw a line along the centre from end to end1 to guide you in making the diagram of the boat2 this central line will also be the centre of your ship4 ,commence drawing the bottom ,a--,a 7,fig4 #ehi7 at a distance of two and one-fourth inches from the end of the cardboard2 the bottom must measure seven inches from its extreme front point ,a to the back line ,a1 and two and three-eighths inches at its widest point from ,b to ,b4 ,the point ,a of the bottom must come on the long central line1 and the straight back line of the bottom ,a must be one and three-fourths inches across4 ,illustration3 ,columbus' ,ship ,made of ,paper4 ,the length of the extension at the back of the boat from ,c to ,d is three and one-half inches2 the deck from ,d to ,e1 three inches4 ,the greatest width of the deck1 ,e1 not including the two flaps1 is two and three-fourth inches1 and the narrowest part at the line ,d one inch4 ,the sides of the boat are slashed and the last slash or side piece1 ,f1 at its greatest height touches the edge of the cardboard1 while the side pieces ,g and ,g1 are the lowest1 and so are the longest distance from the cardboard edge4 ,when you have drawn the diagram cut out the little craft4 ,cut along all the heavy lines4 ,bend the four dotted lines of the prow ledge 7,h1 ,i and ,h1 ,i7 backward4 ,all other dotted lines must be bent forward1 and care taken to keep the bends exactly on the dotted lines4 ,do not bend the laps enclosed by the tiny circles along the sides ,j1 ,j1 ,j1 ,j1 ,j1 ,j4 ,these circles merely show how far the slashed sides lap over each other to form the correct shape of the ,santa ,maria1 for you must know that ,columbus' vessel was very different in build and appearance from any ships we find at the present time4 ,the prow and stern were much higher than the middle of the boat and at the top the stern was quite narrow while at the bottom it was wide1 making the rear of the ship big at the bottom and small at the top4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eij4--,this is the mizzenmast4 ,now put the little craft together4 ,bend the sides up and fasten each lap on the edge of the next side piece with glue or strong1 thick paste4 ,bend up the back and paste the three laps of each edge over onto the sides1 fitting the short laps on the section ,k over the projections ,l and ,l of the sides4 ,make the ,mizzenmast of a paper lighter1 ten inches high after the end has been bent 7,fig4 #eij74 ,slide the small end of the mast1 from beneath1 up through the hole ,k in the after deck 7,fig4 #ehi74 ,the hole should be a tight fit4 ,paste the bent end of the mast flat and tight to the bottom of the boat2 bring the flaps of the deck down over the top of the sides and paste them securely in place4 ,next bend up the prow1 lapping the flap ,o 7,fig4 #ehi7 over the side edge of the prow1 ,o1 and the flap ,p over the prow1 ,p4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eia4--;,cut the bowsprit like this4 ,cut the ,bowsprit 7,fig4 #eia7 of cardboard six and one-half inches long1 split the wide end up lengthwise through the centre two and one-fourth inches1 then fold the remainder lengthwise through the centre according to the dotted lines ,fig4 #eib4 ,open the split end and place one-half on the inside of one side of the prow1 and the second half opposite on the inside of the other side of the prow4 ,leave these ends loose1 resting the bowsprit in the short opening at the centre top of the point of the prow1 where the two short ledges1 ,h and ,i 7,fig4 #ehi71 meet4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eib4--,the bowsprit is folded through the centre4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eic--,the forward deck4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eid4--,slash the strip for the forward deck4 ,make the forward ,deck of cardboard 7,fig4 #eic7 two and one-fourth inches long and at its widest part a generous one and one-eighth inch4 ,cut the hole ,n1 five-eighths of an inch from the wide1 straight edge2 then cut a strip five and five-eighths inches in length and three-fourths of an inch in width1 slash as in diagram and bend at dotted line 7,fig4 #eid74 ,cut the slit ,m1 and fasten the strip on the deck by pasting the flaps over the top of the curved edge of the deck 7,fig4 #eie74 ,slide the flat point of the projecting bowsprit through the slit ,m 7,fig4 #eid71 and run a paper lighter foremast1 nine and one-half inches long1 not including the bent end1 through the hole ,n 7,fig4 #eic74 ,bring the deck down over the prow1 adjust the bowsprit to the inclined height of the bowsprit in the illustration and paste the two split halves of the end of the bowsprit on each side of the inside of the prow4 ,fasten the foremast tight on the bottom of the boat and paste the deck on the ledges1 ,h1 ,i1 ,h1 ,i 7,fig4 #ehi74 ,make a ,deck-,fence for the stern of a piece of paper seven and one-half inches long and one inch wide4 ,cut it in a fringe with every other short strip of the fringe cut out like ,fig4 #eif4 ,paste the loose fringe ends along the three outside top edges of the after deck1 allowing the solid border of the fringe to form the fence rail4 ,see illustration4 ,cover the lower ends of the fence when they are pasted to the deck with a band of paper seven and one-half inches long and three-eighths of an inch wide 7,fig4 #eig74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eie4--;,forward deck4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eif4--,the deck fence4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eig4--,strip for bottom of fence4 ,make a ,spar for the stern of the boat as you made the bowsprit ,fig4 #eib1 only the spar should be shorter1 extending beyond the stern of the boat about two inches4 ,slide the large end of the spar through the opening in the deck at ,e 7,fig4 #ehi7 and rest the split ends on each side of the mast4 ,for the ,mainmast at the centre of the boat make another paper lighter eleven inches high4 ,do not bend the end1 but paste the bottom lapped edges together and run the mast through a common wooden spool 7,fig4 #eih74 ,glue the spool tight on the bottom of the boat1 a trifle forward of the centre1 and your ship is ready for the sails1 as you can see from the picture4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eih4--,support the mainmast with a spool4 ,the illustration shows little paper ,columbus in his red cloak and cap1 standing on the stern of his vessel1 one of the sailors in the centre1 and a wild ,indian peeping over the side of the boat4 ,we must make our ,santa ,maria ,watertight before the sails are set4 ,melt half of a wax candle in a tin piepan and set the ship down into the melted hot wax to cover the bottom thoroughly4 ,use a teaspoon for pouring the liquid wax over all sides1 about one inch up from the bottom of the boat4 ,this bath of wax should render your ship perfectly water-tight1 but test the little craft on water to make sure that it does not leak4 ,cut the ,sails of very light-weight writing-paper1 the top edge straight1 side edges slanting1 and bottom edge curved inward4 ,make the greatest height of the foresail for the bow four inches1 the width three and one-half inches4 ,with the scissors point1 punch two small holes in this foresail1 one in the middle at the top and one in the middle at the bottom4 ,enlarge the holes slightly by inserting the point of a lead pencil and twisting the pencil gently around 7,fig4 #eii74 ,remember that all holes for the masts to run through must be made rather small1 to prevent the sails from sliding too far down the masts4 ,bend the top and bottom of the sails together to curve the paper1 that the sails may appear to be in a good stiff breeze when fastened on the masts4 ,slide the foresail you have just made on the foremast2 it will stay in place without glue4 ,make ,a ,paper ,flag like ,fig4 #fjj1 for the mainmast1 one and three-fourths inches long and one and one-half inches wide4 ,cut two holes at one side as shown in the diagram1 divide the remaining space into four squares and paint the two diagonal squares1 ,q and ,q1 red4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eii4--,the foresail4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fjj4--,the flag4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fja4--,the main-topsail4 ,make the ,main-,topsail three and one-fourth inches long and three and three-fourths inches wide 7,fig4 #fja74 ,for the ,crow's-,nest saw or cut off the top of an ordinary wooden spool and paint red downward points around the top edge1 a pointed band around the centre1 and two straight1 narrow bands at the lower edge 7,fig4 #fjb74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fjb4--,the crow's-nest4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fjc4--,the mainsail4 ,the ,mainsail 7,fig4 #fjc7 must be four and one-half inches long and five inches wide4 ,paint a red cross on it as shown in the diagram4 ,slide the mainsail well down on the mainmast2 over it place the spool top 8crow's-nest02 next run on the main-topsail and slip the flag on the tip-top4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fjd4--,the jigger sail is shaped like this4 ,the ,jigger ,sail for the mizzenmast at the stern of the boat must be five inches high and five inches wide 7,fig4 #fjd74 ,paint the paper pennant 7,fig4 #fje7 blue1 and bend it into several waves4 ,slide the jigger sail in place on the mizzenmast and top it with the blue pennant4 ,your finished vessel should resemble closely the illustration4 ,if you want to ,paint the ,santa ,maria do so before giving it the wax bath4 ,color the hull a reddish brown1 the masts brown1 and the sails a light orange2 this will give a very pretty effect4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fje4--;,a bright colored pennant4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fjf4--;,cut ,columbus out by this pattern4 ,now for the characters of our little drama4 ,make ,columbus of heavy stiff writing-paper or very light-weight cardboard1 like the pattern 7,fig4 #fjf71 which measures from the top of the head to the lowest edge of the stand1 four and three-fourths inches4 ,without the stand the figure measures four inches4 ,carefully cut out ,columbus1 mark his features1 hair1 and clothing in black ink4 ,cut his cloak 7,fig4 #fjg7 of red tissue paper1 bend at dotted lines across the shoulders1 and fold back the open front as in ,fig4 #fjh4 ,make the red tissue paper cap 7,fig4 #fji71 and fold lengthwise across centre 7,fig4 #faj72 then put both cloak and hat on ,columbus1 that he may be ready to start on his journey 7,fig4 #faa74 ,cut out a number of sailors 7,fig4 #fab7 to go on the boat with ,columbus1 and a lot of ,indians 7,fig4 #fac7 for ,columbus to find when he lands on the shores of ,america1 at the other end of the bathtub4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fjg4--,make a cloak for ,columbus in this way4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fjh4--,turn back the front edges4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fji4--;,cut the hat like this4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #faj4--,the hat is folded4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #faa4--;,columbus in his red cloak4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fab4--,one of the sailors4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fac4--,the ,indian4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fad4--,make several paper wigwams4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fae4--,king ,ferdinand and ,queen ,isabella4 ,make ,wigwams for the ,indians of paper cut in half circles4 ,bend back narrow1 pie-shaped pieces along the two straight edges of each half circle1 make the pie-shaped pieces reach midway up toward the centre2 then bend the half circles into tent-like forms1 pin the two top edges of each one together1 and you will have wigwams1 with the doorway flaps bent back4 ,cut off the top peak of each1 wigwam and stand some heavy long broom straws in the opening to represent poles used in real wigwams 7,fig4 #fad74 ,fig4 #fae shows ,king ,ferdinand and ,queen ,isabella of ,spain1 seated on their pasteboard throne1 ready to receive ,columbus4 ,queen ,isabella gave three ships to ,columbus1 but the ,santa ,maria was the largest vessel1 and the one which carried ,columbus4 ,the two smaller boats were named the ,pinta and the ,nina4 ,you can make these smaller ships or use any little boats you happen to have2 they are not very important4 ,,chapter ,,xxxiv ,,how ,,to ,,make ,,friends ,,with ,,the ,,stars ,,when you used to recite about the cow jumping over the moon1 you did not know that there were all sorts of animals and people up among the stars near the moon1 and1 while they may never have followed the example of the cow in the nursery rhyme1 probably they often feel as though they would enjoy doing so4 ,but these starry people and their pets are very well behaved1 and so far they have been perfectly content to remain exactly where they were placed hundreds of years ago4 ,there is one animal in particular with which you must make friends--a bear1 an immense creature called ,ursa ,major4 ,never could an earthly bear have such a tail as you see in ,fig4 #faf4 ,however1 the ,great ,bear is very different from the ordinary bear1 and needs the big1 bushy tail for three bright stars4 ,four more equally bright stars are on the creature's side4 ,trace the big bear on cardboard1 and be sure to get the stars in the right places4 ,cut out the pasteboard bear1 and with a large1 coarse pin or needle pierce a hole in the centre of each star2 then hold the bear up to the light1 as the little girl holds the lion in ,fig4 #fag4 ,look through the bear and you will see seven tiny1 twinkling stars forming a dipper4 ,pretend you have stretched a string from star to star1 and what you will see will resemble ,fig4 #fah4 ,look again and if the dipper is not distinct1 make the holes in the centres of the stars larger4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #faf4--,ursa ,major1 the ,great ,bear4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fag4--,making friends with the stars4 ,after you have learned precisely how ,ursa ,major looks with its starry dipper1 and can see it even with your eyes closed1 peep out into the night and try to find your friend up in the real sky4 ,the bear is there1 but you must recognize it by the dipper1 for of course you cannot really see the animal itself4 ,when you find the dipper you will know that the ,great ,bear is in the sky looking down upon you4 ,you can see the big bear during the early evening hours of ,march1 ,april1 ,may1 ,june and ,july4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fbj4--,ursa ,minor1 ,little ,bear4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fah4--,ursa ,major1 ,great ,bear4 ,fig4 #fai gives another bear1 a little one1 whose name is ,ursa ,minor2 he also has a long tail spangled with stars and four more stars on the side of his body which form a little dipper2 the three stars on the tail make the handle4 ,though the bear is small1 he is very important because of the large star on the end of his tail1 which you must call the ,pole star4 ,this star shines out to show which direction is north when one gets lost or confused about his way4 ,the ,pole star may always be depended upon as a guide1 and sailors look for it to help them find their course through the waters4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fai4--,ursa ,minor1 ,little ,bear4 ,ursa ,minor is turned in an opposite direction and position from the ,great ,bear1 and the pose makes it easy for us to find the ,pole star1 because when we once trace out the stars of the ,great ,bear in the real sky we will see that the two outermost stars of the four which form its bowl1 point to the ,pole star4 ,we can pretend that we have tied a string on the star in the outside top end of the ,big ,dipper 7,figs4 #faf and #fah ,a71 and that we are stretching that string out from the ,dipper star in a direct line2 then we can tie the string on the ,pole star in the end of the ,little ,bear's tail1 as shown in ,figs4 #fah and #fbj1 where the dotted line represents a string4 ,trace on cardboard and cut out ,ursa ,minor1 punch holes through the stars and hold the little fellow up to the light1 head down4 ,the ,little ,bear1 too1 is visible shining not far from the ,big ,bear during the same months4 ,there is ,a ,fairy ,tale about the starry bears4 ,the story tells us that a long time ago these animals were not bears and did not live among the stars4 ,the ,great ,bear was a gentle lady1 and the ,little ,bear her son4 ,the poor mother and son were turned into bears by the goddess ,juno1 and their friend ,jupiter had not enough power to disenchant them and restore to them their human forms4 ,so he did what he thought was next best2 he placed the two bears1 mother and son1 up in the sky among the stars1 where they remain to this day4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fba4--;,cassiopeia4 ,fig4 #fba is ,cassiopeia ,in the sky all of her stars are brilliant1 except the one marked ,k4 ,this is a shy little twinkler and appears rather faint at times2 but in the ,autumn when you hunt for ,cassiopeia1 you will be able to see the star ,k1 if your eyes are bright4 ,this lady with uplifted arms is the wife of a king4 ,trace her and cut her out1 punch holes through the centres of the seven stars1 then catch hold of the sweeping train of the queen's dress and hold her up to the light1 when the pinholes will look like ,fig4 #fbb1 reminding one of a chair turned upside down1 with its feet toward the queen's head and its back down toward her feet4 ,you will be delighted with this constellation1 for it is very beautiful1 and you may find ,cassiopeia any night of ,august1 ,september1 ,october1 ,november1 ,december1 ,january and ,february1 as she is always then visible after dark4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fbb4--;,cassiopeia4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fbc4--,leo1 the ,lion4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fbd4--,leo1 the ,lion4 ,now we will make the king of beasts1 ,leo1 the ,lion1 for he is very fine-looking with his starry mane and a star almost in his mouth 7,fig4 #fbc74 ,trace the lion carefully1 name him ,leo1 and cut him out2 pierce holes through the stars and hold the figure up to the light4 ,the little girl in ,fig4 #fag is enjoying her ,leo very much4 ,notice how earnestly she peers through the holes1 for she is determined to know the constellation4 ,when you look through the pinholes of ,leo1 you will find that the constellation resembles a sickle1 as in ,fig4 #fbd4 ,the lion is in plain sight during ,february1 ,march1 ,april1 ,may and ,june1 so you have a long time to make friends with him4 ,during the ,spring you can see all the constellations we have made1 and also the beautiful starry ,northern ,crown 7,fig4 #fbe71 shining in a brilliant half circle as shown in ,fig4 #fbf4 ,the gems of stars in the crown sparkle and shine for us during ,april1 ,may1 ,june1 ,july1 ,august1 ,september and ,october4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fbe4--,the ,northern ,crown4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fbf4--,the ,northern ,crown4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fbg4--;,gemini1 the ,twins4 ,the little twin brothers1 ,castor and ,pollux1 sons of ,jupiter2 always sit together up among the stars4 ,the constellation is called ,gemini 7,fig4 #fbg74 ,when stars are clustered together1 we say the group is a constellation4 ,all of the starry people and animals are only different constellations4 ,in this group each boy has a star on his head1 a star on one knee and a star on one foot1 which makes six stars4 ,trace the twins on cardboard1 cut them out together in one piece and punch a hole through the centre of each star4 ,hold the constellation up to the light1 and the group of wee1 sparkling stars seen through the pinholes will resemble ,fig4 #fbh4 ,look for the twins during the months of ,december1 ,january1 ,february1 ,march1 ,april and ,may1 and remember you must find the group of stars like ,fig4 #fbh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fbh4--;,gemini1 the ,twins4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fbi4--,orion1 the ,giant4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fcj4--,orion1 the ,giant4 ,winter will bring ,orion 7,fig4 #fbi74 ,he appears in ,november and remains where we can see him through ,december1 ,january1 ,february and ,march4 ,orion is one of the most brilliant of constellations4 ,the strenuous hunter has but one visible foot1 the other being hidden by his pet hare seated in front of it2 so we are obliged to make the star1 man with one foot4 ,the fairy tale says that he was a giant and the mightiest hunter ever known4 ,there is a star on each of his shoulders and one on his cheek1 forming a triangle2 then there is another star down on his left foot and one on his right knee4 ,trace the mighty hunter and cut him out as you did the other constellations4 ,draw a line from star to star and1 after adding the three stars which form ,orion's belt1 pierce holes in all1 look through them 7,fig4 #fcj7 and make friends with the harmless1 starry giant4 ,fig4 #fca is ,taurus1 a very lively-looking bull for one so aged2 possibly the stars1 being bright and cheery1 keep the milk-white creature from growing old4 ,only a portion of the bull can be seen2 other stars hide the remainder4 ,taurus must be greatly dazzled by the stars1 for there is actually one in each of his eyes1 the two forming the ends of the ,v-shaped group of stars across his face4 ,the tip of each horn is decked with a glorious star1 while on the ,bull's neck is a cluster of stars called the ,pleiades4 ,these stars were in all seven beautiful sisters1 daughters of the giant ,atlas2 but one star daughter married a mortal and lost her brightness for doing so2 consequently you can now see but six star sisters4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fca4--,taurus1 the ,bull4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fcb4--,taurus1 the ,bull4 ,in ,fig4 #fcb you will find the constellation of ,taurus as it looks when seen through the pinholes in the stars of the ,bull1 and also as the constellation appears in the sky on a clear night during ,november1 ,december1 ,january1 ,february and ,march4 ,,chapter ,,xxxv ,,stencil ,,painting ,,and ,,how ,,to ,,make ,,the ,,stencils ,,you need not be an artist to do the painting or to make the stencils4 ,it is all easy enough and1 because of the real beauty of the work and the number of purposes to which it may be applied1 stencilling is growing more and more popular4 ,with the stencil you can decorate a window curtain1 portire1 table cover1 bedspread1 bureau scarf1 screen or the walls of your room4 ,you may even paint the trimmings for a dress if you like2 it has been done4 ,illustration3 ,this ,portire is ,made of ,unbleached ,sheeting ,stencilled in ,persian ,design4 ,illustration3 ,a ,stencilled ,cheese-cloth ,curtain4 ,stencilling is effective on almost any material3 silk1 cotton1 linen and wool4 ,swiss and cheese-cloth sash curtains are particularly attractive decorated in this way1 and swiss bureau and pin-cushion covers are very dainty4 ,the drawing on page #dbg is of a white cheese-cloth short sash curtain stencilled in pink and light apple-green4 ,both dye and oil paints may be used1 but for anything washable ,dyes are the best1 inasmuch as they are supposed to be fast colors4 ,there is an inexpensive dye now on the market that comes in tubes like oil paint and does not require boiling4 ,this is convenient to handle1 as it is merely necessary to dissolve it in water4 ,tapestry dyes may also be used but are much more expensive4 ,heavy1 non-washable material may be stencilled with oil colors4 ,the color is not used as a paint but as a stain and must be entirely dissolved in turpentine to make it flow easily4 ,our first drawing shows ,a ,portire made of heavy unbleached sheeting stencilled in a ,persian pattern with dull-red1 moss-green1 yellow and black4 ,curtains may also be made of denim1 crash1 burlap and a number of other materials4 ,the simplest way to ,make ,your ,stencil if you have no especial ideas of your own to carry out1 will be to select a graceful embroidery pattern or one intended for decorative painting and adapt it to your use4 ,with a little practice this becomes quite easy4 ,the principal things to remember are that a good stencil design should be simple1 bold and conventional2 the unbroken lines must not be too long nor the spaces to be cut out too narrow1 between the cut-out parts there must be space wide enough to hold firmly4 ,it is also necessary to break the lines once in a while with little bridges4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fcc4--;,design for outline embroidery4 ,suppose we take the pattern 7,fig4 #fcc74 ,to make it into ,a ,design for ,stencilling we must cut off connections and separate it into many parts1 at the same time keeping the effect of the long curves4 ,beginning with the flower we will separate the petals and calyx 7,a1 ,fig4 #fcc1 and ,a1 ,fig4 #fcd71 and widen the stem 7,b1 ,fig4 #fcc1 and ,b1 ,fig4 #fcd74 ,instead of continuing the curve we will break it at ,c and ,d1 with two little bridges4 ,this divides the stem into three parts1 and1 to give variety and interest to an otherwise monotonous line1 we will widen the first and second parts of the stem at the lower ends1 curving the wide end inward and rounding the end of the next section to give the idea of its fitting the joint4 ,the suggestion of the various parts fitting together in stencil designing is the means of carrying the eye over necessary bridges or intervening spaces and conveying the impression of continuous lines4 ,the third section of the stem1 where it disappears under the flower in ,fig4 #fcc1 we will bring to a point in ,fig4 #fcd to indicate its vanishing behind the flower4 ,the buds which fill in the curve of this stem in ,fig4 #fcc we will leave out altogether1 for they would crowd the design4 ,we will conventionalize the leaves1 dispense with the small stems1 broaden the main leaf stem1 separate it from the flower stem and curve each end1 one to fit the base of the end leaf1 the other to follow the curve of the flower stem4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fcd4--,this is adapted from an outline embroidery design4 ,this furnishes one section of the pattern2 the rest is but a repetition of the same1 which is reversed as the curves alternate4 ,now for the making of the stencil4 ,fig4 #fce is a section of the design1 actual size1 which you can use immediately1 without waiting to develop a design for yourself4 ,take a piece of smooth white tissue paper1 lay it over the pattern 7,fig4 #fce7 and1 with a very soft lead pencil1 trace the pattern carefully4 ,fig4 #fce is reversed1 especially for tracing4 ,have ready a perfectly smooth piece of heavy ,manila wrapping paper seventeen inches long and seven inches wide4 ,with the aid of a ruler draw two straight lines lengthwise across the paper1 the first line two and a half inches from the top edge of the paper 7,e1 ,fig4 #fcf71 the next one and three-eighths inches below the first line 7,f74 ,one-half of an inch above the first line ,e draw another line 7,g71 and one-half of an inch below the line ,f draw another line 7,h74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fce4--,trace this4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fcf4--,rule the paper in this way4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fcg4--,place sections of the design between the lines in this way4 ,lay the tracing1 pencilled side down1 on the wrapping paper1 with the upper and lower curves of the flower stem just fitting between the lines ,g and ,f 7,fig4 #fcg74 ,transfer the tracing to the wrapping paper by going over the lines of the design with your soft pencil2 then turn the tracing over and bottom edge up to reverse it and lay it again on the paper1 this time with the curves of the flower stem between the lines ,e and ,h1 and go over the lines of the design again with your soft pencil4 ,once more reverse the design and bring the curves of the flower stem between the lines ,g and ,f4 ,this last section will finish the pattern4 ,in reversing the tracing always allow one-quarter of an inch space between the tips of the two flower petals ,i and ,j 7,fig4 #fcg71 and the leaf ,k 7,fig4 #fcg74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fch4--;,cut the stencil out like this4 ,with a pair of sharp scissors ,cut ,out ,your ,design taking great care to keep within the outlines1 for a snip beyond will let in color in the wrong place and spoil your stencil4 ,remember you are not to cut the paper away from the design but cut the design out leaving the surrounding paper intact4 ,this makes the stencil 7,fig4 #fch74 ,when all of the design is cut out place your stencil flat on a board and give it a coat of white shellac1 then lift it and move to another place on the board to prevent its sticking4 ,when quite dry turn the stencil over and shellac the other side4 ,be sure the edges of the cut-out parts are covered with shellac as well as the rest of the paper4 ,the shellac makes the paper waterproof and durable4 ,do not use the stencil until it is absolutely dry4 ,trace ,fig4 #fci which is the conventionalized flower1 and transfer it to the centre of a four-inch square of the wrapping paper1 or make the flower smaller if you prefer to have it the size of the one in the border4 ,cut out the design and shellac the little stencil as you did the larger one 7,fig4 #fdj74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fci4--,trace this flower4 ,the closer the weave of the cloth the easier is the work of stencilling1 but the dye penetrates entirely through thin material1 and the effect is so attractive ,i will describe the ,cheese-cloth ,curtains and the process given for stencilling these will answer for any other material4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fdj4--,the small stencil4 ,one width of cheese-cloth for each half of the short ,dutch curtains is sufficient for quite a wide window4 ,if the curtain is too full much of the effect of the decoration is lost4 ,select the finest quality of cheese-cloth and cut it the required length4 ,hem the bottom edge and lay the curtain1 right side up1 smoothly on a lap-board with the hem at the top4 ,place your stencil on the curtain so that the design will be about one inch and a half from the hem4 ,slide a new piece of blotter paper under the curtain to absorb the extra moisture1 then tack the stencil down with rather small pins4 ,drive a pin in the centre of each flower1 at the point of each petal and at the point of each leaf1 between the petals and between the leaves1 also in every bridge and along the edges of the design wherever the paper is inclined to lift 7,fig4 #fda74 ,in short1 your endeavor must be to keep the stencil perfectly flat on the cloth so that the dye will not penetrate beyond the openings and blur the outlines4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fda4--,tack the stencil down with pins4 ,before tacking the stencil in place ,make ,your ,dye ,ready ,buy a tube of olive green dye1 one of yellow and one of cardinal red4 ,squeeze about a teaspoonful of dye into a teacup1 add two tablespoonfuls of boiling water1 stir until dissolved1 then add enough boiling water to give the desired shade4 ,you can test the depth of color by dipping bits of white cloth in the dye4 ,each dye must be in a separate cup and a little yellow should be added to the green after it is dissolved1 but before it is diluted with the extra water4 ,have ready ,two ,stiff ,bristle ,brushes1 such as are used for oil painting1 and a piece of old white muslin4 ,with your stencil in place1 take the board on your lap1 set the dye on a stand at your side and lay the old muslin folded on the board above your curtain4 ,dip a brush in the dye and rub it on the muslin to remove some of the moisture1 for a brush too wet will cause the dye to spread and spoil the outline of the design4 ,beginning at the left hand of your stencil1 scrub the cheese-cloth in the openings of the design until it becomes the right shade and the dye sinks entirely through the cloth4 ,the flowers must be pink and the leaves green1 but you can make the flowers darker at the centre if you wish by applying more color4 ,use separate brushes for the green and red dye4 ,hold the brush firmly and in an upright position4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fdb4--;,crease the cloth through the centre4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fdc4--,leave several inches of thread at the ends4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fdd4--,tie securely4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fde4--,make a loop of the floss4 ,when you have stencilled the entire design ,pull ,out the ,pins1 move the stencil farther along on the curtain1 tack it down and continue stencilling until the border is finished2 then take the small stencil of the single flower 7,fig4 #fdj7 and stencil the flower at irregular intervals over the curtain4 ,for ,the ,tassels which finish the curtains use cheese-cloth colored with the green dye4 ,cut a strip of cheese-cloth two and a half inches wide1 spread it flat on the board and paint it with the dye1 using your bristle paint brush for the purpose4 ,when the cloth is dry cut it into pieces four inches long4 ,dye a number of strands of white linen floss1 or use green linen or silk floss for tying the tassels4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fdf4--,run another gathering thread across each half of the tassel4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fdg4--,wrap the thread around to form the neck4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fdh4--,trim off the bottom4 ,fold one piece of the dyed cheese-cloth crosswise through the centre and crease it 7,fig4 #fdb74 ,thread a coarse needle with a strand of the floss and run it through the crease1 leaving several inches of the floss at each end 7,fig4 #fdc74 ,draw the material into gathers and tie securely 7,fig4 #fdd74 ,then bring the two ends together4 ,make a loop of the floss about one inch long 7,fig4 #fde71 and fasten by taking one or two stitches in the gathers4 ,open the fold1 bring the ends of the floss on the underside of the tassel1 tie close to the gathers and cut off the ends4 ,run another gathering thread across each half of the tassel1 half an inch below the gathers at the top 7,fig4 #fdf74 ,draw the thread tight1 wrap it around several times to form the neck 7,fig4 #fdg71 and fasten with several stitches4 ,cut the floss close to the wrapping and with the scissors trim off the bottom of the tassel until it is perfectly even 7,fig4 #fdh74 ,sew the tassels several inches apart on the bottom edge of the curtains1 as shown in illustration4 ,when the curtains are ,to be ,laundered soak them for an hour or more in a strong solution of salt and water1 then wash carefully in the suds of a pure white soap and rinse thoroughly4 ,do not rub the soap on the material1 and before putting the curtain in water shake and brush out all loose dust4 ,dry in the shade4 ,,index ,a ,airships1 fairy1 #gj ,alexandria1 ,pharos of1 #bde ,amytis1 #bgi ,animal circus1 #ae ,apollo1 ,statue of1 #bcc ,apple1 ,hallowe'en1 #fj ,apple games1 #he ,ascension1 balloon1 #aa ,b ,baby1 ,punch and ,judy1 #eb ,baby porcupine1 #fh ,babylon1 hanging gardens of1 #bgi ,babylonians1 #bhc ,backyard camp1 #aid ,ball1 tether1 #bjg ,balloon ascension1 #aa ,banana canoe1 #dja ,basket1 hanging1 #cgb ,bathing place1 #cda ,bayberry candle1 #cbf ,bead door knobs1 #cag ,bean bag test1 #ff ,bells1 ,easter1 #cfd ,berries1 holly1 #cjg ,blackbirds1 girls' fair1 #aha ,blarney stone game1 #ga ,blind mice1 three1 #add ,bloodroot1 #cfc ,board1 weaving1 #cdi ,boat1 backyard camp1 #bjb ,boot1 ,santa ,claus1 #afi ,bouquet1 #adg ,bowls and cups1 #ei ,bowsprit1 #djh ,box1 ,pandora1 #ab ,bricks1 ,babylonian1 #bhf ,broad-fronted bulls1 #bic ,brook1 crossing the1 #acc ,bud1 tulip1 #cfa ,bulls1 ,babylonian1 #bic ,bushes1 bayberry1 #cbf ,butterfly game1 #db ,c ,camels1 ,egyptian1 #bbh ,camp1 backyard1 #aid ,camp-fire1 backyard1 #bja ,camping outfit1 #aid ,candle1 bayberry1 #cbf ,candle-moulds1 #cca ,candlesticks1 home-made1 #che ,candlewicks1 #ccd ,canoe1 banana1 #dja ,card1 ,easter egg1 #cfc ,card1 tally1 #aei ,cardboard ,pharos1 #bdd ,cards1 ,easter1 #ceh ,caria1 #beg ,cassiopeia1 #dba ,castor1 #dbc ,cats1 black1 #ef ,cella1 #bga ,chair1 doll's1 #cgj 8,chapeau ,bras10 #cgg ,charades1 ,pantomime1 #f ,chares1 #bcc ,charm1 lava1 #fg ,cheops1 #bai ,chephren1 ,king1 #bbd ,chick1 good-morning1 #cha ,chicks1 ,easter1 #adc ,christmas1 decorations1 #cjc ,christmas tree1 living1 #agc ,circus1 home1 #ae ,claus1 jolly little ,santa1 #afc ,clay candlesticks1 #chf ,cnidus1 ,sostratus1 #bec ,coat1 ,santa ,claus'1 #afi ,coloring pottery1 #cif ,colossus of ,rhodes1 #bcc ,columbus1 paper1 #dje ,columbus1 to make1 #dad ,columns1 temple1 #bfi ,coracle1 orange skin1 #djj ,costume1 ,puritan man's1 #ih ,costume1 ,titania's1 #hb ,costumes1 ,charades1 #g ,cotton1 stuffing1 #bcg ,country picnic1 #acb ,court1 pumpkin game1 #ij ,court1 tether-ball1 #baa ,cow jumped over the moon1 to make1 #aci ,cradle1 doll's1 #cgb ,cross1 to make1 #cfj ,crossing the brook1 #acc ,crow's-nest1 #dab ,crystal1 ,japanese1 #fh ,cupid's door1 #ajh ,cups and bowls1 #ei ,cups1 ,santa ,claus'1 #agj ,curtains1 tissue paper1 #cbd ,d ,dainty bloodroot1 #cfc ,dais1 upper1 #bfd ,daisy ,valentine1 #aaj ,dance of the dolls1 #ade ,dance1 of ,titania1 #ge ,date palm1 #bbg ,daylight fireworks1 #aa ,deck1 forward1 #dji ,deck-fence1 #daj ,decorations1 living ,christmas tree1 #agg ,diana1 temple of1 #bfi ,disks1 gilt paper1 #cf ,doll house1 #cae ,doll's chair1 #cgj ,dolls1 dance of the1 #ade ,door1 ,cupid's1 #ajh ,doorknobs1 bead1 #cag ,drama1 ,punch and ,judy1 #ec ,dress1 ,punch's1 #ej ,dress1 ,puritan woman's1 #ih ,dye kettle1 magic1 #dc ,e ,easter bells1 #cfd ,easter cards1 #ceh ,easter chicks1 #adc ,easter egg cards1 #cfc ,easter party1 #cc ,egg card1 #cfc ,egg tennis1 #cc ,eggs1 to prepare for tennis1 #cd ,egypt1 pyramids of1 #bai ,elephant1 #bj ,empress ,josephine1 #cgi ,entertainment1 ,valentine1 #ajc ,ephesus1 temple of ,diana at1 #bfi ,euphrates1 #bgi ,evergreen ropes1 #cab ,express office1 girls' fair1 #ahf ,f ,fair1 girls'1 #agi ,fairy airships1 #gj ,fairy lamp1 #djc ,fairy waters1 life in1 #ada ,fence1 picnic1 #acb ,fire1 backyard1 #bja ,firecracker invitations1 #d ,fireworks1 daylight1 #aa ,flag1 #dab ,flags1 flower beds1 #aeg ,footstool1 ,zeus1 #bfe ,forfeits1 #ie ,fortune jingle1 #ga ,fortune telling1 novel1 #ee ,fourth of ,july lawn frolic1 #c ,frieze1 doll house1 #cbb ,frolic1 ,fourth of ,july1 #c ,g ,game1 ,blarney ,stone1 #ga ,game1 butterfly1 #db ,game of egg tennis1 #ci ,games1 new ,easter1 #cc ,garden1 plant your1 #aea ,garden planting game1 #aei ,gardens1 hanging1 #bgi ,giant firecracker invitation1 #d ,gilt paper disks1 #cf ,girl1 sun-bonnet1 #adi ,girls' fair1 #agi ,glazing candlesticks1 #cie ,goddess ,diana1 #bgb ,good-night chick1 #chd ,grass1 invitation rings of1 #ee ,h ,half candle1 #cia ,halicarnassus1 ,mausoleum of1 #bde ,hallowe'en apple1 #fj ,hallowe'en merrymaking1 #ee ,handle1 candle1 #cic ,hanging basket1 #cgb ,hanging gardens1 #bgi ,harmless serpent1 #fi ,hat1 peaked1 #agd ,head1 ,judy's1 #ea ,heart1 ,valentine1 #aji ,heavier rug1 #ceg ,holly1 #cjd ,holly berries1 #cjg ,hollyhocks1 paper1 #abi ,home circus1 #ae ,home-made candlesticks1 #che ,horse1 ,rosebud's1 #ah ,house1 doll1 #cae ,hurling the lance1 #aj ,i ,impromptu moving pictures1 #ig ,inlaying ,zeus' throne1 #bfg ,invitation1 giant firecrackers1 #d ,j ,japanese crystal1 #fh ,japanese tag1 #acd ,jigger sail1 #dac ,jingle1 fortune1 #ga ,jolly little ,santa ,claus1 #afc ,josephine1 #cgi ,judy's head1 #ea ,k ,kettle1 magic dye1 #dc ,l ,lamp1 fairy1 #djc ,lance1 hurling the1 #aj ,lantern1 pumpkin1 #ic ,lava charm1 #fg ,lawn frolic1 ,fourth of ,july1 #c ,leaves1 bayberry1 #cbf ,leo1 #dbb ,life rope1 toy1 #cdj ,lighthouse1 first1 #bde ,living ,christmas tree1 #agc ,loom1 to weave without1 #cdi ,love's palette1 #aaa ,lumberman1 #cdd ,m ,mademoiselle ,rosebud1 #af ,magic dye kettle1 #dc ,magic peep show1 #acg ,mainmast1 #daa ,mainsail1 #dac ,main topsail1 #dab ,man1 ,puritan1 #ih ,marble steps1 #beb ,mausoleum of ,halicarnassus1 #bde ,media1 #bgi ,mermaid1 #adb ,mermaid1 #cde ,merrymaking ,hallowe'en1 #ee ,mice1 three blind1 #add ,mikado1 #cgd ,mistletoe1 #caj ,mizzenmast1 #djh ,modelling tools1 #chg ,moon1 cow that jumped over1 #ada ,moulds1 candle1 #cca ,moving animal circus1 #ae ,moving pictures1 impromptu1 #ig ,myth1 #ab ,n ,napoleon1 #cge ,nebuchadnezzar1 #bgi ,nest1 bird's1 #cgc ,northern crown1 #dbc ,novel ,easter party1 #cc ,novel fortune telling1 #ee ,o ,office1 express1 girls' fair1 #ahf ,olympia1 statue of ,zeus at1 #bei ,orange games1 #he ,orange-skin coracle1 #djj ,order of entertainment1 #f ,original ,valentine1 #ajc ,orion1 #dbd ,outdoor fun1 #bjg ,outfit1 camping1 #aid ,oyster1 sea treasure1 #fi ,p ,palette1 love's1 #aaa ,palm1 date1 #bbg ,pandora box1 #ab ,pantomime1 #ajb ,pantomime1 charades1 #f ,paper ,columbus1 #dje ,paper disks1 #cf ,paper shower1 #cf ,party1 novel ,easter1 #cc ,party1 ,thanksgiving1 #he ,pasteboard doll house1 #cae ,peaked hat1 #agd ,peep show1 magic1 #acg ,performers1 wild west show1 #abj ,pharos of ,alexandria1 #bdd ,phidias1 #bei ,picnic1 roof1 #abg ,pig1 to make1 #cfg ,pin cushion1 #cge ,pitch-wood fire1 #beb ,plant your garden1 #aea ,plants1 ,babylonian1 #bii ,platforms1 hanging gardens'1 #bhd ,pole1 tether-ball1 #bjg ,pollux1 #dbc ,porcupine1 #fh ,post-office1 #ajd ,postmaster1 girls' fair1 #aib ,pottery1 coloring1 #cif ,properties1 ,thanksgiving stage1 #aja ,pumpkin games1 #he ,punch and ,judy show1 #de ,punch's head1 #df ,puritan woman1 #ih ,pyramids1 #bai ,q ,queen ,titania1 #ge ,r ,race1 shuffle1 #aj ,race1 wedding1 #fa ,rackets1 egg tennis1 #ch ,rackets1 palm-leaf fan1 #aeh ,rackets1 tether-ball1 #bad ,raft1 toy1 #cda ,rapid-transit story1 #ib ,reindeer1 ,santa ,claus1 #afe ,rhodes1 ,colossus of1 #bcc ,rings of grass1 invitation1 #ee ,rite1 vesper1 #fe ,roof picnic1 #abg ,ropes1 evergreen1 #cab ,rosebud1 mademoiselle1 #af ,roses1 paper1 #acj ,rug1 doll house1 #cbc ,rules of egg tennis1 #da ,s ,saddle1 camel1 #bcj ,safe1 backyard1 #aii ,sail boat1 #cgc ,sails1 ,columbus' ship1 #daa ,sandpaper for pyramids1 #bba ,santa ,claus1 #afc ,santa ,maria1 #daa ,saucers1 ,santa ,claus1 #aga ,screen1 witch1 #ff ,sea treasure1 #fi ,secret of magic kettle1 #dc ,serpent1 #fi ,shelves1 #cbd ,ship1 ,columbus'1 #dje ,show1 magic peep1 #acg ,show1 ,punch and ,judy1 #de ,show1 wild west1 #aac ,shower of paper1 #cf ,shrubbery1 ,babylonian1 #big ,shuffle race1 #aj ,side steps1 ,diana's temple1 #bgf ,sides1 choice of1 #afj ,sleigh1 ,santa ,claus1 #afd ,slides1 peep show1 #ach ,slippers1 old1 #eh ,sostratus1 #bec ,sphinx1 #bbe ,spool table1 #cae ,spoon1 #cfh ,spring1 tin-pail1 #bjj ,stage1 ,punch and ,judy1 #de ,stage1 ,titania's1 #ge ,stamps1 ,valentine1 #ajg ,statue of ,zeus1 #bei ,statues1 ,babylonian1 #bid ,stems1 #caa ,stencil painting1 #dbf ,stencils1 to make1 #dbf ,steps1 ,diana's temple1 #bgd ,steps1 marble1 #beb ,story1 rapid transit1 #ib ,strawberry1 #cga ,sun-bonnet1 charade1 #g ,sun-bonnet girl1 #adi ,sunflowers1 paper1 #abg ,t ,table1 backyard camp1 #aih ,table1 spool1 #cae ,table1 wild west show1 #aac ,tag1 ,japanese1 #acd ,tally card1 #aei ,taurus1 #dbe ,temple of ,diana1 #bfi ,tennis1 egg1 #cc ,tent1 backyard1 #aig ,tent1 to make1 #abc ,test1 bean bag1 #ff ,tether-ball1 #bjg ,thanksgiving party1 #he ,three blind mice1 #add ,throne of ,zeus1 #bfc ,tissue paper glass1 #cah ,titania's dance1 #ge ,tools1 clay modelling1 #chg ,toys1 water1 #cch ,tree1 living ,christmas1 #agc ,trousers1 ,santa ,claus1 #afi ,tulip bed1 #cfa ,turtle1 #cff ,u ,umbrella1 #cfi ,upper dais1 #bfd ,ursa major1 #dah ,ursa minor1 #dbj ,v ,valentine entertainment1 #ajc ,vesper rite1 #fe ,victory1 winged1 #bfh ,w ,warp1 #cej ,water life1 #ada ,water toys1 #cch ,wax1 bayberry1 #cca ,weaving1 #cdi ,wedding race1 #fa ,wicks1 candle1 #ccd ,wig1 ,santa ,claus1 #afi ,wigwams1 #daf ,wild west show1 #aac ,window glass1 #cah ,winged victory1 #bfh ,wings1 ,titania's1 #hc ,witch screen1 #ff ,world1 valentine1 #aji ,wreaths1 #caj ,y ,yard1 camping in back1 #aid ,z ,zeus1 statue of1 #bei ,,the ,,beard ,,books ,,for ,,young ,,people ,recreations for ,girls ,by ,,lina and ,,adelia ,b4 ,,beard ,profusely illustrated by the authors4 #hvo1 #b4jj -------- ,this new book for girls1 by ,lina and ,adelia ,beard1 whose previous books on girls' sports have become classic1 combines a mass of practical instruction on handicrafts and recreations4 ,no more charming book for girls could be desired4 8,it teaches how to make serviceable and useful things of all kinds out of every kind of material4 ,it also tells how to play and how to make things to play with4 ,the girl who gets this book will not lack for occupation and pleasure40--,chicago ,evening ,post4 ,,some ,,of ,,the ,,chapters ,a ,home-made ,loom ,how to ,spin ,flax ,pottery ,without a ,wheel ,hallowe'en ,revels ,the ,magic ,cloth ,a ,new ,race of ,dolls ,modeling in ,tissue ,paper ,open ,air ,play ,houses ,may ,day ,amusements ,an ,indian ,encampment ,a ,toy ,colonial ,kitchen ,things ,worth ,doing ,,and ,,how ,,to ,,do ,,them ,by ,,lina and ,,adelia ,b4 ,,beard ,profusely illustrated by the authors4 #hvo1 #b4jj -------- ,an infinite variety of things worth doing is comprised in the latest ,beard book for girls1 which is in every way equal to its widely popular predecessors1 and contains a wealth of absolutely new material4 ,how to do the various things worth doing is set forth with that simplicity of direction which has been one of the chief factors in the success of these authors4 ,the text is supplemented by some six hundred drawings4 ,the book tells of such things as these3 ,a ,wonderful ,circus at ,home1 ,a ,valentine ,entertainment1 ,a ,novel ,easter ,party1 ,hallowe'en ,merrymaking1 ,how to ,get ,up a ,girls' ,fair4 ,,the ,,american ,,girl',s ,,handy ,,book ,,how ,,to ,,amuse ,,yourself ,,and ,,others ,by ,,lina and ,,adelia ,b4 ,,beard ,with nearly #ejj ,illustrations by the ,authors ,one volume1 square #hvo1 #b4jj -------- ,eight new chapters have been added to the forty-two which have carried this famous book to the hearts of all the young people since its first appearance1 and everything that the girls of to-day want to know about their sports1 games1 and winter afternoon and evening work1 is told clearly and simply in this helpful and entertaining volume4 ,the volume is fully and handsomely illustrated from drawings by the authors1 whose designs are in the best sense illustrative of the text4 ,illustration ,,summary ,,of ,,contents ,first of ,april--,wild ,flowers and ,their ,preservation--,the ,walking ,club--,easter-,egg ,games--,how to ,make a ,lawn ,tennis ,net--,may-,day ,sports--,midsummer-,eve ,games and ,sports--,sea-side ,cottage ,decoration--,a ,girl's ,fourth of ,july--,an ,impression ,album--,picnics1 ,burgoos1 and ,corn-,roasts--,botany as ,applied to ,art--,quiet ,games for ,hot ,weather--,how to ,make a ,hammock--,corn-,husk and ,flower ,dolls--,how to ,make ,fans--,all ,hallow ,eve--,nature's ,fall ,decorations and ,how to ,use ,them--,nutting ,parties--,how to ,draw1 ,paint in ,oil-colors1 and ,model in ,clay and ,wax--,china ,painting--,christmas ,festivities1 and ,home-made ,christmas ,gifts--,amusements and ,games for the ,holidays--,golf--,bicycling--,swimming- -,physical ,culture--,girls' ,clubs--,a ,new ,seashore ,game--,apple ,target ,shooting--,water ,fairies4 ,,louisa ,m4 ,,alcott wrote3 8,i have put it in my list of good and useful books for young people1 as ,i have many requests for advice from my little friends and their anxious mothers4 ,i am most happy to commend your very ingenious and entertaining book40 ,,grace ,,greenwood wrote3 8,it is a treasure which1 once possessed1 no practical girl would willingly part with4 ,it is an invaluable aid in making a home attractive1 comfortable1 artistic1 and refined4 ,the book preaches the gospel of cheerfulness1 industry1 economy1 and comfort40 ,,the ,,american ,,boy',s ,,handy ,,book ,or1 ,what ,to ,do and ,how ,to ,do ,it ,by ,,daniel ,c4 ,,beard ,one volume1 #hvo1 fully ,illustrated by the ,author1 #b4jj -------- ,mr4 ,beard's book tells the active1 inventive1 and practical ,american boy the things he really wants to know2 the thousand things he wants to do1 and the ten thousand ways in which he can do them1 with the helps and ingenious contrivances which every boy can either procure or make4 ,the author divides the book among the sports of the four seasons2 and he has made an almost exhaustive collection of the cleverest modern devices1 besides himself inventing an immense number of capital and practical ideas4 ,illustration ,,summary ,,of ,,contents ,kite ,time--,war ,kites--,novel ,modes of ,fishing--,home-made ,fishing ,tackle--,how to ,stock1 ,make1 and ,keep a ,fresh-water ,aquarium--,how to ,stock and ,keep a ,marine ,aquarium--,knots1 ,bends1 and ,hitches--,dredge1 ,tangle1 and ,trawl ,fishing--,home-made ,boats--,how to ,rig and ,sail ,small ,boats--,how to ,camp ,out ,without a ,tent--,how to ,rear ,wild ,birds--,home-made ,hunting ,apparatus--,traps and ,trapping--,dogs--,practical ,taxidermy for ,boys--,snow ,houses and ,statuary--,winged ,skaters--,winter ,fishing--,indoor ,amusements--,how to ,make a ,magic ,lantern--,puppet ,shows--,home-made ,masquerade and ,theatrical ,costumes--,with many other subjects of a kindred nature4 8,it is an excellent publication1 and is heartily recommended to parents40--,the ,brooklyn ,eagle4 8,the book has this great advantage over its predecessors1 that most of the games1 tricks1 and other amusements described in it are new4 ,it treats of sports adapted to all seasons of the year2 it is practical1 and it is well illustrated40--,the ,new ,york ,tribune4 8,it tells boys how to make all kinds of things--boats1 traps1 toys1 puzzles1 aquariums1 fishing tackle2 how to tie knots1 splice ropes1 to make bird calls1 sleds1 blow guns1 balloons2 how to rear wild birds1 to train dogs1 and do the thousand and one things that boys take delight in4 ,the book is illustrated in such a way that no mistake can be made2 and the boy who gets a copy of this book will consider himself set up in business40--,the ,indianapolis ,journal4 ,the ,outdoor ,handy ,book ,,for ,,playground1 ,,field ,,and ,,forest ,by ,,daniel ,c4 ,,beard ,with more than #cjj ,illustrations by the ,author4 ,square #hvo1 #b4jj -------- 8,it tells how to play all sorts of games with marbles1 how to make and spin more kinds of tops than most boys ever heard of1 how to make the latest things in plain and fancy kites1 where to dig bait and how to fish1 all about boats and sailing1 and a host of other things which can be done outdoors4 ,the volume is profusely illustrated and will be an unmixed delight to any boy40--,new ,york ,tribune4 ,illustration ,,summary ,,of ,,contents ,marbles--,tops--,latest ,things in ,kites--,aerial ,fish and ,dragons--,hoops and ,wheels--,how to ,make the ,sucker--,up in the ,air on ,stilts--,bait1 ,live and ,dead--,fishing--,aquatic ,sports--,rigs of ,all ,kinds for ,small ,boats--,shells and ,canoes--,hints for ,collectors--,honey-,bee ,messengers--,a 8,zoo0--,choosing ,up and 8,it0--,counting ,out ,rhymes--,swimming--,games of ,tag--,i ,spy--,leap ,frog--,various ,sports for ,hot ,days--,tip ,cat--,games of ,ball--,mumbly ,peg1 ,hop-,scotch1 and ,jack ,stones--,hints for ,bicyclists--,camping ,out--,boy's ,ballista--8,tally-ho60 and ,other ,cries--,indian ,games for ,boys--,football--,golf1 ,hockey1 and ,shinny--,turtle ,hunting--,skating--,stunning ,muskrats and ,fish--,snowball ,battle and ,snow ,tag--,sleds4 ,from ,,charles ,,dana ,,gibson3 8,it makes a man of a boy and a boy of a man40 8,this book is praiseworthy from end to end1 and will find favor even with those who have long since passed to man's estate40--,the ,nation4 8,it is one of the completest things of the kind ever written1 and with it one can hardly conceive how a boy could be without pleasant and profitable amusement at any time4 ,it treats of directions for every season of the year1 in and out of doors1 and on land and water4 ,one of the best things about it is that it furnishes employment for a boy's ingenuity and mechanical skill4 ,it seems as if this book must be destined to an immense popularity40--,the ,advance4 ,the ,jack of ,all ,trades ,,or1 ,,new ,,ideas ,,for ,,american ,,boys ,by ,,daniel ,c4 ,,beard ,profusely ,illustrated4 ,square #hvo1 #b4jj -------- ,illustration 8,every boy who is handy with tools of any sort will enjoy this book40--,youth's ,companion4 8,this book is a capital one to give any boy for a present at ,christmas1 on a birthday1 or indeed at any time40--,the ,outlook4 8,full of new ideas for active boys who like to use tools and see interesting things growing under their hands40--,n4 ,y4 ,tribune4 8,a perfect treasure-house of things that delight the soul of a boy and keep him happy and busy40--,the ,interior4 ,,contents ,part ,i4 ,fair ,weather ,ideas ,tree-,top ,club-,houses--,how to ,capture and ,trap ,small ,live ,animals--,the ,back-,yard ,zoo--,a ,back-,yard ,fish-,pond--,pigeon and ,bantam ,coops--,how to ,make a ,back-,yard ,aviary--,a ,boy's ,back-,yard ,workshop--,how to ,build an ,underground ,club-,house--,a ,boys' ,club-,house on the ,water--,how to ,have ,fun on a ,picnic--,how to ,build and ,how to ,furnish a ,daniel ,boone ,cabin--,flat ,boatman's ,house--,the ,american ,boy's ,house ,boat--,back-,yard ,switchback--,how to ,build a ,toboggan ,slide in the ,back-,yard4 ,part ,,ii4 ,rainy ,weather ,ideas ,a ,home-,made ,circus--,good ,games with ,toothpicks and ,matches--,fun with ,scissors and ,pasteboard and ,paper--,how to ,prepare and ,give a ,boys' ,chalk ,talk--,a ,christmas ,novelty for ,boys--,how to ,make ,two ,boys into ,one ,santa ,claus--,a ,circus in the ,attic--,a ,boys' ,stag ,party--,a ,wild ,west ,show in the ,house--,how to ,have a ,panorama ,show4 ,,charles ,,scribner',s ,,sons1 ,publishers #aec-aeg ,fifth ,avenue1 ,new ,york 99 99 99 99 99 ,transcriber's ,notes3 ,obvious punctuation errors repaired4 ,page #abi1 ,fig4 #ach1 8holyhock0 changed to 8hollyhock0 7,paper hollyhock tied7 ,page #afe1 8pastboard0 change to 8pasteboard0 7stiff pastboard like7 ,page #afh1 text obscurred1 word 8of0 presumed and added 7of black muslin7 ,page #aga1 ,fig4 #bbj1 8sleighs0 changed to 8sleigh0 7ready for the sleigh7 ,page #aib1 8at0 changed to 8as0 7attractive as these7 ,page #bbb1 the text references ,fig4 #bie1 but the text omits a figure with that name4 ,page #bcf1 8edtire0 changed to 8entire0 7and the entire length7 ,page #cae1 8sitff0 changed to 8stiff0 7three stiff pasteboard7 ,page #cbj1 8thes ame0 changed to 8the same0 7do the same with7 ,page #dce1 word 8a0 added to text 7two and a half7